GE CTe Dual - Prospeed.Fuctional Check Adjusment

GE Healthcare
gehealthcare.com
Technical
Publications
2326039
Revision 21
CT/e Dual, ProSpeed AII/FII Series

Functional Check/Adjustment
Copyright © 2001-2010 by General Electric Company
Operating Documentation
GE HEALTHCARE FUNCTIONAL CHECK/ADJUSTMENT
REV 21 2326039
警告 • 本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果维修服务提供商需要非英文版本，客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修人员，操作员或患者造成触电、机械伤害或其他形式的
伤害。
VÝSTRAHA • Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

• V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je
(CS) zajištění překladu do odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní
návod a pochopili jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka
prodejního servisu, obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického
proudu, respektive vlivem mechanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL • Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

• Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det
(DA) kundens ansvar at sørge for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret medmindre denne servicemanual har været
konsulteret og er forstået.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af
elektrisk, mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING • Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

• Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant
(NL) verantwoordelijk voor de vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden voordat deze
onderhoudshandleiding werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het
onderhoudspersoneel, de operator of een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als
gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische of andere gevaren.
WARNING • This Service Manual is available in English only.

• If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the
(EN) customer's responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been
consulted and is understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider,
operator, or patient, from electric shock or from mechanical or other hazards.
a
HOIATUS • Käesolev teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

• Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles,
(ET) vastutab klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt
käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või
patsiendi vigastamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS • Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

• Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia,
(FI) tarvittavan käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt
tämän huolto-ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön,
laitteiston käyttäjän tai potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen
vian tai muun vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION • Ce manuel de service n'est disponible qu'en anglais.

• Si le technicien du client a besoin de ce manuel dans une autre langue que
(FR) l'anglais, c'est au client qu'il incombe de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que le manuel service n'a
pas été consulté et compris
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien,
l'opérateur ou le patient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques,
mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG • Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in Englischer Sprache.

• Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es aufgabe
(DE) des Kunden für eine Entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten,
ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und verstanden zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des
Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch
stromschläge, Mechanische oder Sonstige gefahren kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ • Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

• Εάν το άτομο παροχής σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε
(EL) γλώσσα εκτός των αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει
υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό εκτός εαν
έχετε συμβουλευτεί και έχετε κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Εαν δε λάβετε υπόψη την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί
τραυματισμός στο άτομο παροχής σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από
ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή άλλους κινδύνους.
b
FIGYELMEZTETÉS • Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

(HU) • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő
felelőssége a fordítás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási
kézikönyvben leírtakat nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a
beteg áramütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését
eredményezheti.
AÐVÖRUN • Þessi þjónustuhandbók er eingöngu fáanleg á ensku.

• Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er
(IS) það skylda viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók
hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda,
stjórnanda eða sjúklings frá raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA • Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in inglese.

• Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il
(IT) cliente è tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Si proceda alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il
presente manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto
• Il non rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe far compiere operazioni da
cui derivino lesioni all'addetto, alla manutenzione, all'utilizzatore ed al paziente
per folgorazione elettrica, per urti meccanici od altri rischi.
警告 • このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業は
その業者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないで
ください。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さ
んが、感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 • 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .

(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 , 번역 서비스를 제공
하는 것은 고객의 책임입니다 .
• 본 서비스 지침서를 참고했고 이해하지 않는 한은 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시
도하지 마십시오 .
• 이 경고에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크 , 기계상의 혹은 다른 위험으로부터 서비
스 제공자 , 운영자 혹은 환자에게 위해를 가할 수 있습니다 .
c
BRDINJUMS • Šī apkalpes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

• Ja klienta apkalpes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, nevis
(LV) angļu, klienta pienākums ir nodrošināt tulkošanu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkalpi bez apkalpes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un
saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošana var radīt elektriskās strāvas trieciena, mehānisku
vai citu risku izraisītu traumu apkalpes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS • Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra prieinamas tik anglų kalba.

• Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, numatyti
(LT) vertimo paslaugas yra kliento atsakomybė.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, nebent atsižvelgėte į šį
eksploatavimo vadovą ir jį supratote.
• Jei neatkreipsite dėmesio į šį perspėjimą, galimi sužalojimai dėl elektros šoko,
mechaninių ar kitų pavojų paslaugų tiekėjui, operatoriui ar pacientui.
ADVARSEL • Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

• Hvis kundens serviceleverandør trenger et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar
(NO) å sørge for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og
forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren,
operatøren eller pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller
andre farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE • Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

• Jeśli dostawca usług klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie
(PL) usługi tłumaczenia jest obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować wyposażenia bez zapoznania się i zrozumienia
niniejszego podręcznika serwisowego.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może spowodować urazy dostawcy
usług, operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia elektrycznego, zagrożenia
mechanicznego bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, que não a gems, solicitar
(PT-BR) estes manuais noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os
serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado ecompreendido este
manual de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode por em perigo a segurança do técnico,
operador ou paciente devido a choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
d
ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

• Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, que não a gems, solicitar
(PT-PT) estes manuais noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os
serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado ecompreendido este
manual de assistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do
técnico, do operador ou do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos
ou outros.
ATENŢIE • Acest manual de service este disponibil numai în limba engleză.

• Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea
(RO) engleză, este de datoria clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii
acestui manual de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului,
operatorului sau pacientului în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau
de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! • Данное руководство по обслуживанию предлагается только на английском

языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на
английском, а на каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно
обеспечить перевод.
• Перед обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к данному
руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к
тому, что специалист по обслуживанию, оператор или пациент получат
удар электрическим током, механическую травму или другое
повреждение.
UPOZORENJE • Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

• Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi
(SR) prevodilacke usluge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uredaj ako niste procitali i razumeli ovo servisno
uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povredivanja servisera,
rukovaoca ili pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili mehanickih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNENIE • Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

• Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu,
(SK) poskytnutie prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia skôr, ako si neprečítate návod na obluhu
a neporozumiete mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže vyústiť do zranenia poskytovateľa
služieb, obsluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, do
mechanického alebo iného nebezpečenstva.
e
ATENCION • Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

• Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea
(ES) el inglés, el cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y
comprendido este manual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de
servicios, el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas
eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
VARNING • Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.

• Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska
(SV) ansvarar kunden för att tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den
här servicehandboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på
serviceteknikern, operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar,
mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
DIKKAT • Bu servis kilavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

• Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kilavuzu ingilizce dişinda bir başka lisandan talep
(TR) ederse, bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kilavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyariya uyulmamasi, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayi
teknisyen, operatör veya hastanin yaralanmasina yol açabilir.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕН • Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

• Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на
ИЕ клиента е да осигури превод.
(BG) • Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали
упътването за работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на
доставчика на услугата, оператора или пациент в резултат на токов удар
или механична или друга опасност.
UPOZORENJE • Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

(HR) • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati
prijevod.
• Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli
ovaj servisni priručnik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge,
operatera ili pacijenta uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
警告 • 本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險
而受傷。
f
警告 • 本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他
的危險。
OPOZORILO • Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora
stranka zagotoviti prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in
razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara,
mehanskih ali drugih nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL
copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving
agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event,
within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company
will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
To file a report:
Fill out a report on http://egems.med.ge.com/edq/home.jsp
Contact the local service coordinator.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products,
GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the
requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
g
REV 21 2326039
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly
read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The
General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical
design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate
precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.
It is important that anyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, and
representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective materials and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.
LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.
GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this publication.
h
GE HEALTHCARE FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 21 2326039
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Tab - Section Page REV 5 (Table) i 0
Title page 21 Elevation Functions 1-1 to 1-7 19

-
Title page rear blank Longitudinal Function 2-1 to 2-13 0
(Warning and other Short Foot Print Function 3-1 to 3-3 0
a to h 21
important information)
6 (DAS/Detector) i 0
(Revision Information) A to D 21
DAS Operation 1-1 to 1-7 5
1 (Introduction) i 11 DC Power Supply 2-1 to 2-2 20
General 1-1 to 1-6 0
7 (X-ray Generator) i 0
Torque Value for Screw Tightening 2-1 to 2-5 0
X-ray Tube 1-1 to 1-3 5
Common Procedures 3-1 to 3-28 11
KV and mA 2-1 to 2-8 5
2 (System) i to ii 18
8 (Switch/Jumper Setting) i to ii 20
Checks during System Installation 1-1 to 1-18 2
Operator Console 1-1 to 1-31 20
Software Loading V/R 2.00 Or Lat-
2-1 to 2-68 18 Gantry 2-1 to 2-16 20
er (For O2 Computer OC)
Software Loading V/R 3.10 Or Lat- DAS/DETECTOR 3-1 to 3-5 0
3-1 to 3-54 18
er (For Linux Computer OC) X-ray Generator 4-1 to 4-16 0
X-ray Alignment 4-1 to 4-26 20 PDU (Power Distribution Unit) 5-1 0
System Calibration 5-1 to 5-13 20
Appendix A-1 to A-4 0
Image Performance Verification 6-1 to 6-12 13 Simbols and Classification
System Level Safety Tests 7-1 to 7-10 17 - Blank/Rear cover -
3 (Operator Console) i to ii 4
OC Components (For O2 Compu-

1-1 to 1-6 4
ter)
OC Operation (For O2 Computer) 2-1 to 2-11 5
OC Components (For Linux Com-
3-1 to 3-6 4
puter)
OC Operation (For Linux Computer 4-1 to 4-10 5
4 (Gantry) i to ii1 13
DC Power Suplies 1-1 to 1-3 20

Rotational Mechanism 2-1 to 2-20 20
Rotational Operation 3-1 to 3-7 7
Slip Ring and Brushes 4-1 to 4-15 20
Tilt Operation 5-1 to 5-11 21
Collimator 6-1 to 6-11 5
Table and Gantry 7-1 to 7-14 0
A
REV 21 2326039
REVISION HISTORY
REV Date Primary Reason for Change
21 06/21/10 Warning Added Languagewarning for Slovenian.
Introduction -
System -
Operator Console -
Gantry Updated Gantry Tilt Angle Adjustment. (Sec. 5)
Table -
DAS/Detector -
X-ray Generator -
Switch/Jumper -
20 12/15/09 Warning Added three Languagewarnings for HongKong, Taiwan and Croatian.
System Deleted rear lead plate for Collimator. (Sec. 4)

Added notice to remind service of the detector temperasture for POR and BOW. (Sec. 4)
Added notice to remind service to check asymmetric scan option before system calibration, (Sec.
5)
Gantry Updated NPDAS Power Supply modules. (Sec. 1)

Updated Illustration 2-6 Photo Sensor & Plate Position. (Sec. 2)
Updated Ring Service Tool Resistor from 120W to 120ohm for Signal Brush Contact voltage test.
(Sec. 4)
DAS/Detector Updated NPDAS Power Supply modules. (Sec. 2)
Switch/Jumper Updated DASIFN switches and jumpers setting. (Sec. 1)

Updated DTRF jumpers setting. (Sec. 2)
19 07/03/09 Table Updated Table Height Setting. (Sec. 1)
18 12/24/08 Warning Added new languages for PT-BR (Portuguese-Brazil) and SR (Serbian).
Renamed PT to PT-PT (Portuguese-Portugal).
System Updated GEMS-Asia Support Center. (Sec. 2 and Sec. 3)

Deleted OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips for O2 system according to PQR13206154. (Sec. 3)
Switch/Jumper Added detailed Switch/Jumper function setting for 5” MOD Drive. (Sec. 1)
Added new model (WD1601ABYS) for SATA HDD (5133747). (Sec. 1)
B
REV 21 2326039
REVSION HISTORY
17 04/25/08 System Updated boot information and Insite Information, change them from application version to OS ver-
sion. (Sec. 3)
Updated commands for system port number confirm according to PQR13164985. (Sec. 3)
Deleted DVD Interchange information. (Sec. 3)
Added new section for System Level Safety Tests (leakage current test) according to regulation
requirement. (Sec. 7)
Switch/Jumper Updated CD-ROM Drive (5147738) for USB-IDE Cable connection according to PQR13164982.
(Sec. 1)
Added 3.5" HDD (5166701) Switch/Jumper information for O2 system according to
PQR13162167. (Sec. 1)
16 10/18/07 Switch/Jumper Added SATA Hard Disk Drive (5133747) information according to PQR13138169. (Sec. 1)
15 09/12/07 Gantry Updated Gantry rotation Balance. (Sec. 2)
14 07/11/07 Switch/Jumper Added new RearCN1 (5237815) jumper setup. (Sec. 1)

13 12/29/06 System Updated PLANE OF ROTATION and ISO ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT according to
PQR13094333. (Sec. 4)
Updated Image Performance Check List (for EII) according to PQR13090565. (Sec. 6)
Gantry Updated Slip Ring Cleaning information. (Sec. 4)
12 04/18/06 System Updated LFC Procedure contents. (Sec. 3)
Switch/Jumper Updated Linux OC CD-ROM Drive. (Sec. 1)

11 08/22/05 Introduction Added Gantry Cover Adjustment. (Sec. 3)
System Deleted 3-17 SETUP PAPER BASED NETWORK COLOR PRINTER. (Sec. 3)
10 03/16/05 System Added contents of port type. (Sec. 3)
9 12/16/04 System Modification item for Twin LinuxV/R4.00, updated contents of Software Loading (Sec. 3)
Added DVD Interchange installation which is included in Patch Software V/R4.01 (Sec. 3)
Switch/Jumper Updated Front Panel for Linux Computer (from 2369648 to 2396498) (Sec. 1)
8 09/20/04 System Deleted Important Note (Seq5+CT# Is Not Necessary for Upgrading from Twin Linux V/R3.32 (or
earlier) to V/R 3.60 (or later)) (Sec. 3)
Added contents of Setup Paper Based Network Color Printer according to PQR13022861 (Sec. 3)
Updated 3-16 InSite Installation, Prerequisite (Sec. 3)
Switch/Jumper Added detailed position of S1 on DASIFN2 Board (Sec. 1)
C
REV 21 2326039
REVSION HISTORY
7 02/18/04 System Updated: Illustration 3-1 Software Loading Standard Procedure (Sec. 3)
Updated: 3-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM and 3-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (Sec. 3)
Added: 3-8-1-1 LFC Normal Procedure and 3-8-1-2 LFC Recovery Procedure (Sec. 3)
Updated: 3-8-2 Application Software Installation Only (LFW Procedure) and 3-9 EJECTING THE
CD-ROM AND MOD (Sec. 3)
Updated: 3-12-1 Configuration Setup, Step 4 (Sec. 3)
Gantry Updated: Step 3 for 3-4 ROTATION SPEED (Sec. 3)
Table Added: Note in Step 10 for 1-2 INSTALLATION OF THE FOOT SWITCH (PEDAL AND MAT TYPE)
(Sec. 1)
6 11/10/03 System Updated: Info of Setting Gamma Value (Sec. 3)
5 08/28/03 System Updated: LFC Procedure (Part 1 and 2) (Sec. 3)

Changed: “System Func. Check” to “Diagnostics” (Sec. 5)
Operator Console Changed: “Diagnostics & analysis” to “Diagnostics”, and “H/W Diagnostics” to “H/W Diag (Shut-
down) (Sec. 2, Sec. 4)
Changed: Some information of Audio Function Test and MISC Test (Sec. 4)
Gantry Changed: “System Func. Check” and “Diagnostics & Analysis” to “Diagnostics” (Sec. 6)
DAS/Detector Changed: “System Func. Check” and “Diagnostics & Analysis” to “Diagnostics” (Sec. 1)
X-ray Generator Changed: “System Func. Check” to “Diagnostics” (Sec. 1, Sec. 2)

Switch/Jumper Changed: LED postion in Illustration “FRONT PNL (2369648)” (Sec. 1)
4 05/14/03 System Added: Software loading and other information for Linux Computer OC (Sec. 2, Sec. 3, Sec. 4, Sec.
5)
Added: A section for software loading of Linux Computer OC.
Operator Console Added: Two new sections for Linux Computer OC after the two sections for O2 Computer OC (Sec.
1, Sec. 2)
Switch/Jumper Updated: Information of Linux Computer OC (Sec. 1)

3 01/27/03 System Corrected: Steps of the filter center adjustment (Sec. 3)
Switch/Jumper Updated: NPRM Board (Sec. 1)

2 08/10/02 System Changed Warm Up Scan time from 3 minutes to 1.5 minutes (Sec. 1)
Deleted ‘ProSpeed AI/FI, CT/e Series’ in Configuration Setup (Sec. 2)
Changed some illustrations (Sec. 2)
Switch/Jumper Added some information of NPRS (Sec. 1)

Corrected S1 Description in Table 2-2 (Sec. 2)
1 06/20/02 System Changed: OC Rear Side View (Sec. 1)
Added: EII in Table6-1, EII in Configuration Setup Step 6b (Sec. 2)
Corrected: Direction to move the nut of X-Ray tube (Sec. 3)
Changed: ‘VENUS Tube’ to ‘ESR Tube’ (Sec. 4)
Changed: Image Performance Check list (Sec. 5)
Gantry Added: ‘Except for ProSpeed EII’ in Raw Data File (Sec 6)
X-ray Generator Added: 2.0 Sec and 45 mA for ProSpeed EII (Sec. 1)
Added: 160 for ProSpeed EII (Sec. 2)
Switch/Jumper Changed: Bit settings (Sec. 1)
0 3/30/02 Initial Release
D
REV 11 2326039
INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-1 Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-2 Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-1 [Conversion: kgf•cm -> N•m] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-2 [Conversion: N•m -> kgf•cm] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2-3 [Conversion: N•m -> lbf•ft] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
SECTION 2 - TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 NORMAL SCREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
SECTION 3 - COMMON PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 HOW TO REMOVE GANTRY COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1-1 Gantry Side Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1-2 Gantry Front Cover Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-3 Gantry Rear Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-1-4 Safety Switch Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-2 INSTALLING GANTRY COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-2-2 Gantry Service Angle Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-2-3 Gantry Cover Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-3 REMOVAL OF PDU COVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-4 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-4-1 Saving System State Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-4-2 Restoring System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-4-3 Displaying the SMPTE image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-4-4 Performing the System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-4-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed-base System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-4-5-1 When ‘Permanent’ is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-4-5-2 When ‘Flex Trial’ is selected:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
i INTRODUCTION
ii INTRODUCTION
REV 0 2326039
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL

This CT system is especially dangerous because its heavy gantry continuously rotates at a high speed with high
power electric current (380 ∼ 480 VAC) conducted through its slip rings.
The hazards, although sometimes obvious, need to be recognized since the potential for serious injury or death
exists.
WARNING
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY!!
READ AND THOROUGHLY UNDERSTAND THE ‘PROSPEED SERIES SAFETY GUIDELINES/
EMC’ MANUAL (2327333) BEFORE PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE IN THIS ‘FUNCTIONAL
CHECK/ADJUSTMENT.’
Use of This Manual

Use this ‘Functional Check/Adjustment’ for the following purposes:
• A during- and post-installation check to ensure that the entire system operates properly.
• As a reference source for Periodic Maintenance which mainly contains abbreviated lists.
• A post-FMI (Field Modification Instruction) check to verify system operation.
• A pre-diagnostic check to verify or determine failure symptoms before or during troubleshooting.
• A post-diagnostic check to verify system operation after repairs, before returning it to the customer to
use.
1-1 INTRODUCTION
REV 0 2326039
1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE
1-1-1 Gantry
WARNING
ROTATION AND ELECTROCUTION HAZARDS!
SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ AND ‘XG POWER (SAFETY LOOP)’ SWITCHES LOCATED AT
THE REAR OF THE GANTRY BASE BEFORE INSERTING ANY OBJECT INTO OR WORKING
ON THE GANTRY.
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
ALWAYS INSERT THE GANTRY AZIMUTH LOCK PIN BEFORE REPLACING THE TUBE, DAS,
DETECTOR, HV TANK, OR OTHER WEIGHTY COMPONENTS.
WARNING
ELECTROCUTION!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON UNSHIELDED TERMINALS. USE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
ANY OF THE FOLLOWINGS WILL INITIATE THE GANTRY ROTATION:
1. POWERING ON THE SYSTEM OR GANTRY.
2. SWITCHING ON THE ‘TABLE/TILT’ SWITCH.
3. PUSHING THE RESET SWITCH ON THE TGP BOARD.
4. PUSHING THE POSITIONING LIGHT BUTTON.
5. RESETTING OR POWERING OFF THE HOST COMPUTER.
6. PUSHING THE RESET SWITCH ON THE DBPCI BOARD.
STAND CLEAR OF THE ROTATING GANTRY.
1-2 INTRODUCTION
REV 0 2326039
1-1-2 Operator Console
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
IF THE SYSTEM HAS UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER BEFORE
YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST ON EXPOSED SURFACES. USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION
Rotating fan assemblies!
Do not place any item into rotating blades. Use extra care when working near fan
assemblies.
NOTICE
Turn OFF power before removing or inserting any board or plug.
1-3 INTRODUCTION
REV 0 2326039
1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES

Use the following conversion formula and table to change a unit suitable for a torque wrench you have.
1-2-1[Conversion: kgf•cm -> N•m]

Conversion Formula:
xx (N•m) = xxxx (kgf•cm) x 0.098
Conversion Table:
1 kgf•cm = 0.098 N•m
Coversion: kgf•cm -> N•m
kgf•cm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
N•m
0 0 0.0981 0.1961 0.2942 0.3923 0.4903 0.5884 0.6865 0.7845 0.8826
10 0.9807 1.0787 1.1768 1.2748 1.3729 1.4710 1.5690 1.6671 1.7652 1.8632
20 1.9613 2.0594 2.1574 2.2555 2.3536 2.4516 2.5497 2.6478 2.7458 2.8439
30 2.9420 3.0400 3.1381 3.2361 3.3342 3.4323 3.5303 3.6284 3.7265 3.8245
40 3.9226 4.0207 4.1187 4.2168 4.3149 4.4129 4.5110 4.6091 4.7071 4.8052
50 4.9033 5.0013 5.0994 5.1974 5.2955 5.3936 5.4916 5.5897 5.6878 5.7858
60 5.8840 5.9820 6.0800 6.1781 6.2762 6.3742 6.4723 6.5704 6.6684 6.7665
70 6.8646 6.9626 7.0607 7.1587 7.2568 7.3549 7.4529 7.5510 7.6491 7.7474
80 7.8452 7.9433 8.0413 8.1394 8.2375 8.3355 8.4336 8.5317 8.6297 8.7278
90 8.8260 8.9239 9.0220 9.1200 9.2181 9.3162 9.4142 9.5123 9.6104 9.7084
100 9.8065
1-4 INTRODUCTION
REV 0 2326039
1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES (CONTINUED)
1-2-2[Conversion: N•m -> kgf•cm]

Conversion Formula:
xx (kgf•cm) = xxxx (N•m) x 10.2
Conversion Table:
1 N•m = 10.2 kgf•cm
Conversion: N•m -> kgf•cm
N•m 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
kgf•cm
0 0 10 20 31 41 51 61 71 82 92
10 102 112 122 133 143 153 163 173 184 194
20 204 214 224 235 245 255 265 275 286 296
30 306 316 326 337 347 357 367 377 388 398
40 408 418 428 439 449 459 469 479 490 500
50 510 520 530 541 551 561 571 581 592 602
60 612 622 632 643 653 663 673 683 694 704
70 714 724 734 745 755 765 775 785 796 806
80 816 826 836 847 857 867 877 887 898 908
90 918 928 938 949 959 969 979 989 1000 1010
100 1020
1-5 INTRODUCTION
REV 0 2326039
1-2 TORQUE CONVERSION TABLES (CONTINUED)
1-2-3[Conversion: N•m -> lbf•ft]

Conversion Formula:
xx (lbf•ft) = xxxx (N•m) x 0.737
xx (N•m) = xxxx (lbf•ft) x 1.356
Conversion Table:
1 N•m=0.737 lbf•ft
Conversion: N•m -> lbf•ft
N•m 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
lbf•ft
0 0 0.737 1.474 2.211 2.948 3.685 4.422 5.159 5.896 6.633
10 7.370 8.107 8.844 9.581 10.318 11.055 11.792 12.529 13.266 14.003
20 14.740 15.477 16.214 16.951 17.688 18.425 19.162 19.899 20.636 21.373
30 22.110 22.847 23.584 24.321 25.058 25.795 26.532 27.269 28.006 28.743
40 29.480 30.217 30.954 31.691 32.428 33.165 33.902 34.639 35.376 36.113
50 36.850 37.587 38.324 39.061 39.798 40.535 41.272 42.009 42.746 43.483
60 44.220 44.957 45.694 46.431 47.168 47.905 48.642 49.379 50.116 50.853
70 51.590 52.327 53.064 53.801 54.538 55.275 56.012 56.749 57.486 58.223
80 58.960 59.697 60.434 61.171 61.908 62.645 63.382 64.119 64.856 65.593
90 66.330 67.067 67.804 68.541 69.278 70.015 70.752 71.489 72.226 72.963
100 73.700
1-6 INTRODUCTION
REV 0 2326039
SECTION 2 - TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING
CAUTION
Use locktite for screws which are installed to the Gantry rotation block. Use stud bolt with
locktite or nylon nut to prevent loosening if a screw is removed in service maintenance.
CAUTION
When you secure stud bolts with locktite, you must keep the screw torque shown in Table
‘Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite.’
Do not rotate the Gantry until the locktite hardens. (75 % of maximum strength after 2 hours;
100 % after 16 hours.)
If it is not possible to wait for the time period mentioned above, use nylon nuts.
Table 2-1 Stud Bolt (Steel) with Locktite
Screw Size Torque [kg-cm]

(Unless
otherwise
specified)
M4 10
M5 15
M6 35
M8 70
2-1 INTRODUCTION
REV 0 2326039
2-1 NORMAL SCREWS

Secure normal screws with the tightening torque shown in the following tables unless otherwise specified.
Table 2-2 Pan Head Screw
Screw Size Torque [kg-cm] (Unless otherwise specified)
Brass Steel (4.8) Stainless (Combination)

(Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut) (Screw & Nut)
M1 0.17 0.18 0.22 If screw and nut

are of different
material, use the
weakest torque.
M 1.2 0.32 0.34 0.42
M 1.4 0.49 0.52 0.65
M 1.7 0.90 0.96 1.2
M2 1.5 1.6 1.9
M 2.2 1.9 2.0 2.5
M 2.3 2.3 2.5 3.1
M 2.5 3.0 3.2 4.0
M 2.6 3.4 3.6 4.5
M3 5.3 5.7 7.1
M 3.5 8.2 8.7 11
M4 12 13 16
M 4.5 17.5 19 23.5
M5 24.5 26.5 33
M6 41.5 44 55
M8 101 108 135
2-2 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
SECTION 3 - COMMON PROCEDURES
3-1 HOW TO REMOVE GANTRY COVERS
3-1-1 Gantry Side Cover Removal
1. Set the Gantry to the 0° position and lower the table to the lowest positon.
2. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, “Safety Loop” and “Table/Tilt” switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Remove the two screw caps and mounting bolts, then move the cover forward or rearward to remove the cover.
Illustration 3-1 Removing the Side Cover from the Frame

Right Side Cover
3-1 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-1-2 Gantry Front Cover Removal

1. Set the Gantry to the 0° position and lower the table to the lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the OC power and the “Rotate”, “XG Power”, “Safety Loop” and “Table/Tilt” switches at the Gantry
rear base.
3. Remove the left and right Side Covers.
4. Remove the dust-proof.
5. Install the four service angle studs onto the Gantry Front Cover.
6. Install the two service angles to the studs. See Illustration 3-2.
7. Remove the four Front Cover mounting bolts.
Illustration 3-2 Attaching the Service Angles
STUDS
SERVICE
ANGLE
3-2 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-1-2 Gantry Front Cover Removal (Continued)

8. Slightly disengage the front cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors
of the FCV BD Assy of the front cover.
• CN1
• CN8
9. Connect the Gantry control panel cable to the inner gantry display board (SDS BD CN1). (See Illustration 3-3)
Illustration 3-3 Removing the Front Cover from the Frame

FCV BD
(on the
Gantry
Cover) SDS BD
CN1
Front Gantry Cover
10. Support the Front Cover, lift, and move it toward vertical position as shown in Illustration 3-4.
11. END.
Illustration 3-4 Gantry Cover Removal
3 Vertical
2 Horizontal
3-3 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
Gantry Front Cover Removal for a Small Room (with Short-Foot-Print Mode)
Note
Use this method when table height will be set to 500 ~ 800 mm.
1. Set the Gantry to the 0 degree tilt position.
2. Move the cradle to the OUT limit position.
3. Move the table to the DOWN limit position.
4. Cover the cradle with a cloth (or cover protector: 2225358) on the to prevent the front cover from scratches or
damage.
Cloth
5. Remove the left and right side covers.

6. Install the four service angle studs onto the Gantry front cover.
7. Attach the two service angles to the studs.
8. Slightly disengage the front cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors
of the FCV BD Assy of the front cover. See Illustration 3-3.
• CN1
• CN8
9. Connect the Gantry control panel cable to the inner gantry display board (SDS BD CN1).
10. Switch ON the service switch, then rotate the Gantry manually so that the X-ray tube is set to 6 o’clock position.
11. Switch OFF the service switch.
3-4 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

12. Lift up the front cover, then contact the cover to the edge of the cradle and rotate it toward the cradle so that it
stays on the cradle.
NOTICE
Take care not to damage any Gantry Parts (especially the positioning light) when rotating
the front cover toward the cradle.
3-5 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-1-3 Gantry Rear Cover Removal

1. Remove the four screw caps from the sides of the rear cover.
2. To install the service angles to the rear cover, repeat steps 1 to 3 (Front Cover Removal).
3. Slightly disengage the rear cover and disconnect the Gantry control panel cables from the following connectors
of the RCV BD Assy of the rear cover.
• CN1
• CN9
4. Connect the Gantry control panel cables to the dummy connector of the inner gantry display board.
Illustration 3-5 Removing the Rear Cover from the Frame
RCV BD Dummy Connector

CN1
Gantry Rear Cover
3-6 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-1-4 Safety Switch Setting

1. Loosen the safety bracket mounting bolt.
2. Rotate the Gantry safety switch counterclockwise so that the Gantry can rotate.
3. Tighten the safety bracket mounting bolt.
Illustration 3-6 Safety Switch Setting
Front Rear
Screws Bracket
3-2 INSTALLING GANTRY COVERS
3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice

When installing the Gantry covers, verify that:
• The azimuth locking pin should be disengaged.
• The Gantry tilt lock(s) should be removed.
• The safety switch should be released.
• The connectors (CN1 and CN9) should be connected properly to the RCV BD on the rear cover.
• The connectors (CN1 and CN8) should be connected properly to the FCV BD on the front cover.
3-7 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-2-1 Gantry Cover Notice (Continued)
NOTICE
When installing the Gantry front cover, first cover the front edge of the cradle with a cloth to
prevent the front cover from scratches or damage.
Cloth
3-2-2 Gantry Service Angle Caution
CAUTION
If the service angles (cover stand) fall over, they can injure persons. Therefore, after using
the service angles, keep them in a safe place and/or secure them from falling over even when
the customer or other persons accidentally hit the service angles.
3-8 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-2-3 Gantry Cover Adjustment
Front/Rear Cover adjustment

During the Front/Rear Cover installation, assure the position of the Front/Rear and enough gap between the Gantry
Cover and the rotating subsystem, so need to adjust the Gantry Front/Rear Cover position as below steps.
• Switch ON the Service Switch, rotate the Gantry manually until the tube reaches the 3 o’clock and 9
o’clock position, respectively measure the distance between the Support edge on the Gantry Front/Rear
Cover and the aperture of collimator along horizontal direction with ruler. (See Illustration 3-7)
Illustration 3-7 Measure the distance between the aperture and the support
Tube
Aperture
Support
the Gantry
Rear Cover
3-9 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-2-3 Gantry Cover Adjustment (Continued)

• Compare the two distances, if the difference is more than 5mm, remove the Front/Rear Cover from the
Gantry, loose the mounting bolts (marked in Illustration 3-8) and adjust the Front/Rear Cover in horizon-
tal direction. Then install the Front/Rear Cover onto the Gantry again.
Illustration 3-8 Adjust the Front Cover in Horizontal Direction
For Front Cover
Mounting Bolts (X12)
• Repeat above steps to assure that the distances difference is within 5mm.
3-10 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-2-3 Gantry Cover Adjustment (Continued)
Side Cover Adjustment

Pressed the side of the Gantry Side Cover under the Gantry Front Cover, the Side Cover location is based on the
Gantry Front Cover. If the gap between the Side Cover and the Rear Cover is too big, adjust the Side Cover in the
vertical position.
• Loose the two mounting bolts on the plate (near the Rear Cover) on the inner side of the Side Cover to
adjust the Side Cover vertically. (See Illustration 3-9)
Illustration 3-9 Side Cover Adjustment
Rear
Front
0RXQWLQJ
%ROW[
3-11 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-3 REMOVAL OF PDU COVERS

1. Verify that the main breaker of the Power Distribution Box should be OFF.
2. Remove the front cover, top cover, and left side cover, and right side cover in this order.
Illustration 3-10 Removing the PDU Covers
1
3
independent
2 1
front cover
Screws
Screws
3-12 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-4 BASIC OPERATION
3-4-1 Saving System State Data

The basic system data (System State data) must be saved in advance in case the System Hard Disk Drive in the
OC is broken.
Note
The following will be saved as a system state data.
- Option key information
- Log files (log for success/failure when saving/restoring software sets)
- Scan protocol files
- IOS preferences
- Calibration files
- Autovoice files
- Next patient exam number
- User preferences
- InSite information
- Tube usage information
- Crosstalk A, B channel data
- TnT Definition File log
- Q cal channel ratio
Preparation
• One 3.5’ MOD
Procedures (Method I)
1. Verify that the system is powered ON. If it is not, switch ON the main switch of the OC. The system is started
up, then the main screen appears.
2. Click on Service icon.
3. Select: Utilities -> SaveState.
4. ‘Insert MOD and press confirm!’ appears. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC, then click on Confirm.
5. Click on Continue several times according to the messages to be displayed.
The MOD auto-format phase will be started, then the system state data are saved on the MOD.
6. About several minutes later, “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Okay.
3-13 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-4-1 Saving System State Data (Continued)
Procedures (Method II)

1. Click on Service icon to display the Service Tool desktop, then select Utilities -> Shutdown -> Application
Shutdown.
2. Click on Savestate.
3. “Insert MOD and press confirm.” appears. Insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC, then click on Confirm.
5. About several minutes later, ‘System state saved successfully‘ appears. Click on Okay.
3-4-2 Restoring System State Data
Procedures
Shutdown.
2. Click on Restorestate.
3. ‘Insert MOD and press confirm.‘ appears. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 3-
4-1, into the MOD drive of the OC, then click on Confirm.
4. ‘This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.‘ appears. Click on Continue.
Note
At this time, you can cancel system-state-data reloading procedure. If ‘Continue‘ is selected, this
procedure can NOT be canceled.
5. ‘Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.‘ appears. Click on Okay.
6. ‘System state restored successfully‘ appears. Click on Continue.
7. To remove the MOD from the MOD drive, press the Eject button on the MOD drive.
8. Select Startup to return to the scan panel screen.
3-14 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-4-3 Displaying the SMPTE image

1. Select Service -> Image Quality -> Install SMPTE image (To install the SMPTE image on the system.)
2. Click on ImageWorks -> Browser to display the examination list.
3. Select ‘SMPTE‘ image in the Examination list.
4. Click on Viewer to display the SMPTE pattern.
5. Enlarge the SMPTE image to full screen display, using Format → Full screen format.
If necessary, drag the Zoom slider to display the pattern to the full screen.
3-15 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-4-4 Performing the System Configuration

Shutdown.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Reconfig button located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration menu appears.
Using this screen, perform configuration.
NOTICE
The characters of alphanumerics, underscore, and period ONLY can be used. If other
characters would be used, the system will not start up. (For the system of V/R 2.5 or more,
other characters are rejected to input even if they are input.)
3. Click on Accept after completing the configuration.

The system shuts down, then starts up automatically.
3-16 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-4-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed-base System

The following tables shows the hierarchical menu (buttons) to install the Option software.
Buttons to be selected
Service Menu Option Installation Main Window Selection Window I Selection Window II
Install Options Install Permanent MOD
Manual
Quit
Flex Trial
Quit
Remove
Quit
Shutdown.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Options button located on the upper right of the screen.
The ‘CT Software Options’ screen appears.
L E
M P
X A
E
3-17 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-4-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed-base System (Continued)

3. Click on Install.
Note
If you click on an option in the Option Name list, the option is highlighted and “Install“ button is dis-
abled. In this case, put the cursor in the option screen, then click on the right button of the mouse
to enable the “Install“ button.
4. Select either Permanent or Flex Trial.
• Permanent: selected when a customer purchased the option formally.
• Flex Trial: selected when a customer uses the option within a fixed time period as a trial. (The message
that notices the expiration date will be displayed over 10 days before the expiration of a Flex Trial.)
3-4-5-1 When ‘Permanent’ is selected

1. Select either MOD or Manual.
• MOD: selected when the Option key MOD is used at installation.
• Manual: selected when the licence string is used at installation. The licence string is an unique number
with 25 characters that you get from your OLC.
3-18 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039
3-4-5 Installing an Option Newly to the Installed-base System(Continued)

2. When MOD is selected:
The following screen appears. Insert the option key MOD into the MOD drive, then click on OK.
The “CT Software Options” screen appears.
L E
M P
X A
E
3-19 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

a. Select the Option to be installed from the “Available Options” table.
Note
You can select several options from the Available Option list at the same time, while pressing the
Ctrl key from the keyboard.
b. Click on Install.
The option loading is started, then the message window appears after completion. The option(s) is dis-
played in the “Installed Options” table.
Note
Just after clicking on Install, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
installed. In this case, a proper entry/selection must be performed. Refer to Option setup window
described in this section.
c. Click on Quit.
d. Click on OK.
e. Eject the option MOD from the MOD drive.
f. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.
3. When Manual is selected:
The following screen appears.

a. Enter the licence string in the box, then click on Accept. The licence string is an unique number with 25
characters that you get from your OLC.
Note
Just after clicking on Accept, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
3-20 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

b. The option loading is started, then the following window appears.
Click on OK.
c. The “CT Software Options” screen appears.

Verify that the option to be installed is displayed in the list as a ‘permanent’ mode.
L E
M P
A
EX
3-21 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

d. Click on Quit.
e. Click on OK.
f. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.
4. On the desktop menu, click on Startup button located on the upper right of the screen, return to the scan panel
screen.
5. Perform Section 3-4-1, Saving System State Data for backup.
3-4-5-2 When ‘Flex Trial’ is selected:

1. Enter the licence string in the box. The licence string is an unique number with 25 characters that you get from
your OLC.
2. Click on Accept.
Note
Just after clicking on Accept, the setup window might be displayed, depending on the option to be
3. The option loading is started, then the following window appears.
Click on OK.
3-22 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

4. The “CT Software Options” screen appears.
Verify that the option to be installed is displayed in the list as a ‘Flex Trial’ mode.
Note
‘Days left’ means the remaining days when a customer can use the option as a trial. This number
counts down day by day, then the option will disappear from the option list when ‘Days left’ becomes
0.
When the flex–trial option has expired and the [New Patient] button is clicked, the Option Status Log
window appears so that a customer can know the expired flex–trial option.
5. Click on Quit.
6. Click on OK.
7. When other option(s) is installed, repeat all steps above.
8. Click on shutdown icon in desktop menu. The system is rebooted.
9. Select Startup to return to the scan panel screen.
10. Perform Section 3-4-1, Saving System State Data for backup.
3-23 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

Option Setup Windows
• Asymmetric Option:
Select the Asymmetric mode, then click on Accept.
Asymmetric Mode Meanings

10:1 Provides 10 mm and 1 mm slices.
Then after setting the Asymmetric mode, perform the following in this order.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The following BOW is performed only to warm up the X-ray tube. So, do NOT adjust the De-
tector position even if the results go out of tolerance.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
• BOW
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> BOW –> OK –> Confirm.
• Q–cal Channel Ratio:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> Qcal Channel Ratio –>OK –> Confirm.
• Calibration:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> Service Calibration –> Asymmetric Seq.
• CT # Adjustment:
Perform Service –> Calibration –> CT # Adjustment.
3-24 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

• Denta Option:
1. Power ON a camera connected to the CT system.
2. “The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera ...” message appears. Enter y
3. “Please select a printer in the list....” message appears. Select a proper printer.
4. Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film. (See the Note below.)
5. “Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous
step.(Seethe Note below.)
6. Click on Quit –> OK.
Note
Entry must be integer and performed in unit of mm.

Round off the first decimal place to the integer. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch
value to mm value using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm” .
3-25 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

• ConnectPro Option:
The ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters, then click on Accept.
3-26 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

For V/R 5.5 or later ONLY and for a hospital with PPS sever ONLY:
Next, the PPS Server setup window appears. Enter the parameters, then click on Accept.
3-27 INTRODUCTION
REV 11 2326039

• Raw Data 1000 Max Option:
The following message appears. Click on OK .
3-28 INTRODUCTION
REV 18 2326039
SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER GROUND CONTINUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3 TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-6 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-7 EMERGENCY OFF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-8 FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-9 X-RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-10 SCAN TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
SECTION 2 - SOFTWARE LOADING FOR V/R 2.00 OR

LATER (FOR O2 COMPUTER OC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 - PRECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2-9-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2 - AUXCONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-10-1 Initiating Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-10-2 Restoring System State Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-10-3 Restoring Option Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2-10-4 Ejecting the CD-ROM and MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-11 INSTALLING REVISION-UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-11-1 Loading revision-up software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-11-2 Patch Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-12 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
i SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
2-13 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2-13-1 Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2-13-2 Completing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2-14 OPTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2-15 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2-16 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2-16-1 Restoring Patient Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2-16-2 Setting Gamma Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2-16-3 Test Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2-17 INSITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2-17-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2-17-2 Installing InSite Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2-17-3 Setting up InSite Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2-17-4 Completing the insite installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2-17-5 Saving InSite Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2-18 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
2-18-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
2-18-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2-19 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2-19-1 Entering the Machine Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2-19-2 AutoFilm Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

LATER (FOR LINUX COMPUTER OC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-8 CONFIRM PORT NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-9 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-9-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-9-1-1 LFC Normal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-9-1-2 LFC Recovery Procedure (For Bad System Hard Disk Replacement)
3-14
3-9-2 Application Software Installation only (LFW procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-10 EJECTING THE CD-ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-11 INSTALLING REVISION-UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-11-1 Loading revision-up software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-11-2 Patch Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-12 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
ii SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
3-13 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-13-1 Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-13-2 Completing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-14 OPTION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-15 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-16 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-16-1 Restoring Patient Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-16-2 Setting Gamma Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-16-3 Test Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-17 INSITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-17-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-17-2 Installing InSite Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-17-3 Setting up InSite Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3-17-4 Completing the insite installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3-17-5 Saving InSite Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3-18 DICOM PRINT TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3-19 APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3-19-1 Entering the Machine Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3-19-2 AutoFilm Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
SECTION 4 - X-RAY ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-4 PLANE OF ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-5 DETECTOR BEAM-ON-WINDOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-6 QCAL CHANNEL RATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-7 GRAVITY SAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
SECTION 5 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X-RAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3 HILIGHT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-3-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-3-2 Q Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-3-3 XT Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-3-4 AV Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-3-5 DG Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-4 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-5 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
iii SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 6 - IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM LEVEL SAFETY TESTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 PATIENT TOUCH LEAKAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1-1 Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1-2 Tools and Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1-3 Required Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1-4 Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-5 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-1-5-1 Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-1-5-2 Leakage Current Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2 CT SYSTEM CHASSIS LEAKAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-2-1 Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-2-2 Action List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-2-3 Tools and Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-2-4 Required Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-2-5 PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-2-5-1 Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-2-5-2 Electrical Connection Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-2-5-3 System Ground Wire Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-2-5-4 System Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-2-5-5 System Power-Up and Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
iv SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
SECTION 1 - CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1-1 GENERAL
WARNING
This ‘Checks during System Installation’ is performed during the following:
System Installation
Periodic Maintenance.
For System Installation, it is required that all wiring and cabling are complete and equipment is installed.
Proceed to Section 1-2 ‘Checks prior to Applying Power’, and then, to Section 1-2 ‘Ground Continuity’, Section 1-3
‘Temperature,’ ... , in the section order.
1-1 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER GROUND CONTINUITY
CAUTION
Leave all power to the system OFF and tagged until power is called for in specific steps.
1. Verify the following:

a. Four Gantry Tilt Lock Plates are removed.
b. Gantry Azimuth Lock Pin is pulled out.
c. All of the following breakers and switches are OFF.
• Breaker on Power Distribution Box (hospital supply)
• 2 Breaker (CB1 or CB2) on the PDU
• 4 Switches (‘Rotate,’ ‘XG Power,’ ‘Table/Tilt,’and ’Slip Ring 115V’)
• Service switch on the Sub Board on the Gantry
• SYS-OFF-MNL switch on the TGP Board on the Gantry
• 2 Breakers (CB1 and CB2) on the OC
Illustration 1-1 PDU (Power Distribution Unit)
OFF
CB1 CB2
1-2 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-2 CHECKS PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER GROUND CONTINUITY (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-2 Gantry
SERVICE
ON
SYS ABT SPD2 FAST CNT
HOME
SPD1
OFF
OFF
MID
SVE
SUB BOARD
MNL FIX SPD0 MID 90DEG
TGP BOARD
GANTRY LEFT SIDE
Illustration 1-3 Operator Console
CB1 AND CB2
OC REAR SIDE VIEW
1-3 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-3 TEMPERATURE
During the installation and start-up of the system you must take continuous temperature checks to make sure the
environment meets specifications listed in Section 3 of the Preinstallation manual. Excessive temperature, coupled
with reduced air flow from clogged filters, may overstress components and cause failures.
Filters
Check and clean all electronic equipment dust filters. GE recommends initially doing this on a weekly basis,
because new installations always have dust and dirt present at this stage. Over a period of time, you may increase
the maintenance interval as site environment improves.
Specifications
During installation, use the temperature/humidity recorder and a thermometer to record the temperature and relative
humidity in the scan room. Make sure the data you collect meets the following temperature and humidity
specifications.
• Scan Room
- -Temperature: 20° C ∼ 28° C (at least 5° C/hr gradient)
- -Relative Humidity: 30 ∼ 70 % RH (Non Condensing)
• Operator’s Room and/or Equipment Room
- -Temperature: 15° C ∼ 30° C (at least 5° C/hr gradient)
- -Relative Humidity: 20 ∼ 80 % RH (Non Condensing)
Action
Contact the air conditioning supplier or your local GE service department when your data fails to meet any
specifications.
1-4 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE
Input Selection
Verify that an input selection on the Power Distribution Unit (See Illustrations 1-4 or 1-5) meets the input power
voltage. If not, correct them.
The ‘input power voltage’ here means the rating voltage specified on the power distribution box (hospital supply),
not the measured voltage on the power distribution box.
Illustration 1-4 Voltage Selection (For 380~480V System)
120 v 115v 0v
PROTECTION COVER
TRANSFORMER
1-5 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-5 Voltage Selection (For 200V System)
120 v 115v 0v
PROTECTION COVER
TRANSFORMER
1-6 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE (CONTINUED)

The following assumes that the power source for the system was checked for mean voltage, as well as any line
voltage disturbance during preinstallation site checks.
Instrument
Use the same instrument (Dranetz, etc.) to monitor line voltage during this check that you used during the
preinstallation check. The recommended line analyzer is the Dranetz Model 606-3 (3 channel) with the 101
frequency option, or Dranetz Model line monitor plug in modules. You can use a similar analyzer, as long as it can
monitor and report mean voltage, surges, sags, short term impulses, and frequency drift.
Check Using an Instrument
Monitor the input power lines (200 VAC, 380 VAC, 400 VAC, 415 VAC, 440 VAC, 460 VAC, or 480 VAC) to the
PDU at the Power Distribution Box (on terminals L1, L2, and L3) (hospital supply). Check in particular:
• Verify that the current line voltage equals the voltage measured during the preinstallation check.
• Verify that mean line voltage does not fall outside of equipment specifications during the day to day
operation of other site equipment during the installation period.
• Look for any line voltage disturbances and check for a correlation between disturbances and system
malfunctions such as “Aborts” or component failures.
From the printouts, ensure that the power supply meets the following criteria:
• Line Voltage : 200 VAC, 380 VAC, 400 VAC, 415 VAC, 440 VAC, 460 VAC or 480 VAC
(50 Hz/60 Hz) (Normal Steady State)
• Daily Voltage Variation : +10% to -5% from nominal steady state (50 Hz)
+6% to -5% from nominal steady state (60 Hz)
• Frequency : 50 Hz ± 2 Hz, 60 Hz ± 2 Hz.
Check Using an Oscilloscope

Monitor the power lines with an oscilloscope and verify that no significant distortion, noise or transients exist. Switch
between the oscilloscope’s long and short time base to monitor for spikes, as well as line drift over time. Generally,
harmonics of the third, seventh, and eleventh derivative will be the most prevalent.
Action
Investigate any condition that falls out of spec. Identify the problem source(s) and resolve the problem.
1-7 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION

Before attempting this power application and functional check, make sure that the breakers and switches match the
instructions given in ’Checks prior to Applying Power Ground Continuity.’
WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THE UNIT, USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT.
Follow this procedure exactly in the order it was written. This procedure was developed with your safety in mind.
Follow this sequence to protect you and the equipment from irreparable damage.
1. Preparation:
a. Remove the front cover from the PDU (to access the breakers).
b. Remove the rear cover from the OC (to access the breakers).
c. Remove the front, rear, and left side covers from the Gantry (to access the Servo amp).
d. Verify again that all breakers and switches (OC rear panel, Gantry rear base, and PDU) are OFF according
to ’Checks prior to Applying Power Ground Continuity.’
e. Verify that wiring and cabling are correctly connected.
2. Switch ON the breaker on the power distribution box (hospital supply).
3. Switch ON the CB2 breaker on the PDU.
4. Verify that the power-ON lamp of the PDU is ON.
1-8 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION (CONTINUED)

5. Measure 24.5 ∼ 25.5 VDC between output terminals of the DC power supply. See Illustration 1-6.
6. Measure the followings:
• Slip Ring line:
95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 1 and 2 of TM5 in the PDU when CB2/CB5 are ON and CB1/CB3/CB4/
CB6 are OFF.
• AUX line:
95 ∼ 135 VAC between terminals 11 and 12 of TM2 when CB2/CB6 are ON and CB1/CB3/CB4/CB5 are
OFF.
7. Push the OC power switch once. The K2, K3, and K4 will be turned ON. (This does NOT turn ON the OC since
the CB6 is OFF.)
8. Measure the followings:
• OC line:
OFF.
• TG115V line:
OFF.
• TG200V line:
OFF.
• Jedi line:
340 ∼ 530 VAC between terminals 1, 3, and 5 of K1 when CB1 are ON and CB2/CB3/CB4/CB5/CB6 are
OFF.
9. Turn ON all breakers in the PDU.
1-9 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-6 Measurement on PDU
SW
PS
14
K3
K2
K1
K11
10. Push the OC power switch once. This does not turn ON the OC.
11. Verify that the voltage between terminals on TM 1 of the OC is 95 ∼ 135 VAC. See Illustration 1-3.
12. Switch ON the ’Slip Ring 115V’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
Verify that the x-ray generator on the rotating assembly is powered ON; this can be verified by checking that
LEDs on the XG controller boards turn ON. Also verify that the x-ray tube fan and pump start to operate.
13. Switch on the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
14. Measure 180 ∼ 220 VAC on the Servo Amplifier input (between N and L terminals).
15. Turn ON the breakers of the OC.
16. Install the OC, PDU, and Gantry covers.
1-10 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-6 GANTRY ROTATION CHECK
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD! BECAUSE OF THE CONTINUOUS ROTATION OF THE GANTRY
THERE ARE HAZARDS INVOLVED IN WORKING ON OR NEAR THE GANTRY. THE MOST
OBVIOUS HAZARD IS THE AXIAL MOTION OF THE GANTRY. THE HIGH VOLTAGE (HV)
SUBSYSTEM IS MOUNTED DIRECTLY ONTO THE GANTRY. THE HV SUBSYSTEM
CONSISTS OF COMPONENTS THAT ARE BULKY AND HEAVY. GIVE ROTATION HAZARDS
RESPECT.
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove all covers from the Gantry.
3. Set the safety bracket on the Gantry frame.
4. Switch ON the ’Table/Tilt’ switch.
5. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board on the Gantry.
6. Rotate the Gantry manually to verify that nothing interferes the Gantry during rotation (cables, etc.).
7. Set the Service switch to OFF.
8. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
Verify that you hear the rotation alarm sound.
9. Switch OFF the ’Power’ switch on the OC.
10. Switch ON the ’Power’ switch on the OC.
Verify that the Gantry starts to rotate, and it stops at the home position (x-ray tube at 12 o’clock position) before
making two revolutions.
1-11 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-7 EMERGENCY OFF TEST

After this test, press the reset button on the OC to resume the system.
1. Power ON the system.
2. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry.
3. Move the cradle IN from its home position.
4. Press one of the emergency stop switches on the Gantry.
5. Verify that power is removed from the Gantry and Table. Verify the following:
a. LEDs on the TGP board are extinguished.
b. Gantry display panels (right and left) are extinguished.
6. Depress one of the tilt buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables tilt.
7. Depress one of the table elevation buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables table elevation.
8. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons, to verify the emergency stop disables the cradle drive.
9. Move the cradle to the home position by hand, to verify the emergency stop released the cradle clutch.
10. Make sure the cradle latches securely in the home position.
11. Using a pencil, press the emergency stop reset switch on the OC (see Illustration 1-7). Make sure the tilt,
elevation, and cradle drive now work.
1-12 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-7 EMERGENCY OFF TEST (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-7 Location of Emergency Stop Reset Switch
EMERGENCY STOP RESET SWITCH

OC KEYBOARD
12. Repeat steps 1. through 11. using the other Gantry emergency stop switch (one).
13. Repeat steps 1. through 11. using the OC emergency stop switch (one).
14. OC Emergency OFF test:
a. Perform the scan using the following parameters:
1.0, 1.5, or 2.0 sec /120 kV/10 mm thickness/160 mA
b. During scanning, press the OC Emergency stop switch.
c. Verify that:
• Immediately X-ray exposure stops.
• The Gantry stops to rotate within two revolutions.
15. Repeat steps 1. through 11. using the PDU emergency stop switch (one).
16. Remove all the covers from the Gantry, then repeat steps 1. through 11. using the Gantry emergency stop
switches on its frame (four).
1-13 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-8 FILTER
There are two filters on the OC.
• OC: Horizontal, two on the bottom of console
Perform the following cleaning procedure.
1. Slide the filter at the bottom of the OC forward until it is removed from the OC.
(The OC front cover does not need to be removed)
2. Suck up any dust on the filters with a vacuum cleaner.
3. Slide or fit each filter back into its enclosure.
1-14 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-9 X-RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY

Check the overheat detection function by performing the following:
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base. (The other switches should be set to ON)
2. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.
3. Disconnect the rotor connector:
See Illustration 1-8.
If the connector is not accessible, perform the following:

a. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.
b. Rotate the Gantry manually to the home position (x-ray tube at the 12 o’clock position).
c. Set the Service switch to OFF.
4. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ switch.
5. Try to perform a scan.
Verify that a scan can not be performed and that the error message is reported on the CRT status screen.
6. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
7. Reconnect the connector.
Illustration 1-8 Rotor Cable Connector at X-ray Tube
Rotor Connector (Brown)
1-15 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-10 SCAN TEST

This ’Scan Test’ procedure assumes that all the subsystems (Operator Console, Gantry, Table, DAS/Detector, and
X-ray generator) are functioning normally.
In this procedure refer to the Operator manual for detailed information.
Warm Up Scan
1. Make sure that nothing is in the scan area in the Gantry room.
2. Click on the ‘Tube Warm up’ icon to start the x-ray tube warm-up program.
3. Press the blinking [Start Scan] button on the OC keyboard to start the warm-up scan.
It will take approx. 1.5 minutes to complete scans.
Make sure that all warm up scans complete without error.
4. Click on [OK] button to return to the initial screen.
Scoutview Scan
5. Perform a series of scout scans to check scout scan operations:
a. Tilt the Gantry to any angle (other than 0°).
b. Try to perform a scout scan. (Any scan parameters can be set.)
Make sure that the software prohibits a scout scan with the Gantry tilted.
c. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
d. Lay the 25 cm water phantom horizontally on the cradle.
Perform an AP (0°) scout scan on the phantom.
Verify that the phantom diameter (In-Out direction) on the image is 266 mm ±3 mm.
e. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
Perform an LT (90°) scout scan on the phantom.
f. Use the [External landmark] button on the Gantry control panel to perform the phantom positioning so that
positioning light and center of the phantom are aligned.
g. Select [Suspension] for Autovoice.
h. Press the [External landmark] button and verify that:
• The cradle can NOT be moved.
• The cradle position is the same value as the external landmark.
i. Click on Confirm, then verify that the [Move to Scan] button blinks.
1-16 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-10 SCAN TEST (CONTINUED)

j. Press the [Move to Scan] button, then press the [Stop Move] button before the cradle reaches the set
position. Verify that the cradle stops to move and the [Move to Scan] button blinks again.
k. Press the [Move to Scan] button and move the cradle to the set position. Verify that the [Start Scan] button
blinks.
l. Perform the scan and verify that the scan can complete with no error.
Axial Scan Sequence

6. Perform a series of axial scans to check axial scan operations:
a. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
b. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
c. Use the [Internal landmark] button on the Gantry control panel to perform the phantom positioning so that
positioning light and center of the phantom are aligned.
d. Select [Inspiration] for Autovoice.
e. Use the following scan parameters: (Other parameters can be set to any value.)
Thickness: :10 mm
kV :120 kV
mA :150 mA
Interval :10 mm
Scan time :3 sec
Position :Feet First
f. Click on Confirm, then verify that the [Start Scan] button blinks.
g. Press the [Start Scan] button and verify that:
• You can hear and understand auto voice for scan start.
• The scan starts.
• Both X-ray ON indicators on the OC keyboard and Gantry panel is lit and X-ray ON alarm starts to sound.
h. Press the [Pause] button during scanning and verify that:
• The scan stops at next ISD and the [Confirm] button is changed to the [Resume] button.
• You can hear and understand auto voice for scan end.
i. Click on Resume, then verify that the [Start Scan] button blinks again.
j. Press the [Start Scan] again to continue scanning.
1-17 SYSTEM
REV 2 2326039
1-10 SCAN TEST (CONTINUED)

k. Press the [Stop Scan] button and verify that:
• The scan stops IMMEDIATELY and the [Confirm] button is changed to the [Resume] button.
• Both X-ray ON indicators on the OC keyboard and Gantry panel is OFF and X-ray ON alarm stops to
sound.
• You can hear and understand auto voice for scan end.
l. Click on End Exam and verify that the rotation of the Gantry and rotor in the X-ray tube stops to rotate.
Axial Scan
7. Perform a series of axial scans to check axial scan operations:
a. Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
b. Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
c. Use the following scan parameters: (Other parameters can be set to any value.)
Acquisition No. 1 2 3 4 5
Scan Time [sec] 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0
Thickness :10 mm
kV :120 kV
mA :150 mA
Interval :10 mm
Position :Feet First
No. of Images :2
d. Verify that each scan completes with no error.
1-18 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

LATER (FOR O2 COMPUTER OC)
Compatible with Version 2.00 or later System Software

IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Use this instructions when:
• Performing the System Version-up (LFC) or Revision-up (LFW)
• Replacing the HDD with a new one (LFC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
2-1 GENERAL
WARNING
IF THE SYSTEM HAS THE UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER
BEFORE YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.
This ‘Software Loading’ describes the Load-From-Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading (OS +
application) procedure (Load-From-Cold : LFC) and Load-From-Warm (LFW) procedure only for NP application
loading from CD-ROMs and some MODs to the system hard disk.
Shaded paragraph shown in this section means that this might happens depending on a system.
CAUTION
Make sure that all Images have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD before
performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re-initialize
all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.
2-1 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-1 GENERAL (CONTINUED)

An LFC/LFW procedures are outlined in Illustration 2-1.
NOTICE
If system version is returned to old version, the LFC procedure MUST be used. (Do NOT use
the LFW procedure.)
Illustration 2-1 Software Loading Standard Procedure
Procedures PPrerequisitererequ
isite
LFC LFW
1 Saving Patient Data Two blank MODs
2 Saving System State None A blank MOD

Data
3 Saving Option Information -
4 Shutdown the System None -
5 Installing System None Two CD-ROMs: Core

Software (OS) OS
* Loading Installation
Tool
* Disk Partitioning and
OS Installation
6 Installing Application Software CD-ROM(s):

Application Software
7 System Configuration - Phase 1 (preconfig)
Restoring the System Configuration Data MOD in which the

system state data has
been saved
8 System Configuration - Phase 2 (auxconfig)
Initiating Configuration -
Restoring the System State Data MOD in which the

been saved
Restoring the Option Key -
Ejecting Application CD-ROM and MOD -
(Continued)
2-2 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
Procedures Prerequisite
LFC LFW
9 Restoring the System State Data AGAIN! MOD in which the
been saved
10 Changing System Configuration (Reconfig) -
11 Option Check -
12 Starting Up the System NOW! -
13 Completing the LFC / LFW Procedures
Restoring Patient Data MODs in which the
images or raw data
have been saved
Setting Gamma Value -
Test Scan -
14 Installing the InSite Software None CD-ROM : Service
Software
2-3 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-2 PREPARATION
Prepare the followings before starting the LFC/LFW Procedure.
• CD-ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2) (for LFC Only)
• CD-ROM : Application Software
• CD-ROM : Service Software (for InSite software, if required)
• Option MOD (if new options are installed)
• 2 MODs (Must be prepared by FE)
- For Saving System State Data (one MOD’s A side)
- For Saving Patient Images (another MOD’s A side)
- For Saving Raw Data (another MOD’s B side)
Note
For the MODs to save system state data or patient images, they do NOT need to be manually
formatted. (A used-MOD is available.) This means that the format procedures will be automatically
started before saving data.
2-4 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA
CAUTION
Make sure that all Images and raw data have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD
before performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). Both LFC and LFW
procedures will re-initialize all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.
Prerequisite
• Two blank MOD
Note
Patient Image data and Raw data MUST be saved on the different MODs.
Procedures
1. If required, save the Patient image on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works -> Selection (e.g.
select all examination) -> Archive -> (Label) -> Save examination)
After saving image data, perform Archive -> Detach, then eject the MOD.
2. If required, save the raw data on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. The MOD must be initialized first when
using a new MOD. (Scan -> Scanner Utilities -> Rawdata Function -> Function Selection -> Save to MOD
-> Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) -> Start Save)
2-5 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section (because it will be saved in Section 2-8-2, Software
Installation (For LFW procedure)) and go to Section 2-5, Saving Option Information.
Prerequisite
• One blank MOD
Manpower Requirements
• Approx. 10 minutes
Procedures
Before beginning the software install, save the system state data.
1. Verify that the system is powered ON.
2. Set the write protect tab of the MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.
3. Select Service -> Application shutdown -> OK -> Savestate.
4. Click on Confirm.
Note
You can see the message “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” after clicking “Continue”
button several times. This is the last chance to cancel the procedure “Saving system state data”. If
“Continue” is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.
6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.
Note
- IOS preferences
- Calibration files
- Autovoice files
- User preferences
7. Press the eject button of the MOD drive to eject the MOD from the MOD drive.
2-6 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION

The option information are normally saved in the system state data. However, they must be written down in the
following table as a back-up. This table can be used when option data reloading fails.
1. On the desktop menu, click on List Option button located on the upper right of the screen.
Option list will appear.
2. Write down the current “Installed option”.
Option Installed? Option Installed? Option Installed?
3D Dicom MOD Raw Data 1000 Max

Smart Prep Power 200mA Max Remote Tilt
Smart Recon Fast Scan 1.0 sec Thickness 1mm
DentaScan Helical 60 Max Thickness 0.6mm
Navigator Helical 90 Max Asymmetric Scan
CTPerfusion Helical 120 Max Connect Pro
ImageDisk ImageDisk 20000
Note: Depending on the system version, unavailable option might be included in the option list above.cell
3. Click on Quit to return to the desktop menu.
2-7 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION (CONTINUED)

4. For Asymmetric Option Only:
When a system contains Asymmetric Scan Option, the asymmetric mode must be recorded. This is used at
Section 2-10-3, Restoring the Option key.
a. Click on Reconfig –> Preferences.
b. Click on Configuration of the Asymmetric scan.
c. Write down the asymmetric mode (10:1, 10:2, or 6:1), then click Quit –> Quit to return to the desktop menu.
2-8 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
5. For ConnectPro Option Only:

When a system contains ConnectPro Option, the setting parameters must be recorded. This is used at Section
2-10-3, Restoring the Option key.
a. Click on shell.
b. Enter the following commands to display the ConnectPro information, then write down them to the table
below.
cat /usr/g/config/WLSystem.cfg
AE_Title HIS Server AE Title
IP_Address HIS Server IP Address
Port_Number HIS Server AE Port #
cat /usr/g/config/WLdcm.cfg
bi_apptitle CT Server AE Title
cat /usr/g/ctuser/app-defaults/network/ppsServer.map
AppTitle PPS Server AE Title
IPAddress PPS Server IP Address
IPPortNo PPS Server AE Port #
c. Enter Exit to return to the desktop menu.
2-9 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 2-8-2, Installing Application Software,
Software Loading (LFW procedure).
1. Click on Shutdown on the desktop menu.
Some test programs run. The NO button to be displayed is clicked.
2. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.
3. Click on Restart.
4. Few seconds later, the window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button
appears (shown below).
Starting up the system

Stop for maintenance
Stop for maintenance button

can be clicked instead of press
ing the ESC key.
5. Press ESC key.

IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
When replacing the HDD with a new one ONLY:
The HDD labeling procedure MUST be performed at this time!!!
Refer to Section 2-18, Troubleshooting Tips, HDD labeling procedures.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
2-10 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS)

Note
Prerequisite
• CD-ROMs : Core OS (OS) (1 of 2) and (2 of 2)
Procedures
2-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool)

1. Insert the CD-ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
2. Verify that the LED of the CD-ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.
3. Click on Install System Software.
4. Click on Local CD-ROM icon.
Note
The following CD-ROM error might appear, but ignore it.
•dksc1d1vol alert illegal request illegal field in CDB (asc=0x24, asq=0x0) CDB:1aoooc0"
6. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation tools to disk” message appears. (miniroot loading phase) A few minutes later, the screen
will become in black, then “Inst Main Menu” appears.
Note
When some errors occur at this time, refer to Section 2-18-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.
2-11 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-7-1 Loading Miniroot (Installation tool) (Continued)

Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 7 to 8 might be
skipped.
2-12 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation

1. Type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
Inst> admin <Enter>
Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)
# mount /CDROM <Enter>
# /CDROM/bin/makepart <Enter>
2. Verify that the following message are displayed.

******************************* Displayed *******************************
Creating disk partitions automatically.
.......
************************************************************************
3. Verify that the message “Okay to power off the system now. Press any key to restart.” appears.
Click on Restart.
Note
Instead of clicking on Restart, pressing ESC key twice goes to step5.
When •/CDROM/bin/makepart [258] xxxxx (coredump)" message appears:

Even if this appears, the partitioning is correctly executed, but a problem lies in executing the shut
down process.
Therefore, if this happens, switch OFF the OC, wait for a few seconds, then switch ON the OC.
If a error except above occurs, refer to Section 2-18-1, OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips.
The window including “Starting up the system” message and “Stop for maintenance” button appears (shown
below).

Stop for maintenance button
can be clicked instead of press
ing the ESC key.
4. Press ESC key.

5. Click on Install System Software.
6. Click on Local CD-ROM icon.
2-13 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-7-2 Disk Partitioning and OS Installation (Continued)

7. Verify that:
• The CD-ROM (Core OS (1 of 2)) remains in the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
• The LED of the CD-ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.
9. Click on Continue.
“Copying Installation Tools to disk” message appears.
Note
Depending on the disk capacity, system version, etc..., the following steps 10 to 12 might be
skipped.
Depending on System, these steps might be skipped.
Enter your selection and Press ENTER (c, f, r, or a) r <Enter>

(Procedure for reloading miniroot tool is started. It takes approx. 1 minutes.)
Press Enter to invoke C Shell csh: <Enter> (Enter key only)
# mkfs –t xfs /dev/rdsk/dks0d1s0 <Enter>
******************************* Displayed *******************************

meta–data=xxxxxxx
data=xxxxxxx
log=xxxxxx
real time=xxxxxxx
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>
Make new file system on /dev/dsk/dks0d1s0 [yes/ne/sh/help]: yes <Enter>

Are you sure? [y/n] (n): y <Enter>
Do you want an EFS or XFS file system? [efs/xfs]: xfs <Enter>
Block size of file system 512 or 4096 bytes? 4096 <Enter>
2-14 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

Inst> admin <Enter>
Admin> sh <Enter> (To enter shell)
# mount /CDROM <Enter>
# /CDROM/bin/cptool <Enter>
# /makedisk <Enter>
(Procedure for system file configuration is started. It takes approx. 15 minutes.)
Note:
The error messages might be displayed when a command •/CDROM/bin/makedisk" is
entered. If this happens, enter a command •/CDROM/bin/makedisk" again to proceed.
14. Verify that the following message will appear.

************* Displayed **************************************************
Installations and removals were successful.
Enter HiSpeed, ProSpeed, CT/e Series Core OS (2 of 2) CD-ROM...

************************************************************************
15. Press the eject button of the CD-ROM drive to eject the CD-ROM, Core OS (1 of 2), from the CD-ROM drive.
16. Insert the CD-ROM, Core OS (2 of 2), into the CD-ROM drive.
Installation procedure starts. It takes approx. 7 minutes to complete it.
17. After completion of installing Core OS (2 of 2), verify that the following message will appear.
************* Displayed *************************************************
Installations and removals were successful.
........
Exit from the shell using ‘exit’.
************************************************************************
# exit <Enter>
Admin> exit <Enter>
Inst> exit <Enter>

Automatically reconfiguring the operating system.
Ready to restart the system. Restart? xxxxx y <Enter>

(The screen will become in black.)
NOTICE
Do not remove the OS CD-ROM at this time. It MUST be removed in Section 2-8, Installing
Application Software.
2-15 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

19. Approx. 30 seconds later, “IRIS’s Internet address....” message appears (shown below).
IRIS's Internet address is the default.

Using standalone network mode.
Note
In the next message, you might see the error message, •ALERT: SCSI hard error on (1,3). scb
0x807aeac0". This will continues to be displayed for the system with DASM only until the configura
tion setting is completed. However, this message can be ignored.
The system will automatically login as root.
2-16 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-8 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE
Prerequisite
• For LFW ONLY:
One blank MOD (for saving the system state data)
Procedures
2-8-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure)

1. Double-click on instsw icon.
a. Select the proper Product Name.
b. Click Yes.
(Pressing No returns to the Select Product window.)
“Enter Application Software CD-ROM in drive” message appears and the OS CD-ROM will be ejected from the
CD-ROM drive.
2. Insert the CD-ROM (application software) into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
It takes approx. 7 minutes.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.
NOTICE
Do not remove the CD-ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 2–10–4, Ejecting the CD-ROM.
2-17 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure)

1. On the desktop menu, click on LFW located on the upper right of the screen.
2. Click on Yes in response to “Do you really want to do LFW?”
3. Set the write protect tab of the blank MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the MOD drive of the
OC.
Note
6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Continue.
7. Remove the MOD from the MOD drive.
8. Select the proper Product Name.
9. Click Yes.
“Enter Application Software CD-ROM in drive” message appears.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted, then IRIS main menu
appears again.
NOTICE
Do not remove the CD-ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 2–10–4, Ejecting the CD-ROM.
2-18 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-8-2 Software Installation (For LFW Procedure) (Continued)

Note
Depending on the system, the following steps 11 might be skipped.
11. Select “Copy the environment from the selected machine” then click on OK if the following window
appears:
<Desktop Environment setup>

You have logged in to the following system(s) in the past, on which your
home directory is mounted.
“IRIS”
Choose how you want your environment to be setup.

– Create a new environment.
– Copy the environment from the selected machine.
– Share (link) the environment with the selected machine.
To skip this window at login, check below:

– Always create, copy, or share as chosen above.
2-19 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-9 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 1 - PRECONFIG)
NOTICE
Do not check or change system configuration at this time (preconfig phase). It is performed
at section 2-13, Changing System Configuration (Reconfig).
Prerequisite
• MOD (including the system state data saved in section 2-4)
2-9-1 Restoring the System Configuration Data

1. Double-click on Preconfig icon located at the upper right of the screen.
2. “Insert mod and press confirm!” message appears.
Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 2-4, into the MOD drive.
4. Click on Continue icon a few times. The system setting screen appears.
5. Click on Accept. (Nothing changes.)
The system is rebooted. It takes approx. 7 minutes.
2-20 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (PHASE 2 - AUXCONFIG)
Prerequisite
2-10-1 Initiating Configuration

1. Double-click on auxconfig icon.
2. The Date entry screen appears.
• When modifying date, click on Set, then Quit.
• When not-modifying date to proceed, click on Quit.
The system configuration procedures are started, then automatically login as root.
2-10-2 Restoring System State Data
Procedures
1. “Restore System State data (Click on No if no saved data exists)?” appears. Click on Yes.
2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Verify that the MOD, including the system state data saved in
section 2-4, is inserted into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.
3. “This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.” appears. Click on Continue.
4. “Warning: Restoring will erase the previous contents on disk.” appears. Click on Continue.
5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.
Go to section 2-10-3, Restoring Option Key.
2-21 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-10-3 Restoring Option Key
Prerequisite
• None
Procedures
Do NOT touch any soft buttons
The option installation procedures automatically starts.
except for entry described in Note!
After completing automatic installation for option, the system shuts down, then starts up automatically. Then go to
Section 2–10–4, Ejecting the CD-ROM.
Note
When the system contains the following options, the proper entry must be required.
Denta Option:
1. Power ON a camera connected to the CT system.
2. “The procedure will send 1 or 2 films to the camera...” message appears. Enter y.
3. “Please select a printer in the list...” message appears. Select a proper printer.
4. Since a printer ejects a calibration film, measure distance (mm) printed in a film.
5. “Enter the distance Dist 1 in (mm).” message appears. Enter distance (mm) recorded in previous step.
Note: Entry must be performed in unit of mm. If you have only a ruler with inch unit, convert inch value to mm value
using a formula of “xx inch x 25.4 = yy mm”
ConnectPro Option:
1. ConnectPro setup window appears. Enter the parameters written down in 2-5, Saving Option Information,
then click on Accept.
2. PPS Server Setup window appears. Any values might be entered as a default. Enter the parameters written
down in 2-5, Saving Option Information, then click on Accept. (When the hospital does Not has a PPS server,
perform no modification and click on Accept.)
Raw Data 1000 Max Option:

“All scan data has been removed” message appears. Click on OK.
Asymmetric Scan Option:

Select the asymmetric mode (recorded in Section 2-5, Saving Option Information), then click on Accept .
2-22 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-10-4 Ejecting the CD-ROM and MOD

1. “Auto-Start Disabled” window appears. Click on OK.
2. In desktop menu, select Shell and type the following to eject the CD-ROM.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>

NOTICE
Do NOT click on Startup at this time!
2-23 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-11 INSTALLING REVISION-UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE

If the system has a revision-up (patch) software, it must be installed at this time.
If it does not, skip this section, then go to section 2-13, Changing System Configuration (reconfig).
2-11-1 Loading revision-up software

This is the common procedures for system revision-up.
Prerequisite
• CD-ROM : Application Revision-up (Patch) Software
Procedures
1. Insert the CD-ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software located on the upper right of the screen.
3. “Do you install software from CD-ROM?” window appears. Click on Yes.
4. “Following software will be installed” window appears. Click on Yes.
The patch installation procedures are automatically started.
5. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful.” window.
Note
Some patch softwares might require reboot (shown below). If it does, when clicking on OK, the
system automatically reboots and pauses at the desktop menu.
Software Package Installation
V/R x.xx.
6. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell on the upper right of the screen.
2-24 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-11-1 Loading revision-up software (Continued)

7. Type the following to eject the CD-ROM.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
NOTICE
2-11-2 Patch Verification

1. Click on List S/W Package.
2. Click on Patch.
3. Verify that information for the patch installed are displayed. (Example)
******************************* Displayed *******************************
TWN02OS1: ProSpeed II Series Patch Software 2.xx
TWN02OS2: ProSpeed II Series Patch Software 2.xy
************************************************************************
4. Click on Close.
NOTICE
2-25 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-12 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN!

When performing the LFC/LFW, manually restore the system state data AGAIN at this time.
Do NOT start up the system yet!
Prerequisite
Procedures
1. In desktop menu, select Restorestate.
2. “Insert MOD and Press Confirm!” appears. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section
2-4, into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.
5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Continue.
6. Eject the MOD from the MOD drive.
NOTICE
2-26 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-13 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG)

The System configuration data MUST be checked or changed when a different version of the application software
has been loaded, because new setting(s) might be added in a new version of software.
2-13-1 Configuration Setup
1. In desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration screen appears.
2. Enter the appropriate configuration data.
NOTICE
The following items restrict the use of characters for entry. Do NOT use other characters.
Items Characters Usable for Entry

Hospital Name alphanumerics (a-zA-Z0-9), underscore (_), period (.), comma (,), and space
Machine # numerics (0-9)
Station Name alphanumerics (a-zA-Z0-9), underscore (_), and period (.)
2-27 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-13-1 Configuration Setup (Continued)

3. System Setting Screen:
a. Changes Hospital Name to the site's preferred name.

b. Select the Timezone for this site, and record it below.
Time Zone
c. Verify Model Name.

Note
The Model Name is currently not implemented.
d. Verify Machine # .
The unique machine number # is printed on the label attached near the OC rating plate.
e. Verify/change Station Name. (Entry MUST be performed using up to 4 characters.)
f. Select Preferences to proceed to the next screen.
2-28 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

4. Preferences Setting Screen:
a. Select Time Format to be displayed on screen.

b. Select Units for patient weight for units for patient weight to be displayed on images.
c. For HiSpeed Series ONLY:
Select Bone Kernel. (default: Type 1)
Note
“Type 2” is less artifact, but lower resolution than Type 1.
d. Select Date Format to be displayed on images.
Note
To use Japanese era for date, YY/MM/DD format must be selected.
2-29 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

e. Select Auto mA. Select Target SD1 for higher mA, Target SD2 for middle mA, or Target SD3 for lower
mA according to the following mA table.
GE recommends ‘Target SD1‘ for Japan and ‘Target SD2‘ for countries other than Japan, but this
selection depends on a customer´s preferences. If a customer requires a different image quality, select an
other Target SD.
Auto mA modes
IQ
Normal High mA (High IQ)
SD1 IQ
Low Dose
SD2 Normal
IQ
Low Dose
Normal
SD3 Low Dose
Low mA (Low IQ)
Target SD IQ Level
SD IQ 1.63
SD Normal 1.47
- 1.40
SD Low Dose 1.33
- 1.26
- 1.22
- 1.14
- 1.10
- 1.0
2-30 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

f. Click on Configuration, then select Asymmetric mode and click on Accept.
Mode Meanings
g. Select Language to proceed to the next screen.
2-31 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

5. Language Setting Screen:
a. Select the Language for this site.

b. Select Default Autovoice Language for this site.
c. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.
2-32 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

6. Hardware Setting Screen:
a. Select a proper Tube Type, depending on the system.

• ESR Tube for CT/e Dual Series
b. Select a proper Keyboard, depending on the system.
c. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).
2-33 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

d. Click on Diagnosis Settings.
Type the following responses to the indicated messages:
Supported product types
a. ESR
b. ESRTWIN
Enter product type (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select ´b.ESRTWIN´ for ProSpeed II series
NRE Global memory sizes
a. 16Mb
b. 32Mb
c. 64Mb
Enter GM option (press enter for default)? <Enter>
Select “c.64Mb”
Enter # of Slave DSP? <Enter>

Enter a twice numbers of the NPRS boards inside the OC. See table below.
Number of NPRS Entry

1 2
2 4
4 8
8 16
NPRM
NPRS
Is this info correct (y=yes, n=no)? y <Enter>

Note
If you enter a wrong memory size, select [n] to start over the entry.
e. Select Camera to proceed to the next screen.
2-34 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

7. Camera Setting Screen:
a. Select either Laser Camera or DICOM Printer.
When Laser Camera is Selected:
2-35 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

Set the following parameters:
• Laser Camera Type : Choose the closest option.
• DASM Interface : This option must match your physical DASM type; for DASM-LCAM, select Digital.
For DASM-VDB, select Analog.
• Do NOT select Slides or Zoom. Use Film Composer -> Options -> Slide formats when selecting this
parameter, because the Film composer option overrides the System configuration option.
• Smooth/Sharp selects sharper or smoother image interpolation.
Click on Accept. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
2-36 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

When DICOM Printer is selected:
Note
For a summery of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print, refer to Appendix, 2-18-2
DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips.
• Add: used when adding the DICOM printer newly to the system.
• Delete: used when deleting the DICOM printer selected from the Device File list.
• Update: used when modifying the setting for the DICOM printer selected from the Device File list.
a. Click on Add.
2-37 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

The DICOM Print Camera setting screen appears.
b. Set the following parameters, then click on Advanced. This goes to 2nd setting screen (for setting advanced
parameters) for DICOM Print Camera (step c).
2-38 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

• Camera Type:
Select a proper manufacturer for DICOM printer.
After you select the appropriate Camera Type, the system automatically pre-set default values into the
DICOM Print Camera settings screen area.
Pre-set Default Value (Reference Value)

Fuji Konica Kodak Agfa
Imation (dry) Wet
Medium Type Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Film Portrait Portrait Portrait Portrait Portrait
Orientation
Destination Processor Processor Magazine Magazine Processor
Magnification Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic
Type
Film Format - - - - -
Configuration 1 KC_LUT=2 LUT=Ver693c0 CS300\\CN1 PRECEPTION
.W87,8 _LUT=140
Maximum 300 300 300 300 300
Density
Minimum 22 22 22 22 22
Density
Smoothing Off Off Off Off Off
Type
Empty Density Black Black Black Black Black
Border Density Black Black Black Black Black
Film Size 14IN x 17IN Empty Empty Empty Empty
Trim Off Off Off Off Off
• Network Parameters :
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Name, same as Host Name (Name shown in the header title
of the Film composer).
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Host Name.
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device IP Address.
Enter the AE title from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming Device.
Enter the TCP Listen Port from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the
Filming Device.
2-39 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
NOTICE
When, at the DICOM Print Camera side, you enter the AE title of a CT system connected to
the printer, CT Host Name _DCP must be used.

Note
Filmer DICOM AE (Application Entity) Title may be site specific. Make sure that you check with the
Filming Device Service Representative and the hospital network administrator to ensure you are
using the correct AE Title for the destination Filming Device.
• Medium Type:
Select the appropriate Medium Type parameter. Check with the radiology department and the
Filming Device Service Representative to determine whether the department is using BLUE
FILM, CLEAR FILM, or PAPER.
• Film Orientation:
Select PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE. If you change this parameter, you might also change the Film
Format. Consult the manufacturer of a DICOM printer for proper Film Format settings.
• Destination:
Select the appropriate Destination parameter. Check with the radiology department and the Filming
Device Service Representative to determine whether to use MAGAZINE or PROCESSOR.
• Magnification Type:
Select the appropriate Magnification Type parameter. This parameter selects the algorithm used to
interpolate pixels to provide desired film resolution. Check with the Filming Device Service
Representative to ensure the best Image Quality film presentation. For most Filming Device
manufacturers, the preferred selection is CUBIC.
Magnification Type Selection Descriptions:

-NONE: No interpolation. This selection is available for camera types that do not support Magnification
Type algorithms.
- REPLICATE: Adjacent pixels are interpolated which results in images described as ìpixellyî. This
algorithm is not usually preferred.
-BILINEAR: A first order interpolation of pixels is used which results in images described as blurred. This
-CUBIC: A third order interpolation is used with a large number of possible formulations. Filming Device
manufacturers define parameters called smoothing type to set coefficients used in the algorithm. The
implementation of these coefficients is Filming Device manufacturer dependent.
• Film Format:
Use the default values. However, if you change Film Orientation, you might also change the Film Format.
Consult the manufacturer of a DICOM printer for proper Film Format settings.
2-40 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-41 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

c. Use the Advanced Parameters window to set the Image Quality Parameters. To ensure these settings are
correct, verify all selections with the Filming Device Service Representative.
Set the following parameters, then click on Back to return to the 1st page.
• Configuration: (See the graph below.)
This parameter is automatically set just when selecting the DICOM printer manufacturer on the 1st page.
If you change this parameter, consult both customer and printer manufacturer.
This parameter is typically used to specify the image contrast (select a LUT curve).
The Configuration field may be up to 1024 characters long. The filed will scroll automatically as
characters are typed. To review the Configuration field if the entire length does not appear in the
parameter window, click and hold down the middle mouse button while the cursor is in the window.
• Minimum and Maximum Density: (See the graph below.)
These parameters are automatically set just when selecting the DICOM printer manufacturer on the 1st
page. If you change these parameters, consult both customer and printer manufacturer.
These parameters are used to set the brightness for the images on the film. The range of values is 0 -
4095.
Relationship among Configuration, Maximum Density , and Minimum Density
Maximum Density
Minimum Density
Configuration (LUT Curve)
• Smoothing Type:
This parameter is used when the Magnification Type is set to CUBIC. The parameter represents the
coefficient for the image resolution algorithm and is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and must
be verified with the radiology department after filming review.
2-42 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

• Empty Density: (See Illustration below.)
This parameter sets the density for empty film view ports. Typically, BLACK is used but WHITE is an
option. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.
• Border Density: (See Illustration below.)
This parameter sets the density for the border used around the film viewports. Typically, BLACK is used
but WHITE is an option. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.
Empty Density Border Density
• Film Size and Trim:

Use the default values. Do NOT change parameters.
d. On the 1st setting screen, click on Accept.
e. On the Camera Setting screen, select Quit. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
2-43 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
When Auto Film Setting is selected:

Until now, a customer must change the camera type for filming per series using AutoFilm Setup. For V/R 2.00 or
later system, it can be changed at a time by a FE using this button . Refer to Appendix 2-19-2, AutoFilm Setting
Function for more information.
a. Select Remote Printer to print out an image.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Once you have clicked on Accept, all of the remote printers that a customer has set
individually will be changed to the printer selected at AutoFilm Setting. This can NOT be
reset to the previous printers.
b. Click on Accept.
c. On the Camera Setting screen, select Quit. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
2-44 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

8. Network Settings screen:
2-45 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

a. Click on Network on.
The check box becomes red.
b. OC Parameters Setting:
i. Enter Host Name.
Host Name identifies the name of this CT. This name must be unique for the site, and will appear in
unix prompts and in a few other places. If you set up a network connection to the site, the OC computer
will appear on the site‘s network as <Host Name>.
ii. Enter IP Address.
The IP address is administrated by a network administrator. Ask a network administrator to assign an
IP address.
iii. Enter Net Mask.(if required.)
The Net Mask is to divide the IP address between the network bits and the host bits. The Net Mask is
determined by a network administrator.
c. If this system is not connected to a ‘Site Subnet‘ then;
• Verify all other fields are set to the defaults:
OC - Net Mask Gateway - Host Name Gateway - IP Address

255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254
d. If this system is connected to a ‘Site Subnet‘ then continue as follows;

Gateway Parameters Setting:
i Enter the Gateway Parameter (IP Address). If possible consult the site’s network administrator before
configuring the interface to the site’s network. The site administrator should provide the Gateway IP
Address.
2-13-2 Completing Configuration

The system is rebooted and returns to the desktop menu.
2. ìAuto-Start Disabledî message appears. Click on OK.
2-46 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-14 OPTION CHECK

1. In desktop menu, select List Options.
The option(s) currently installed is displayed.
2. Using the option list recorded at section 2-5, Saving Option Information, verify that the proper option(s) has
been correctly reloaded to the system.
3. Click on Quit.
2-47 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-15 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW!

1. In desktop menu, select Shutdown to restart the system.
NOTICE
When performing Application-Shutdown and then restarting the system, always use the
Shutdown button. Do not use the Startup Button, because this might not work correctly.
2. Verify that the system starts up with no error.
3. Confirm that the latest version of software has been installed in the system. The system version is displayed
at the lower right of the screen while the system is starting up.
4. Click on OK in Attention window.
2-48 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-16 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE
2-16-1 Restoring Patient Data

1. Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works -> Archive -> Restore
-> Selection -> All examination -> Restore -> Restore examination -> OK)
After restoring image data, perform Archive -> Detach, then eject the MOD.
2. Restore the raw data to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Scan -> Scanner Utilities -> Rawdata
Function -> Function Selection -> Restore/Delete from MOD -> (Select all rawdata using shift key.) ->
Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) -> Start Restore)
2-16-2 Setting Gamma Value

The gamma value for CRT/LCD display must be set after system software installation.
1. Click on Service icon located on the upper left screen.
2. Click on Shell.
3. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
% su <Enter>
Password: #bigguy <Enter>
> gamma 1 <Enter> (To modify gamma value to 1.0.)

(Note: One space input is required between inputs of “gamma” and “1”.)
> gamma <Enter> (To verify that gamma value should be 1.000000.)
> exit <Enter> (To terminate the shell window.)
> exit <Enter> (To close Unix shell.)
2-16-3 Test Scan

1. Perform scans to verify that they are completed with no errors.
The LFC has now been completed!
2-49 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-17 INSITE INSTALLATION

For the system with the InSite ONLY, install the InSite AGAIN after LFC.
When performing LFW, InSite installation is NOT required since it is NOT deleted.
2-17-1 General
Prerequisite
• The modem must be powered up.
• Prepare the followings before starting the InSite Installation Procedure.
CD-ROM : V/R2.00 (or later) Service Software (Must be prepared by FE, distributed through TAB 287.)
2-17-2 Installing InSite Software

1. To display the desktop menu:
Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown -> OK.
2. Insert the InSite CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software button located on the upper right of the screen.
4. ‘Do you install software from CD-ROM?‘ message appears.

Click on Yes.
5. ‘Following software will be installed‘ window appears.
Click on Yes.
The InSite software loading procedures is started. It takes a few minutes to complete.
2-50 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-17-2 Installing InSite Software (Continued)

6. ‘Installation complete.‘ message appears.
Click on OK.
7. On the desktop menu, click on Shell button located on the upper right of the screen.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
9. On the desktop menu, click on Install InSite button located on the upper right of the screen.
A few seconds later, the InSite Interactive Platform Configuration screen appears.
10. Click on ACCEPT three times.

Illustration 2-2 InSite Interactive Platform Configuration Screen
2-51 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
NOTICE
After entering InSite Setup Screen, call the local support center to set up the InSite together.
GEMS - Americas GEMS - Europe GEMS - Asia
CT National Support Center European Support Center Asia Support Center
Phone: 1-800-321-7937 (33) 1 3083 1300 On-Line Center
FAX: (262) 896-2710 (33) 1 3070 9970
11. After a moment, the InSite Setup Screen appears.
Click on InSite Checkout tag.
Illustration 2-3 InSite Setup Screen
2-52 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-17-3 Setting up InSite Checkout
NOTICE
VERY IMPORTANT: You MUST run the checkout in order to establish the InSite connection.
Checkout MUST be rerun in the event of a system re-load.
1. The InSite Checkout Screen appears.
Click on CHECKOUT NOW.
Illustration 2-4 InSite Checkout Screen
DISABLE INSITE
2-53 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-17-3 Setting up InSite Checkout (Continued)

2. The ‘Configure InSite Now‘ window appears.
3. Click on OK.
Illustration 2-5 Configure InSite Now Window
4. To perform an InSite checkout, call your local technical support center.

IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The OLC Checkout procedure depends on whether or not a customer‘s system has iLinq
license. For a iLinq-licensed system, verify that iLinq icon is seen next to the Service Icon
after the checkout has been successfully completed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
5. When the checkout process has been completed successfully, you might get some messages such as “InSite
Dial out Check completed Successfully” from a local support center.
2-54 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-17-4 Completing the insite installation

1. Click on Exit to complete the InSite installation.
Illustration 2-6 Closing the InSite Setup
DISABLE INSITE
InSite has now been installed!
2-17-5 Saving InSite Information

The configuration files for Class-M software and InSite features are saved to MOD as part of the Save System State
process.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Savestate.

Note
You can see the message ‘This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.‘ after clicking ‘Continue‘
‘Continue‘ is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.
5. ‘System State Saved Successfully‘ appears. Click on Continue.
NOTICE
2-55 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-18 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
2-18-1 OS Installation Troubleshooting Tips

According to the following flow chart, perform OS installation troubleshooting. When an error can not be recovered,
contact your local technical support center.
Message displayed during Miniroot Loading

Enter `c' to continue booting the old miniroot with no state fixup.
A trouble occurs dur Enter `f' to fix miniroot install state, and try again.
ing OS installation. Enter `r' to reload the miniroot.
Enter `a' to abort (cancel) the installation.
Enter your selection and press ENTER (c, f, r, or a)
Does the mes

sage above ap Yes Enter r" .
pears during Was the trouble Yes
miniroot load recovered?
ing?
No
No
Power OFF the OC main

switch, then ON Again.
Perform the HDD labeling Refer to the procedure
procedures. described in the follow
ing page.
Was the trouble Yes

recovered?
No
Refer to the procedure

Format the HDD. It described in the follow
ing page.
takes approx. 3 hours!!
NOTICE: Since the HDD might be
physically damaged even if a trouble
was recovered, you should replace
the HDD as soon as possible.
Was the trouble Yes
recovered?
No
Replace the HDD. Return to the LFC procedures.
2-56 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
HDD Labeling Procedures
NOTICE
When an error occur during OS loading procedures and the system can not recover from it.,
perform the following steps a to d (This procedure performs both label and repartition of the
HDD to load the install program on the HDD.)
a. Insert the CD-ROM (Core OS system software (1 of 2)) into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
b. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.
c. Type the following responses.
> boot -f dksc(1,1,8)sashARCS dksc(1,1,7)stand/fx.ARCS <Enter>

.........................
Do you require extended mode with all options available? (no) y
<ENTER>
SGI Version x.x ARCS xxxx, xxxx
fx: îdevice-nameî = (dksc) <ENTER>
fx: ctlr# = (0) <ENTER>
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>
fx: lun# = (0) <ENTER> (Some HDD might skip this entry.)
After these input, fx may inform and ask to you before next menu.
For them, just <ENTER> or y<ENTER>. (Some HDD might skip this entry.)
----- please choose one (? for help, .. to quit this menu)-----

[exi]t [d]ebug/ [l]abel/ [a]uto
[b]adblock/ [exe]rcise/ [r]epartition/
fx> l/c/a <ENTER> (l: Label, c: Create, a: All)

....................
....................

fx> exi <ENTER>
label info has changed for disk dksc (0,1,0). write out changes?(yes)
<ENTER>
d. Click on Done button located on the lower right side of the console window. ( The “exit” command can not
be used at this time.)
2-57 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
How to format a System HDD

Note
It takes approximately 3 hours!!
NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!
1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.
2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.
Few seconds later, the window including ‘Starting up the system‘ message and ‘Stop for maintenance‘ button

3. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.
5. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.
6. Type the following responses.

.........................
<ENTER>
SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx
fx: drive# = (1) <ENTER>

fx> d <ENTER>
2-58 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
How to format a System HDD (Continued)

[c]mpbuf [fi]llbuf [see]k [showp]ages
[d]umpbuf [n]umber [w]ritebuf [set]page
[e]ditbuf [r]eadbuf [showc]apacity [fo]rmat
fx/debug> fo <ENTER>
fx/debug/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current) <ENTER>

..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>
Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 3 hours to format a 9GB HDD.
7. Verify that ‘format completed successfully’ message appears.
8. Type the following to start the repartition procedures:

fx/debug> .. <ENTER>

fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

[ro]otdrive [o]ptiondrive [e]xpert
[u]srrootdrive [re]size
fx/repartition> ro <ENTER>
fx/repartition/rootdrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>

Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>

.................

fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>
2-59 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
How to format a System HDD (Continued)

fx> exi <ENTER>
9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot. (Proceed to Section 2-7-1, Loading Miniroot (Installation
tool).)
2-60 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
How to format an Image HDD

Note
It takes approximately 3 hours!!
NOTICE
Format procedures deletes all data from the HDD!
1. Shut down the system, then switch OFF the main switch of the OC.
2. Switch ON the main switch of the OC.
Few seconds later, the window including ‘Starting up the system’ message and ‘Stop for maintenance’ button

3. Press ESC key.

Note
Stop for maintenance button can be clicked instead of pressing ESC key.
5. Click on Enter Command Monitor to display the Console window.
6. Type the following responses.

.........................
<ENTER>
SGI Version xxxx, xxxxxx
fx: drive# = (1) 2 <ENTER>

fx> d <ENTER>
2-61 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
How to format an Image HDD (Continued)

fx/debug> fo <ENTER>
fx/debug/format: Drive Parameters to use in formatting=(current) <ENTER>

..................
about to destroy data on disk dksc(0, 1, 0)!ok? y <ENTER>
Formatting procedure is started. It will take approximately 3 hours to format a 9GB HDD.
7. Verify that ‘format completed successfully’ message appears.
8. Type the following to start the repartition procedures:

fx/debug> .. <ENTER>

fx> r <ENTER>
....................
....................

fx/repartition> o <ENTER>
fx/repartition/optiondrive: type of data partition = (xfs) <ENTER>

Warning:.........
..................
backed up if it contains any user data. Continue? y <ENTER>

.................

fx/repartition> .. <ENTER>
2-62 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
How to format an Image HDD (Continued)

fx> exi <ENTER>
9. Click on Install System Software to install Miniroot to perform LFC. (Proceed to Section 2-7-1, Loading
Miniroot (Installation tool).)
2-63 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-18-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips

The following is a summary of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print that was gathered during software testing
and validation of the DICOM Print feature.
ERROR BRINGING UP THE CAMERA INSTALLATION/FILMING APPLICATION

• Symptom: After creating/modifying the DICOM Print Camera the install camera interface does not come
up and the filming application indicates it cannot bring up the film composer.
Cause: The configuration field contains invalid information such as a backslash (\) as the final character
in the field or brackets ({}).
• Solution: The camera.dev file in ‘~ctuser/app-defaults/devices’ must be manually edited to remove the
offending characters in the set configuration line. Invalid characters include \{}
CONFIGURATION INFORMATION FIELD

• Symptom: Cannot view the entire configuration field (> 25 characters)
• Solution: Hold down the middle mouse button and move the field contents
NEED TO SET DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES NOT SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE

• Symptom: User wants the white border around each image box ON/OFF permanently for this system
and it cannot be set as the default for the camera.
• Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line to the camera.dev file located in ‘~ctuser/app-
defaults/devices’ after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
For Trim Off - set TRIM NO
For Trim On - set TRIM YES
• Symptom: DICOM Print Camera supports multiple film sizes and the User only wants to print if the Film
Size is correct for [14x17]. [Otherwise the camera will queue the films or return an error causing the
queue to pause (based upon the DICOM Print Camera specifications).]
To force a 14x17 film size - set filmSize 14INX17IN
a. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown ->
OK.
b. Click on Shell.
2-64 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-18-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (Continued)

c. Type as follows:
> cd /usr/g/ctuser/app-defaults/devices <Enter>

> ls *.dev <Enter>
camera.dev(This is the file for a laser imager.)
di3.dev(Example; This is the file for DICOM printer.)
xxx.dev(Example; another DICOM printer)
> nedit di3.dev <Enter> (Example; the current DICOM printer is ‘di3.dev’.)
d. Add the following line to the dev file for the current DICOM printer.
#first the obligatory fields
set dName îdi3î

set dPort 104
set dComment îî
set dType digital
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType DICM
set dQueueName dicom
set dAppTitle îdi3î
set dIPAddress X.XX.XXX.XXX
set dHostName di3
set filmSize 14INX17IN (Add this line here!)
#then the optional fields
e. Select File -> Save.
f. Type exit <Enter> to terminate the shell window.
NEED TO PREVENT DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES FROM BEING SENT TO DICOM PRINT CAMERA
• Symptom: Some DICOM Print attributes are optional, and may result in fatal errors. For example, the
Fuji camera does not support the Empty Image Density parameter for the film box.
• Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line(s) to the camera.dev file located in ‘~ctuser/
app-defaults/devices‘ after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
- To prevent sending the Smoothing Parameter set FB_Smooth FALSE
- To prevent sending the Border Density set FB_Border FALSE
- To prevent sending the Empty Image Density set FB_EID FALSE
- To prevent sending the Minimum Density set FB_MinD FALSE
- To prevent sending the Trim Parameter set FB_Trim FALSE
2-65 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-18-2 DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips (Continued)
ERROR TRYING TO CONNECT TO THE DICOM PRINT CAMERA

• Symptom: DICOM Print server can be reached (ping), but Application error indicates ‘Unable to start
filming interface‘ and the help message talks about running the install.dasm (Association Error)
• Solution: The system is unable to complete the association. Check the AE Title and the Port number of
the DICOM Print Server and correct them using reconfiguration, CT Camera setting screen.
FILM COMPOSER ERROR NOT USABLE

• Symptom: Film Composer error says ‘unrecognized status - code 0‘
• Solution: Review the log file, the attention and status windows. These areas have the correct filming
status (e.g. film jam, supply empty)
DEBUGGING CONNECTION ISSUES DIFFICULT

• Symptom: The timeouts for the DICOM Print are very long, which means one needs to wait a long time
before you know the application is not working.
• Solution: The timeouts for the DICOM Print were setup to ensure that the system would work regardless
of whether the DICOM Print Camera was on a LAN or a WAN halfway around the world. The DICOM
Print timeouts for the association and DIMSE classes (e.g. N-GET, N-DELETE) can be modified within
the DICOM Print camera installation. They can be reduced down to 90 seconds.
DICOM PRINT ERROR ON N-GET TIMEOUT CONFUSING

• Symptom: When the N-GET timeout goes off, the error message in the prslog file will be ‘Could not get
printer status, invalid command sequence for N-GET‘.
• Solution: When the User sees the above error they may want to consider that the issue may be an
inactivity timer on the N-GET DIMSE Service.
DICOM PRINT CAMERA SLIDE SUPPORT

• Symptom: Current implementation of DICOM Print does not allow selection of slide format.
• Solution: Feature not currently supported. Possibly in future releases.
CONFUSION ON FILM FORMAT NOTATION

• Symptom: GEMS Laser Camera and DICOM Print film format notations are opposite.
• Solution: GEMS Laser Camera film format notation has always been
- row x col (e.g. 12 on 1 = 4x3)
- DICOM Print Standard film format notation is
- col x row (e.g. 12 on 1 = 3x4)
2-66 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-19 APPENDIX
2-19-1 Entering the Machine Number

Enter Machine #, complying with the instructions below.
1. Write down the System serial No. printed on the label on the rear left of the PDU.
If a customer’s PDU does NOT have such a label, the label might exist into the accessory box which has been
shipped with the system.
E1ADS02010
System Serial Number
2. Determine Machine # in accordance with the table below and enter it into Machine # in the system setting
screen.
For the example above, ‘26010‘ must be entered as a Machine #.
Products System Serial Number Machine #

(Y: First two digit of the year, e.g., 2002→02,
2003→03
xxx: Serial No.)
CT/e Dual, ProSpeed AII/FII E1ADSYxxx 26xxx
E1ACSYxxx 25xxx
E1AASYxxx 24xxx
D1ACSYxxx 23xxx
D1ABSYxxx 22xxx
D1AASYxxx 21xxx
2-67 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
2-19-2 AutoFilm Setting Function

This function is made available in V/R 2.0 or later, and used for changing at a time the camera type of all protocols
which already have been set.
This can change the parameters of Destination and Format in Autofilm Setup screen. The other settings in Autofilm
Setup screen and all settings of Film Tab Card in View/Edit Screen are NOT changed.
Autofilm Setup
Destination
Laser Camera
Format Size Auto Start Auto Print

Normal Slide Yes Yes
Copies Exam Page Series Page
Yes Yes
Scout XRef–Scout
Film Direction
Top to Bottom
Auto Film Composer Show Grayscale
e/s/i Yes
Changed
OK Cancel
NOT Changed
Film Tab Card
Scan Timing Recon Film
Auto Frame Width Level Mag User GSE

Interval Flip Rotate
Film Format 1 1 Factor Anno.
Recon 1 Recon 1 Recon 2 Recon 2 Recon 3 Recon 3

Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set
NOT Changed 1 2 1 2 1 2
2-68 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

LATER (FOR LINUX COMPUTER OC)
Compatible with Version 3.10 or later System Software

IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Use this instructions when:
• Performing the System Version-up (LFC) or Revision-up (LFW)
• Replacing the HDD with a new one (LFC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
3-1 GENERAL
WARNING
IF THE SYSTEM HAS THE UPS ASSY, MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF THE UPS POWER
BEFORE YOU ACCESS THE OPERATOR CONSOLE.
It is recommended to perform LFC in stead of LFW since LFC is able to load thorough Linux Software here.
Shaded paragraph shown in this section means that this might happens depending on a system.
CAUTION
Make sure that all Images have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD before
performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). This procedure will re-initialize
all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.
3-1 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

An LFC/LFW procedures are outlined in Table 3-1.
NOTICE
If system version is returned to old version, the LFC procedure MUST be used. (Do NOT use
the LFW procedure.)
Table 3-1 Software Loading Standard Procedure
Procedures PPrerequisitererequ
isite
LFC LFW
1 Saving Patient Data (Patient Image Data and Patient Raw Data) Two Blank MODs
2 Saving System State Data A blank MOD
3 Saving Option Information -
4 Shutdown the System None -
5 Installing System None CD-ROM(s): Core OS

Software (OS)
* Disk Partitioning and
OS Installation
6 Installing Application Software CD-ROM(s):

Application Software
7 Confirm Port Number -
(To Be Continued)
3-2 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
Procedures Prerequisite
LFC LFW
8 Installing the Revision-up (Patch) software
Loading Revision-up (Patch) software CD-ROM : (Patch)
software
Patch Verification -
9 Restoring the System State Data AGAIN! MOD in which the
been saved
10 Changing System Configuration (Reconfig) -
11 Option Check
Patch Verification
12 Starting Up the System NOW! -
13 Completing the LFC / LFW Procedures
Restoring Patient Data (Patient Image Data and Patient Raw Data) MODs in which the
images or raw data
have been saved
Setting Gamma Value -
Test Scan -
14 Installing the InSite Software CD-ROM : Service
Software
3-3 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-2 PREPARATION
Prepare the followings before starting the LFC/LFW Procedure.
• CD-ROMs : Core OS (OS) (for LFC Only)
• CD-ROM : Service Software (for InSite software, if required)
• Option MOD (if new options are installed)
• 2 MODs (Must be prepared by FE)
- For Saving System State Data (one MOD’s A side)
- For Saving Raw Data (another MOD’s A side)
Optional 5” MOD:
- 5” MOD for saving Patient Image.
- Or confirmed the Patient Image saved in other media.
Note
3.5 inches 540MB is required.
Note
For the MODs to save patient images or system state data, they do NOT need to be manually
formatted. (A used-MOD is available.) This means that the format procedures will be automatically
started before saving data.
3-4 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-3 SAVING PATIENT DATA
CAUTION
Make sure that all Images and raw data have been reconstructed and archived on the MOD
before performing this procedure (Refer to the Operator Manual). Both LFC and LFW
procedures will re-initialize all system data disk, erasing all images and scan data.
Prerequisite
• Two Blank MODs
Note
Patient Image data and Raw Data MUST be saved on the different MODs.
Procedures
1. If required, save the Patient image on a 5” MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works -> Selection
(e.g. select all examination) -> Archive -> (Label) -> Save examination)
After saving image data, perform Archive -> Detach, then eject the MOD.
2. If required, save the raw data on a MOD. Refer to the Operator manual. The MOD must be initialized first when
using a new MOD. (Scan -> Scanner Utilities -> Rawdata Function -> Function Selection -> Save to MOD
-> Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) -> Start Save)
3-5 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-4 SAVING SYSTEM STATE DATA

Note
For LFW procedures, skip this section and go to Section 3-5, Saving Option Information.
Prerequisite
• One blank MOD
Procedures
Before beginning the software install, save the system state data.
1. Verify that the system is powered ON.
2. Select Service -> Application shutdown -> OK -> Savestate.
3. “Insert MOD and press confirm!” appears. Set the write protect tab of the MOD to the write position and insert
the MOD into the MOD drive of the OC.
Note
6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Okay.
Note
- IOS preferences
- Calibration files
- Autovoice files
- User preferences
3-6 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-5 SAVING OPTION INFORMATION

The option information are normally saved in the system state data. However, they must be written down in the
following table as a back-up. This table can be used when option data reloading fails.
1. On the desktop menu, click on List Option button located on the upper right of the screen.
Option list will appear.
2. Write down the current “Installed option”.
Option Installed? Option Installed? Option Installed?
3D Dicom MOD Raw Data 1000 Max

Smart Prep Power 200mA Max Remote Tilt
Smart Recon Fast Scan 1.0 sec Thickness 1mm
DentaScan Helical 60 Max Thickness 0.6mm
Navigator Helical 90 Max Asymmetric Scan
CTPerfusion Helical 120 Max Connect Pro
ImageDisk ImageDisk 20000
Note: Depending on the system version, unavailable option might be included in the option list above.cell
3. Click on Quit to return to the desktop menu.
3-7 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

4. For Asymmetric Option Only:
When a system contains Asymmetric Scan Option, the asymmetric mode must be recorded.
a. Click on Reconfig –> Preferences.
b. Click on Configuration of the Asymmetric scan.
c. Write down the asymmetric mode (10:1, 10:2, or 6:1), then click Quit –> Quit to return to the desktop menu.
3-8 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
5. For ConnectPro Option Only:

When a system contains ConnectPro Option, the setting parameters must be recorded.
a. Click on shell.
b. Enter the following commands to display the ConnectPro information, then write down them to the table
below.
cat /usr/g/config/WLSystem.cfg
AE_Title HIS Server AE Title
IP_Address HIS Server IP Address
Port_Number HIS Server AE Port #
cat /usr/g/config/WLdcm.cfg
bi_apptitle CT Server AE Title
cat /usr/g/ctuser/app-defaults/network/ppsServer.map
AppTitle PPS Server AE Title
IPAddress PPS Server IP Address
IPPortNo PPS Server AE Port #
c. Enter Exit to return to the desktop menu.
3-6 SHUTDOWN THE SYSTEM

Note
1. Click on Shutdown on the desktop menu.
2. Few seconds later, the message “System halted” appears.
3. Press the Power button on Front of OC to power off, or press Hot Key combination Ctrl+ALT+”MEAS” or
Ctrl+ALT+ “ .” to restart immediately. “Meas” Key is a ” delete “ function key in a normal computer keyboard.
3-9 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-7 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CORE OS)

Note
Prerequisite
• CD-ROMs : Core OS (OS)
Procedures
Note
Confirm the CD-ROM is the primary boot device of the OC before installing OS. The System BIOS
configuration already set the CD-ROM as primary boot device in factory, there is little risk BIOS be-
ing changed during normal use.
1. Insert the CD-ROM (Core OS system software) into the CD-ROM drive of the OC. The CD-ROM will go back
automatically.
Note
After shutting down the system, press the OC power button to restart. Insert the CD-ROM quickly
into the CD-ROM drive of the OC, otherwise, the system can not be started from the CD-ROM.
2. Verify that the LED of the CD-ROM drive is ON, then OFF again.
3. System will be booted by the CD-ROM and OS installation will begin.
boot: iGEMSi <Enter> (Applies to OS version CTT1.6.6)
iGEMS <Enter> (Applies to OS version CTT1.8.8+ and CTT1.8.12+)
(The installation program runs.)
Note
Click on OK to keep the default settings (for Keyboard Type, etc) and proceed the procedure.
5. About 10 minutes later, the “Complete” window appears, press “enter “ to reboot. System will be rebooted and
then the CD-ROM is pop-up, remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive. The drive tray can go back auto-
matically.
Note
If a CDRW drive is installed, the tray won’t go back automatically. You have to press the button on
the CDRW to make it go back.
3-10 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-8 CONFIRM PORT NUMBER

Note
For Application Software V/R4.0 or later, after completing OS installation, perfirm following steps.
For earlier versions, skip ths section.
1. Select Unix shell from desktop menu located on the upper right of the screen. Then type the following
responses to the indicated prompts.
% su - <Enter>
> echo “TEST” > /dev/ttyM7 <Enter>
2. If “ttyM7: No such device.” appears, port type is 4 ports card.

If no message appears, port type is 8 ports card.
3-11 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-9 INSTALLING APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Note
For installing the application revision-up (Patch) software, refer to Section 3-11.
Prerequisite
• For LFW ONLY:
One blank MOD (for saving the system state data)
Procedures
3-9-1 Software Installation (For LFC Procedure)
3-9-1-1 LFC Normal Procedure
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
For V/R4.0 or later, Serial Card Type must be set in system configuration during application
software installation. Otherwise, Application may not startup after completing installation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. After system reboot, close a Linux dialog box popped up, press CD-ROM drive button to insert the Application
CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and the CD-ROM will be auto mounted, a dialog will be popped up: “Do you
wish to run/mnt/cdrom/autorun?”, click on Yes. Then wait for several minutes for the initialization of installation.
2. A message window will appear. Two Modes are provided. Select Normal.
(For V/R3.32 or earlier, skip this step.)
3. Two minutes later, a dialog will appear: ‘Install Utility”, click on Load to begin loading the software.
4. After the reboot completes and the Xwindow starts, a shell window will display, wait for about 3 minutes (for
few sites, possibly wait for over 20 minutes) and a menu window of “Select Product” will appear, click on the
product name to select, then click on Yes.
5. A message window will appear. Two Modes are provided. Select MOD.
6. 3 to 5 minutes later, a message window will appear to prompt inserting MOD to restore system configuration
of system state then click on Confirm.
a. If the SaveState MOD exists, click on Confirm, and click on OK to keep the default settings and proceed
the procedure.
b. If the SaveState MOD does not exist, click on Cancel.
Note
Restoring system state in this step just restore system configuration section.
A window of “Install Utility” will appear and disappear automatically.
7. 3 to 5 minutes later, a system configuration window appears.
3-12 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-9-1-1 LFC Normal Procedure (Continued)

8. Set the Time Zone, Hardware information and Network, then press the ACCEPT button.
The following shows an example:
Time Zone:Asia/Shanghai Hardware:Click on Hardware Network:Click on Network->Network on
L E
M P
X A
E
Note
For the Hardware settings, refer to the Section 3-13-1 Configuration Setup, Step 6. Hardware Seet-
ing Screen (a to d). Be sure Serial Card Type (4 Ports/8 Ports) are selected.
For the network settings, refer to the Section 3-13-1 Configuration Setup, step 8. Network Settings
Screen (a to d)
9. A time setup window will display, set the date and time of the system and click on set, the click on quit.
10. Wait for about 3 to 5 minutes, a message window will appear to prompt restoring state, “Restore System State
data (click on No if no Saved Data exist ).
Click on Cancel if there is no Saved Data MOD. Go to next step.
Click on Yes if there is Saved Data MOD. A message window will appear to prompt inserting MOD and clicking
on Confirm. Then insert the MOD containing Saved Stateand click on Confirm or click on Cancel.
11. Option will be installed automatically according to SaveState.
Note
It depends on the content of Saved Data MOD that what options will appear in the Installed Option
area.
3-13 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-9-1-1 LFC Normal Procedure (Continued)

12. A message window appears. “ The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect. Do you wish
to reboot now ”. Click Yes to restart .
13. Refer to 3-4 to save System State.
14. End.
NOTICE
If Patch is needed, go to 3-11 to install Revsion up.
NOTICE
Do not try to remove the CD-ROM at this time!!!
It MUST be removed in Section 3-10, eject the CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
For V/R4.0 or later, Serial Card Type must be set in system configuration during application
software installation. Otherwise, Application may not startup after completing installation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Insert the Application CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, and the CD-ROM will be auto mounted, a dialog will be
popped up:”Do you wish to run/mnt/cdrom/autorun?”, click on Yes. Then wait for several minutes for the ini-
tialization of installation.
2. A message window will appear. Two Modes are provided. Select Recovery.
3. Two minutes later, a dialog will appear:”Install Utility”, click on Load to begin loading the software.
4. After the reboot completes and the Xwindow starts, a shell window will display, wait for about 3 minutes and a
menu window of “Select Product” will appear, click on the product name to select, then click on Yes.
5. A message window will appear. Two Modes are provided. Select MOD.
6. 3 to 5 minutes later, a message window will appear to prompt inserting MOD to restore system configuration
of system state then clicking on Confirm.
a. If the SaveState MOD exists, click on Confirm, and click on OK to keep the default settings and proceed
the procedure.
b. If the SaveState MOD does not exist, click on Cancel.
A window of “install Utility” will appear and disappear automatically.
7. 3 to 5 minutes later, a system configuration window appears.
3-14 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
8. Set the Time Zone, Hardware information and Network, then press the ACCEPT button.
The following shows an example:
Time Zone:Asia/Shanghai Hardware:Click on Hardware Network:Click on Network->Network on
L E
M P
X A
E
Note
For the Hardware settings, refer to the Section 3-13-1 Configuration Setup, Step 6. Hardware Seet-
ing Screen (a to d). Be sure Serial Card Type (4 Ports/8 Ports) are selected.
For the network settings, refer to the Section 3-13-1 Configuration Setup, step 8. Network Settings
Screen (a to d)
9. A time setup window will display, set the date and time of the system and click on set, the click on quit.
10. Wait for about 3 to 5 minutes, a message window will appear to prompt restoring state, “Restore System State
data (click on No if no Saved Data exist ).
Click on Cancel if there is no Saved Data MOD. Go to next step.
Click on Yes if there is Saved Data MOD. A message window will appear to prompt inserting MOD and clicking
on Confirm. Then insert the MOD containing saved state and click on Confirm or click on Cancel.
11. Option will be installed automatically according to SaveState.
Note
It depents on the content of Saved Data MOD that what options will appear in the Installed Option
area.
3-15 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-9-1-2 LFC Recovery Procedure (For Bad System Hard Disk Replacement) (Continued)
12. Please confirm raid recovery has finished before reboot, the recovery procedure will take at least 1 hour please
open a shell and use “cat/proc/mdstat” to check, click on Okay.
13. A message window appears:”The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect. Do you wish to
reboot now”. Click Yes to restart.
14. Refer to 3-4 to save System State.
15. End.
NOTICE
If Patch is needed, go to 3-11 to install Revsion up.
NOTICE
Note
It is recommended that the FE do LFC by normal mode. Recovery mode is introduced only if the customers have
important images to be restored.
3-16 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-9-2 Application Software Installation only (LFW procedure)

1. On the desktop menu, click on LFW located on the upper right of the screen.
2. Click on Yes in response to “Do you really want to do LFW?”
3. Save system state. Set the write protect tab of the blank MOD to the write position and insert the MOD into the
MOD drive of the OC.
4. A message window will appear to prompt inseting MOD and clicking on Confirm.
Note
Do not click Cancel. Otherwise, LFW will abort.
Note
6. “System State Saved Successfully” appears. Click on Okay.
8. Select the proper Product Name.
9. Click Yes.
“Enter Application Software CD-ROM in drive” message appears.
Application software loading procedures are automatically started. Refer to Step 5. through 12. in Section 3-
9-1-1.
After completing application software loading, the system will be automatically rebooted.
NOTICE
3-17 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-10 EJECTING THE CD-ROM.

1. “Auto-Start Disabled” window appears. Click on OK.
2. In desktop menu, select Shell and type the following to eject the CD-ROM.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>

3. Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
NOTICE
3-18 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-11 INSTALLING REVISION-UP (PATCH) SOFTWARE

If the system has a revision-up (patch) software, it must be installed at this time.
If it does not, skip this section, then go to section 3-13, Changing System Configuration (reconfig).
3-11-1 Loading revision-up software

This is the common procedures for system revision-up.
Prerequisite
• CD-ROM : Application Revision-up (Patch) Software
Procedures
1. Insert the CD-ROM (application Patch Software) into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software located on the upper right of the screen.
3. “Do you install software from CD-ROM?” window appears. Click on Yes.
4. “Following software will be installed” window appears. Click on Yes.
The patch installation procedures are automatically started.
5. Click on OK in response to “Installation Successful.” window.
Note
Some patch softwares might require reboot (shown below). If it does, when clicking on OK, the
system automatically reboots and pauses at the desktop menu.
V/R x.xx.
6. After completion of the patch installation, Click on Shell on the upper right of the screen.
3-19 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-11-1 Loading revision-up software (Continued)

> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
NOTICE
3-11-2 Patch Verification

1. Click on List S/W Package.
2. Click on Patch.
3. Verify that information for the patch installed are displayed. (Example)
******************************* Displayed *******************************
TWN02OS1: ProSpeed II Series Patch Software 2.xx
TWN02OS2: ProSpeed II Series Patch Software 2.xy
************************************************************************
4. Click on Close.
NOTICE
3-20 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-12 RESTORING THE SYSTEM STATE DATA AGAIN!

When performing the LFC/LFW, manually restore the system state data AGAIN at this time.
Do NOT start up the system yet!
Prerequisite
Procedures
1. In desktop menu, select Restorestate.
2. “Insert MOD and press confirm!” appears. Insert the MOD, including the system state data saved in section 3-
4, into the MOD drive, then click on Confirm.
5. “System state restored successfully” appears. Click on Okay.
6. Eject the MOD from the MOD drive.
NOTICE
3-21 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-13 CHANGING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (RECONFIG)

The System configuration data MUST be checked or changed when a different version of the application software
has been loaded, because new setting(s) might be added in a new version of software.
3-13-1 Configuration Setup
1. In desktop menu, click on Reconfig located on the upper right of the screen.
This System configuration screen appears.
2. Enter the appropriate configuration data.
NOTICE
The following items restrict the use of characters for entry. Do NOT use other characters.
Items Characters Usable for Entry

Hospital Name alphanumerics (a-zA-Z0-9), underscore (_), period (.), comma (,), and space
Machine # numerics (0-9)
Station Name alphanumerics (a-zA-Z0-9), underscore (_), and period (.)
3-22 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

3. System Setting Screen:
a. Changes Hospital Name to the site's preferred name.

b. Select the Timezone for this site, and record it below.
Time Zone
c. Verify Model Name.

Note
The Model Name is currently not implemented.
d. Verify Machine # .
The unique machine number # is printed on the label attached near the OC rating plate.
e. Verify/change Station Name. (Entry MUST be performed using up to 4 characters.)
f. Select Preferences to proceed to the next screen.
3-23 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

4. Preferences Setting Screen:
a. Select Time Format to be displayed on screen.

b. Select Units for patient weight for units for patient weight to be displayed on images.
c. Select Bone Kernel. (default: Type 2)
Note
“Type 2” is less artifact, but lower resolution than Type 1.
d. Select Date Format to be displayed on images.
Note
To use Japanese era for date, YY/MM/DD format must be selected.
e. Select HIPAA Present (default: Off)
For how to use HIPAA, refer to Operator Manual, System.
Note
To use HIPAA to provide authentication authorization audit control.
3-24 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

f. Select Auto mA. Select Target SD1 for higher mA, Target SD2 for middle mA, or Target SD3 for lower
mA according to the following mA table.
GE recommends ‘Target SD1‘ for Japan and ‘Target SD2‘ for countries other than Japan, but this
selection depends on a customer´s preferences. If a customer requires a different image quality, select an
other Target SD.
Auto mA modes
IQ
Normal High mA (High IQ)
SD1 IQ
Low Dose
SD2 Normal
IQ
Low Dose
Normal
SD3 Low Dose
Low mA (Low IQ)
Target SD IQ Level
SD IQ 1.63
SD Normal 1.47
- 1.40
SD Low Dose 1.33
- 1.26
- 1.22
- 1.14
- 1.10
- 1.0
3-25 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

g. Click on Configuration, then select Asymmetric mode and click on Accept.
Mode Meanings
h. Select Language to proceed to the next screen.
3-26 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

5. Language Setting Screen:
a. Select the Language for this site.

b. Select Default Autovoice Language for this site.
c. Select Hardware to proceed to the next screen.
3-27 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

6. Hardware Setting Screen:
For V/R4.0 or later:
a. Select a proper Keyboard, depending on the system.

b. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).
c. Select MOD (only for V/R 4.0 or later).
d. Select a proper 4 Ports/8 Ports Type depending on result of port verification in Section 3-8 CONFIRM
PORT NUMBER.
(Only for V/R4.0 or later, 8 ports serial card is phased in after software V/R4.0)
3-28 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
For V/R3.6 or later
a. Select a proper Tube Type, depending on the system.

• ESR Tube for CT/e Dual Series
b. Select a proper Keyboard, depending on the system.
c. Select Start Angle for Head Scan (Default: 90/270 (Conventional)).
d. Select a proper CDROM/CDRW Type depending on the system (only for V/R 3.60 or later).
3-29 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

7. Camera Setting Screen:
a. Select either Laser Camera or DICOM Printer.
When Laser Camera is Selected:
3-30 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

Set the following parameters:
• Laser Camera Type : Choose the closest option.
• DASM Interface : This option must match your physical DASM type; for DASM-LCAM, select Digital.
For DASM-VDB, select Analog.
• Do NOT select Slides or Zoom. Use Film Composer -> Options -> Slide formats when selecting this
parameter, because the Film composer option overrides the System configuration option.
• Smooth/Sharp selects sharper or smoother image interpolation.
Click on Accept. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
3-31 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

When DICOM Printer is selected:
Note
For a summery of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print, refer to Appendix, 2-18-2
DICOM Print Troubleshooting Tips.
• Add: used when adding the DICOM printer newly to the system.
• Delete: used when deleting the DICOM printer selected from the Device File list.
• Update: used when modifying the setting for the DICOM printer selected from the Device File list.
a. Click on Add.
3-32 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

The DICOM Print Camera setting screen appears.
b. Set the following parameters, then click on Advanced. This goes to 2nd setting screen (for setting advanced
parameters) for DICOM Print Camera (step c).
3-33 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

• Camera Type:
Select a proper manufacturer for DICOM printer.
After you select the appropriate Camera Type, the system automatically pre-set default values into the
DICOM Print Camera settings screen area.
Pre-set Default Value (Reference Value)

Fuji Konica Kodak Agfa
Imation (dry) Wet
Medium Type Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue
Film Portrait Portrait Portrait Portrait Portrait
Orientation
Destination Processor Processor Magazine Magazine Processor
Magnification Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic Cubic
Type
Film Format - - - - -
Configuration 1 KC_LUT=2 LUT=Ver693c0 CS300\\CN1 PRECEPTION
.W87,8 _LUT=140
Maximum 300 300 300 300 300
Density
Minimum 22 22 22 22 22
Density
Smoothing Off Off Off Off Off
Type
Empty Density Black Black Black Black Black
Border Density Black Black Black Black Black
Film Size 14IN x 17IN Empty Empty Empty Empty
Trim Off Off Off Off Off
• Network Parameters :
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Name, same as Host Name (Name shown in the header title
of the Film composer).
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device Host Name.
Enter the hospital provided Filming Device IP Address.
Enter the AE title from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the Filming Device.
Enter the TCP Listen Port from the DICOM Conformance Statement document provided with the
Filming Device.
3-34 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
NOTICE
When, at the DICOM Print Camera side, you enter the AE title of a CT system connected to
the printer, CT Host Name _DCP must be used.

Note
Filmer DICOM AE (Application Entity) Title may be site specific. Make sure that you check with the
Filming Device Service Representative and the hospital network administrator to ensure you are
using the correct AE Title for the destination Filming Device.
• Medium Type:
Select the appropriate Medium Type parameter. Check with the radiology department and the
Filming Device Service Representative to determine whether the department is using BLUE
FILM, CLEAR FILM, or PAPER.
• Film Orientation:
Select PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE. If you change this parameter, you might also change the Film
Format. Consult the manufacturer of a DICOM printer for proper Film Format settings.
• Destination:
Select the appropriate Destination parameter. Check with the radiology department and the Filming
Device Service Representative to determine whether to use MAGAZINE or PROCESSOR.
• Magnification Type:
Select the appropriate Magnification Type parameter. This parameter selects the algorithm used to
interpolate pixels to provide desired film resolution. Check with the Filming Device Service
Representative to ensure the best Image Quality film presentation. For most Filming Device
manufacturers, the preferred selection is CUBIC.
Magnification Type Selection Descriptions:

-NONE: No interpolation. This selection is available for camera types that do not support Magnification
Type algorithms.
- REPLICATE: Adjacent pixels are interpolated which results in images described as ìpixellyî. This
-BILINEAR: A first order interpolation of pixels is used which results in images described as blurred. This
-CUBIC: A third order interpolation is used with a large number of possible formulations. Filming Device
manufacturers define parameters called smoothing type to set coefficients used in the algorithm. The
implementation of these coefficients is Filming Device manufacturer dependent.
• Film Format:
Use the default values. However, if you change Film Orientation, you might also change the Film Format.
Consult the manufacturer of a DICOM printer for proper Film Format settings.
3-35 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-36 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

c. Use the Advanced Parameters window to set the Image Quality Parameters. To ensure these settings are
correct, verify all selections with the Filming Device Service Representative.
Set the following parameters, then click on Back to return to the 1st page.
• Configuration: (See the graph below.)
This parameter is automatically set just when selecting the DICOM printer manufacturer on the 1st page.
If you change this parameter, consult both customer and printer manufacturer.
This parameter is typically used to specify the image contrast (select a LUT curve).
The Configuration field may be up to 1024 characters long. The filed will scroll automatically as
characters are typed. To review the Configuration field if the entire length does not appear in the
parameter window, click and hold down the middle mouse button while the cursor is in the window.
• Minimum and Maximum Density: (See the graph below.)
These parameters are automatically set just when selecting the DICOM printer manufacturer on the 1st
page. If you change these parameters, consult both customer and printer manufacturer.
These parameters are used to set the brightness for the images on the film. The range of values is 0 -
4095.
Relationship among Configuration, Maximum Density , and Minimum Density
Maximum Density
Minimum Density
Configuration (LUT Curve)
• Smoothing Type:
This parameter is used when the Magnification Type is set to CUBIC. The parameter represents the
coefficient for the image resolution algorithm and is Filming Device manufacturer dependent and must
be verified with the radiology department after filming review.
3-37 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

• Empty Density: (See Illustration below.)
This parameter sets the density for empty film view ports. Typically, BLACK is used but WHITE is an
option. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.
• Border Density: (See Illustration below.)
This parameter sets the density for the border used around the film viewports. Typically, BLACK is used
but WHITE is an option. The Minimum and Maximum Density values are used as the representations.
Empty Density Border Density
• Film Size and Trim:

Use the default values. Do NOT change parameters.
d. On the 1st setting screen, click on Accept.
e. On the Camera Setting screen, select Quit. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
3-38 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
When Auto Film Setting is selected:

Until now, a customer must change the camera type for filming per series using AutoFilm Setup. For V/R 2.00 or
later system, it can be changed at a time by a FE using this button . Refer to Appendix 2-19-2, AutoFilm Setting
Function for more information.
a. Select Remote Printer to print out an image.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Once you have clicked on Accept, all of the remote printers that a customer has set
individually will be changed to the printer selected at AutoFilm Setting. This can NOT be
reset to the previous printers.
b. Click on Accept.
c. On the Camera Setting screen, select Quit. Then go to Network Setting Screen.
3-39 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

8. Network Settings Screen:
3-40 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

a. Click on Network on.
The check box becomes red.
b. OC Parameters Setting:
i. Enter Host Name.
Host Name identifies the name of this CT. This name must be unique for the site, and will appear in
unix prompts and in a few other places. If you set up a network connection to the site, the OC computer
will appear on the site‘s network as <Host Name>.
ii. Enter IP Address.
The IP address is administrated by a network administrator. Ask a network administrator to assign an
IP address.
iii. Enter Net Mask.(if required.)
The Net Mask is to divide the IP address between the network bits and the host bits. The Net Mask is
determined by a network administrator.
c. If this system is not connected to a ‘Site Subnet‘ then;
• Verify all other fields are set to the defaults:
OC - Net Mask Gateway - Host Name Gateway - IP Address

255.255.255.0 gw 192.168.0.254
d. If this system is connected to a ‘Site Subnet‘ then continue as follows;

Gateway Parameters Setting:
i Enter the Gateway Parameter (IP Address). If possible consult the site’s network administrator before
configuring the interface to the site’s network. The site administrator should provide the Gateway IP
Address.
3-13-2 Completing Configuration

The system is rebooted and returns to the desktop menu.
2. ‘Auto-Start Disabled’ message appears. Click on OK.
3-41 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-14 OPTION CHECK

1. In desktop menu, select List Options.
The option(s) currently installed is displayed.
2. Using the option list recorded at section 3-5, Saving Option Information, verify that the proper option(s) has
been correctly reloaded to the system.
3. Click on Quit.
3-15 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM NOW!

NOTICE
3. Confirm that the latest version of software has been installed in the system. The system version is displayed
at the lower right of the screen while the system is starting up.
4. Click on OK in Attention window.
3-42 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-16 COMPLETING THE LFC / LFW PROCEDURE
3-16-1 Restoring Patient Data

1. Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Works -> Archive -> Restore
-> Selection -> All examination -> Restore -> Restore examination -> OK)
After restoring image data, perform Archive -> Detach, then eject the 5” MOD.
2. Restore the raw data to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Scan -> Scanner Utilities -> Rawdata
Function -> Function Selection -> Restore/Delete from MOD -> (Select all rawdata using shift key.) ->
Rawdata Selection (e.g. Whole exam) -> Start Restore)
3-16-2 Setting Gamma Value

The gamma value for CRT/LCD display must be set after system software installation.
1. Click on Service icon located on the upper left screen.
2. Click on Shell.
3. Move the mouse in the window, then type the following responses to the indicated prompts:
% su <Enter>
> xgamma –gamma 1 <Enter> (To modify gamma value to 1.0.)

(Note: One space input is required between inputs of “gamma” and “1”.)
> xgamma <Enter> (To verify that gamma value should be 1.000000.)
> exit <Enter> (To terminate the shell window.)
> exit <Enter> (To close Unix shell.)
3-16-3 Test Scan

1. Perform scans to verify that they are completed with no errors.
The LFC has now been completed!
3-43 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-17 INSITE INSTALLATION

For the system with the InSite ONLY, install the InSite AGAIN after LFC.
When performing LFW, InSite installation is NOT required since it is NOT deleted.
3-17-1 General
Prerequisite
• The modem must be powered up.
• Prepare the followings before starting the InSite Installation Procedure.
CD-ROM : Service Software (Must be prepared by FE, distributed through TAB 261.)
For OS CTT1.6.6 (P/N: 2371765), InSite software V/R3.0 (P/N: 2381797)
For OS CTT1.8.8+ (P/N: 2404032) and CTT1.8.12+ (P/N: 5126711), InSite software V/R3.20 (P/N:
2404035)
3-17-2 Installing InSite Software

1. To display the desktop menu:
Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown -> OK.
2. Insert the InSite CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
3. On the desktop menu, click on Install Software button located on the upper right of the screen.
4. ‘Do you install software from CD-ROM?‘ message appears.

Click on Yes.
5. ‘Following software will be installed‘ window appears.
Click on Yes.
The InSite software loading procedures is started. It takes a few minutes to complete.
6. ‘Installation complete.‘ message appears.
Click on OK.
7. On the desktop menu, click on Shell button located on the upper right of the screen.
> eject <Enter>
> exit <Enter>
3-44 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039

9. On the desktop menu, click on Install InSite button located on the upper right of the screen.
A few seconds later, the InSite Interactive Platform Configuration screen appears.
10. Click on ACCEPT three times.

Illustration 3-1 InSite Interactive Platform Configuration Screen
3-45 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
NOTICE
After entering InSite Setup Screen, call the local support center to set up the InSite together.
GEMS - Americas GEMS - Europe GEMS - Asia
CT National Support Center European Support Center Asia Support Center
Phone: 1-800-321-7937 (33) 1 3083 1300 On-Line Center
FAX: (262)896-2710 (33) 1 3070 9970
11. After a moment, the InSite Setup Screen appears.
Click on InSite Checkout tag.
Illustration 3-2 InSite Setup Screen
3-46 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-17-3 Setting up InSite Checkout
NOTICE
VERY IMPORTANT: You MUST run the checkout in order to establish the InSite connection.
Checkout MUST be rerun in the event of a system re-load.
1. The InSite Checkout Screen appears.
Click on CHECKOUT NOW.
Illustration 3-3 InSite Checkout Screen
DISABLE INSITE
3-47 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-17-3 Setting up InSite Checkout (Continued)

2. The ‘Configure InSite Now‘ window appears.
3. Click on OK.
Illustration 3-4 Configure InSite Now Window
4. To perform an InSite checkout, call your local technical support center.

IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The OLC Checkout procedure depends on whether or not a customer‘s system has iLinq
license. For a iLinq-licensed system, verify that iLinq icon is seen next to the Service Icon
after the checkout has been successfully completed.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
5. When the checkout process has been completed successfully, you might get some messages such as “InSite
Dial out Check completed Successfully” from a local support center.
3-48 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-17-4 Completing the insite installation

1. Click on Exit to complete the InSite installation.
Illustration 3-5 Closing the InSite Setup
DISABLE INSITE
InSite has now been installed!
3-17-5 Saving InSite Information

The configuration files for Class-M software and InSite features are saved to MOD as part of the Save System State
process.
2. On the desktop menu, click on Savestate.
Note
You can see the message ‘This is an Optical Disk containing a file system.‘ after clicking ‘Continue‘
‘Continue‘ is clicked on this message, you can NOT cancel this procedure any more.
5. ‘System State Saved Successfully‘ appears. Click on Okay.
NOTICE
3-49 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-18 DICOM PRINT TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS

The following is a summary of troubleshooting information for DICOM Print that was gathered during software testing
and validation of the DICOM Print feature.
ERROR BRINGING UP THE CAMERA INSTALLATION/FILMING APPLICATION

• Symptom: After creating/modifying the DICOM Print Camera the install camera interface does not come
up and the filming application indicates it cannot bring up the film composer.
Cause: The configuration field contains invalid information such as a backslash (\) as the final character
in the field or brackets ({}).
• Solution: The camera.dev file in ‘~ctuser/app-defaults/devices’ must be manually edited to remove the
offending characters in the set configuration line. Invalid characters include \{}
CONFIGURATION INFORMATION FIELD

• Symptom: Cannot view the entire configuration field (> 25 characters)
• Solution: Hold down the middle mouse button and move the field contents
NEED TO SET DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES NOT SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE

• Symptom: User wants the white border around each image box ON/OFF permanently for this system
and it cannot be set as the default for the camera.
For Trim Off - set TRIM NO
For Trim On - set TRIM YES
• Symptom: DICOM Print Camera supports multiple film sizes and the User only wants to print if the Film
Size is correct for [14x17]. [Otherwise the camera will queue the films or return an error causing the
queue to pause (based upon the DICOM Print Camera specifications).]
To force a 14x17 film size - set filmSize 14INX17IN
a. Click on Service icon to display the Service Menu desktop, then select Application Shutdown ->
OK.
b. Click on Shell.
3-50 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-18 DICOM PRINT TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS (CONTINUED)

c. Type as follows:
> cd /usr/g/ctuser/app-defaults/devices <Enter>

> ls *.dev
<Enter>
camera.dev(This is the file for a laser imager.)
di3.dev(Example; This is the file for DICOM printer.)
xxx.dev(Example; another DICOM printer)
> nedit di3.dev <Enter> (Example; the current DICOM printer is ‘di3.dev’.)
d. Add the following line to the dev file for the current DICOM printer.
#first the obligatory fields
set dName îdi3î

set dPort 104
set dComment îî
set dType digital
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType DICM
set dQueueName dicom
set dAppTitle îdi3î
set dIPAddress X.XX.XXX.XXX
set dHostName di3
set filmSize 14INX17IN (Add this line here!)
#then the optional fields
e. Select File -> Save.
f. Type exit <Enter> to terminate the shell window.
NEED TO PREVENT DICOM PRINT ATTRIBUTES FROM BEING SENT TO DICOM PRINT CAMERA
• Symptom: Some DICOM Print attributes are optional, and may result in fatal errors. For example, the
Fuji camera does not support the Empty Image Density parameter for the film box.
• Solution: Using your favorite editor, add the following line(s) to the camera.dev file located in ‘~ctuser/
app-defaults/devices‘ after the DICOM Print device has been otherwise configured.
- To prevent sending the Smoothing Parameter set FB_Smooth FALSE
- To prevent sending the Border Density set FB_Border FALSE
- To prevent sending the Empty Image Density set FB_EID FALSE
- To prevent sending the Minimum Density set FB_MinD FALSE
- To prevent sending the Trim Parameter set FB_Trim FALSE
3-51 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-18 DICOM PRINT TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS (CONTINUED)
ERROR TRYING TO CONNECT TO THE DICOM PRINT CAMERA

• Symptom: DICOM Print server can be reached (ping), but Application error indicates ‘Unable to start
filming interface‘ and the help message talks about running the install.dasm (Association Error)
• Solution: The system is unable to complete the association. Check the AE Title and the Port number of
the DICOM Print Server and correct them using reconfiguration, CT Camera setting screen.
FILM COMPOSER ERROR NOT USABLE

• Symptom: Film Composer error says ‘unrecognized status - code 0‘
• Solution: Review the log file, the attention and status windows. These areas have the correct filming
status (e.g. film jam, supply empty)
DEBUGGING CONNECTION ISSUES DIFFICULT

• Symptom: The timeouts for the DICOM Print are very long, which means one needs to wait a long time
before you know the application is not working.
• Solution: The timeouts for the DICOM Print were setup to ensure that the system would work regardless
of whether the DICOM Print Camera was on a LAN or a WAN halfway around the world. The DICOM
Print timeouts for the association and DIMSE classes (e.g. N-GET, N-DELETE) can be modified within
the DICOM Print camera installation. They can be reduced down to 90 seconds.
DICOM PRINT ERROR ON N-GET TIMEOUT CONFUSING

• Symptom: When the N-GET timeout goes off, the error message in the prslog file will be ‘Could not get
printer status, invalid command sequence for N-GET‘.
• Solution: When the User sees the above error they may want to consider that the issue may be an
inactivity timer on the N-GET DIMSE Service.
DICOM PRINT CAMERA SLIDE SUPPORT

• Symptom: Current implementation of DICOM Print does not allow selection of slide format.
• Solution: Feature not currently supported. Possibly in future releases.
CONFUSION ON FILM FORMAT NOTATION

• Symptom: GEMS Laser Camera and DICOM Print film format notations are opposite.
• Solution: GEMS Laser Camera film format notation has always been
- row x col (e.g. 12 on 1 = 4x3)
- DICOM Print Standard film format notation is
- col x row (e.g. 12 on 1 = 3x4)
3-52 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-19 APPENDIX
3-19-1 Entering the Machine Number

Enter Machine #, complying with the instructions below.
1. Write down the System serial No. printed on the label on the rear left of the PDU.
If a customer’s PDU does NOT have such a label, the label might exist into the accessory box which has been
shipped with the system.
E1ADS02010
System Serial Number
2. Determine Machine # in accordance with the table below and enter it into Machine # in the system setting
screen.
For the example above, ‘26010‘ must be entered as a Machine #.
Products System Serial Number Machine #

(Y: First two digit of the year, e.g., 2002→02,
2003→03
xxx: Serial No.)
CT/e Dual, ProSpeed AII/FII E1ADSYxxx 26xxx
E1ACSYxxx 25xxx
E1AASYxxx 24xxx
D1ACSYxxx 23xxx
D1ABSYxxx 22xxx
D1AASYxxx 21xxx
3-53 SYSTEM
REV 18 2326039
3-19-2 AutoFilm Setting Function

This function is made available in V/R 2.0 or later, and used for changing at a time the camera type of all protocols
which already have been set.
This can change the parameters of Destination and Format in Autofilm Setup screen. The other settings in Autofilm
Setup screen and all settings of Film Tab Card in View/Edit Screen are NOT changed.
Autofilm Setup
Destination
Laser Camera
Format Size Auto Start Auto Print

Normal Slide Yes Yes
Copies Exam Page Series Page
Yes Yes
Scout XRef–Scout
Film Direction
Top to Bottom
Auto Film Composer Show Grayscale
e/s/i Yes
Changed
OK Cancel
NOT Changed
Film Tab Card
Scan Timing Recon Film
Auto Frame Width Level Mag User GSE

Interval Flip Rotate
Film Format 1 1 Factor Anno.
Recon 1 Recon 1 Recon 2 Recon 2 Recon 3 Recon 3

Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set Film Set
NOT Changed 1 2 1 2 1 2
3-54 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
SECTION 4 - X-RAY ALIGNMENT
4-1 GENERAL
This ‘X-ray Alignment’ consists of the following check/adjustment procedures and must be performed in this order.
Order X-Ray Alignment Item Description

1 Detector Position Alignment Adjusts parallelism and detector Z-axis position to Gantry bear-
ing surface
2 Aperture Position Alignment Adjusts the aperture parallelism and distance between the ap-
erture and Gantry bearing surface
3 Plane Of Rotation(POR) Filmless POR:The tube warm-up scans are automatically per-
formed until the case temperatrue becomes 30%, then the tube
position in Z-axis direction is adjusted. The tube travel is calcu-
lated from the count ratio A(A+B) of 150 channels (R50ch,
C50ch, and L50ch).
4 Detector Beam-On-Window(BOW) Filmless BOW:The tube warm-up scans are automatically per-
formed until the case temperatrue becomes 30%, then the De-
tector position in Z-axis direction is adjusted. The tube travel is
calculated from the count ratio A(A+B) of 150 channels (R50ch,
C50ch, and L50ch).
5 Qcal Channel Ratio Compensates sensitivity between A and B slices for Z-axis
beam tracking
Gravity SAG (G-SAG) Check procedure for the Gantry rotating mechanism (bend, vi-
brations, etc.)
6 ISO Center Alignment Aligns the X-ray tube focus to the FOV center and the Detector
center channel.
7 Filter Center Alignment Aligns the filter to the X-ray tube and the Detector.
Note1: G-SAG is performed if considered necessary.
Note2: If you are sure that some procedures do not have to be performed, in this case, the possible allowed pro-
cedure combination/order should be:
At site installation or X-ray tube replacement, perform 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7.

At detector replacement, perform 4 → 5 → 6 → 7.
Note3: Z-axis mis-alignment has serious effect on an image quality for the Twin Detector system, as compared
to the single detector system. Therefor, the Detector position alignment, aperture position alignment, and
tube warm-up sequence at POR and BOW must be properly performed.
4-1 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039

Difference of POR Between Twin Detector and Single Detector
For POR of the Twin Detector system, the X–ray beam location after adjustment is determined by the initial position
of the Aperture and Detector (the center between A and B slices).
Therefore, the X–ray beam location adjusted by Film–less POR might be different from one by Film POR, but it is
no problem due to the fact that:
• A slight tilt of X–ray beam against Z–axis has little effect on an image quality.
• The Aperture and Detector are installed using the special tools shipped with the system to ensure reli-
able position and parallelism. (The single Detector does NOT require the aperture alignment tool.)
• During Filmless POR, the X–ray tube temperature is controlled by software so that the X–ray beam can
be exposed at a certain location of the detector. (The single Detector does NOT control the X–ray tube
temperature.)
4-2 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD !
IN THIS ‘X-RAY ALIGNMENT’, GANTRY COMPONENTS ARE ADJUSTED AND SCANS ARE
PERFORMED. ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ SWITCH BEFORE SERVICING OR
ADJUSTING THE GANTRY. ALSO VERIFY THAT NO PEOPLE ARE IN THE SCAN ROOM
WHENEVER A SCAN IS PERFORMED.
Requirements
The critical components for X-ray Alignment are all mounted directly to the rotating Gantry; they are:
• X-ray tube
• Collimator (includes a bow-tie filter and an adjustable beam defining exit slit)
• Detector
Tools and materials required for x-ray alignment:
• Detector alignment tool (shipped with the system)
• Aperture alignment tool (shipped with the system)
• G-SAG pin (attached on the bottom of the collimator)
4-3 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
Gantry Geometry
Gantry geometrical direction definitions:
THETA THETA
Theta – Tangent to Gantry rotation.

clockwise (+)
counterclockwise (–).
Adjustment possible for:
X-ray Tube
Collimator
Detector Zero degrees 6 o’clock
(HOME)
Z–Axis – Parallel to the axis of Gantry rotation.

toward the Table (–)
away from the Table (+).
Adjustment possible for:
X-ray Tube
Detector
4-4 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT

This procedure keeps constant the distance between the Z–axis adjusting nut (left, center, and right) for the Detector
and Detector support plate so that the Detector can be installed parallel and at a predefine distance (12mm) with the
Gantry bearing surface.
Special Equipment
• Detector Alignment Tool (Shipped with the system)
1. Preparation:
a. Set the Gantry to the 0O tilt position.

b. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.
c. Remove the front, rear, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
2. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board.
3. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS Assy reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.
4. Switch OFF the service switch on the SUB board.
4-5 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT(CONTINUED)

5. Loosen the three Detector locking screws. (Do NOT remove them.)
Illustration 4-1 Detector Locking Screws
4-6 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-2 DETECTOR POSITION ALIGNMENT(CONTINUED)

6. Using the Detector Adjustment Tool, set the distance between the Z–axis adjustment nut and detector support
plate to the so that it is the same one as the thickness of the tool.
Illustration 4-2 Detector Alignment Tool
7. Tighten the three detector locking screws securely.

8. Proceed to Section 3-3, ‘Aperture Position Alignment’.
4-7 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT

This procedure keeps constant the distance and parallelism between the aperture and Gantry bearing surface.
Special Equipment
• Aperture Alignment Tool (Shipped with the system)
1. Preparation:
a. Set the Gantry to the 0o tilt position.

b. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.
c. Remove the front, rear, and left maintenance covers from the Gantry.
2. Switch ON the service switch on the SUB board.
3. Rotate the Gantry until the Aperture Assy reaches the 6 o’clock position by hand.
4. Switch OFF the service switch on the SUB board.
4-8 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-3 APERTURE POSITION ALIGNMENT(CONTINUED)

5. Set the collimator to the initial position.
a. Switch ON all switches at the rear Gantry base.
b. Select Service –> Offline Scan –> T/G Control.
c. Set Collimator Control:
Auto Collimator: OFF, Position Change: ON, Move mode: Rel., Reset: ON
d. Click on OK. Verify that the aperture stepping motor rotates.
4-9 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039

6. Switch OFF the “Rotate”, “XG Power” and “Slip Ring115V” switches at the rear Gantry base.
7. Loosen the following nuts and screws of the aperture Assy. (Do NOT remove them.)
4-10 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039

8. Set the Aperture alignment tool in between the Gantry bearing and aperture Assy.
9. While pressing the Aperture Assy against the aperture alignment tool, tighten the aperture nuts and screws
gradually in the order shown in the photograph below.
Torque: Nut (x4) - 31kgf.cm
Screw (x3) - 16kgf.cm
10. Remove the Aperture alignment tool.
Aperture Alignment Tool
2 7
PUSH 6
5 4
11. Proceed to Section 3-4, ‘Plane Of Rotation ’.
4-11 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-4 PLANE OF ROTATION

This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the x-ray fan beam until it is perpendicular to the axis of
Gantry rotation within 0.75 mm.
The Filmless POR is performed for the Twin system.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Do not remove the bow–tie filter during POR for the Twin System.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.
b. Remove the front, right side and left side maintenance covers.
c. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
NOTICE
The detector temperature must be at a specified temperature before alignment, otherwise
alignment result is not exact.
2. Select Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> POR Alignment.
3. Click on OK to enter the POR program.
4. Click on Confirm to enter warm up scan sequence.
5. Click on Confirm in the Service Scan Window.
The warm up scans start, then air scans automatically start.
6. The tube travel appears on the screen. If the following message appears, you can complete the POR proce-
dures.
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Tube is Aligned within tolerance.
For Accuracy
Move Tube x.xxx mm (x.xxxx inch) FWD.
***************************************************************************
7. Adjust the tube Z-Axis position:
a. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “XG Power” switches.
c. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (See Illustration 3-3)
d. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z-Axis; note that there are two Z-Axis nuts for adjustment.
e. Loosen the nut that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.
f. Adjust the x-ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.
In this example, the tube should be shifted axially toward the Table to center the wide beam over the narrow
beam.
g. Tighten the nut previously loosened in step e.
h. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (Torque: 280 kg-cm)
4-12 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-4 PLANE OF ROTATION (CONTINUED)

i. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
j. Return to step 2.
8. Proceed to Section 4-5, ‘Detector Beam-on-Window.’
Illustration 4-3 X-ray Tube Positioning

Adjustment Nut for THETA Mounting Bolts Support Bolt Mounting Bolts
Z-
Ax
is
Support Bolt
Adjustment Nut for Z-Axis
RIGHT REAR
FRONT
LEFT
NUT D NUT C NUT B NUT A
Note: When loosen respective adjustment nut, use two spanner. One spanner
holds one nut, the other one loosens another nut. This will avoid damaging the
adjustment screws when adjusting the position of the nut. Please refer to above photo.
Nut to be loosened Direction to move

or Tightened
Front Rear Left Right
Nut A Loosened Tightened - -
Nut B Tightened Loosened - -
Nut C - - Tightened Loosened
Nut D - - Loosened Tightened
Note:
One turn = 1 mm shift.
4-13 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-5 DETECTOR BEAM-ON-WINDOW

To ensure that the entire width of the x-ray beam falls within the Detector window, follow this procedure for a Z-Axis
position check/adjustment of the Detector.
For Detector Z–axis alignment of TWIN system, high accuracy is required for geometric position between X–ray
beam and detector. Detector is aligned so that each detector channel (A–ch and B–ch) counts becoming same.
This Filmless Detector Z axis alignment require a scan to the user, and calculates ratio of counts between A side
and B side on 3 area, (left, center, right). The ratio is converted to tolerance of detector (mm) and displayed. The
user move detector and retry BOW.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Do not remove the bow–tie filter during BOW for the Twin System.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Plane of Rotation’ procedure.
b. Remove the Gantry front, rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.
NOTICE
The detector temperature must be at a specified temperature before alignment, otherwise
alignment result is not exact.
2. Select Service –> Calibration –> Automated Alignment –> BOW alignment.
3. Click on OK to enter the BOW program.
4. Click on Confirm to enter warm up scan sequence.
The warm up scans start, then air scans automatically start.
6. The detector travel appears on the screen. If the following message appears, you can complete the BOW pro-
cedures.
******************************* Displayed *******************************

Detector is Aligned within tolerance.
***************************************************************************
7. Adjust the Detector Z–Axis position:
a. Check that the Gantry is at the home position.
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch.
c. Remove the flexible cable cover. See Illustration 3–4
d. Loosen the three locking screws (Allen cap head).
4-14 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-5 DETECTOR BEAM-ON-WINDOW (CONTINUED)
Illustration 4-4 Beam-on-Window Adjustment
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Flexible Cable Cover Detector Adjustment Nut
Locking Screw
(Allen Head)
Z-Axis
Adjustment Nut
Detector
Support Plate Detector
Pin
Detector Detector
Support Plate
e. Adjust the Detector position by turning the adjustment nut(s) by the amount instructed on the CRT screen.
Formula: x.xxxx mm / 0.75 = xx turn of adjustment nut (one turn: approximately 0.75mm shift)
Counterclockwise ;FWD, toward the Table
Clockwise ;BWD, away from the Table
Specification : Detector Left, less than 0.072 mm
Detector Center, less than 0.076 mm
Detector Right, less than 0.072 mm
f. Tighten the three locking screws.
Torque: 117kgf.cm (11Nm)
g. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
h. Return to step 2.
8. Proceed to ‘Qcal Channel Ratio’ .
4-15 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-6 QCAL CHANNEL RATIO

This calibration must be performed just after completion of Filmless BOW.
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Do not remove the bow–tie filter during Q–cal Channel Ratio.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the BOW procedure.
b. Remove the Gantry front, rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.
2. Select Service –> Automated Alignment –> Qcal Channel Ratio.
3. Click on OK to enter the Qcal channel ratio program.
The scans start, then calibration automatically starts.
4-16 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-7 GRAVITY SAG

1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam-on-Window’
procedure.
b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.
c. Remove the bow-tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)
d. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
2. Select Gravity SAG, refer to below:
Service → Gravity SAG

3. Within the ‘Gravity sag’ menu, click on Cofirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform air scans
automatically.
4. After completing air scans, install the G-SAG pin:
b. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.
c. Rotate the Gantry manually in the CW direction until the x-ray tube is positioned at the bottom.
d. Set the Service switch to OFF.
e. Move the G-SAG pin into the position shown in Illustration 3-5.
f. Switch ON the “Rotate” switch.
Illustration 4-5 Installing G-SAG Pin
(Original Position) (Moved)
SAG Pin
BOTTOM VIEW OF THE COLLIMATOR
4-17 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-7 GRAVITY SAG (CONTINUED)

5. Click on Cofirm and press the <Start scan> button to perform G-SAG PIN scans automatically.
G-SAG calculation is automatically performed and its result is displayed.
Verify that the following is displayed.
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Gravity sag is in tolerance
6. If the gravity SAG data is out of specifications, verify that the detector mounting bolts and x-ray tube mounting
bolts are correctly torqued, and then perform this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure again.
7. Replace the G-SAG pin:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
b. Replace the G-SAG pin to the original position. See illustration 3-5.
c. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
8. Proceed to Section 3-8, ‘Iso Center Alignment’ if you performed the ‘Detector Beam-on-Window’ procedure
prior to this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure; or you do not perform ‘Iso Center Alignment’ or ‘Filter Center Alignment’
(Section 3-10), perform the following:
b. Installed the bow-tie filter.
4-18 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT

This ‘ISO Center Alignment’ aligns the x-ray tube focus to the FOV center and the Detector center channel.
Illustration 4-6 ISO Center Adjustment
Adjust
X-ray
Tube
Focus
Center of FOV
CH1
Detector
Center Channel:
342.75 + 0.02 CH
Note
Within the ‘Automated Alignment’ menu (Service → Automated Alignment), you don not have to
perform the following menus:
‘Tube Rough ISO Alignment’
‘Radial Alignment’
These are performed at the GEHW factory only.
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Detector Beam-on-Window’ or ‘Gravity
SAG’ procedure.
d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
4-19 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (CONTINUED)

2. Select Tube ISO Alignment, refer to below:
Service Menu → Automated Alignment → Tube ISO Alignment

Perform air and pin scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
Note
Attach a steel pin, approximately 6 mm in diameter, (ex. drill bit or phillips screw driver) to the
phantom holder at a position approximately 5 cm away from the scan axis center, as shown in
Illustration 3-7.
Illustration 4-7 Pin Scan
Pin Position (X,Y)
Screw Driver
50mm
Phantom Holder
x
ISO Center
4-20 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-8 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (CONTINUED)

3. Check that the calculated Iso Center Channel data is within a specification.
If the MEAN value is out of specification (342.75 ± 0.02), perform the following step, then follow the instructions
displayed on the CRT screen.
a. Adjust the x-ray tube Theta (tangential) position:
i. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.
ii. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
iii. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (see illustration 3-3)
iv. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for THETA; note that there are two THETA nuts for adjustment.
v. Loosen the nut that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.
vi. Adjust the x-ray tube position by turning the adjustment nut by the amount instructed on the CRT
screen.
vii. Tighten the nut previously loosened in step v.
viii. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts and 2 support bolts. (Torque: 280 kg-cm)
ix. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches.
4. Proceed to Section 3-9, ‘Filter Center Alignment.’
4-21 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT
Procedures
This ‘Filter Center Alignment’ aligns the filter to the x-ray tube and the Detector.
Illustration 4-8 Filter Center Alignment
X-ray (Fixed)
Tube
Focus
Center of Filter
Adjust
Filter
Ch1
Detector (Fixed)
Filter Center Ch.: 342.75 + 0.3
VIEW FROM TABLE
1. Preparation:
You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Iso Center Alignment’ procedure.
4-22 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-9 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (CONTINUED)

2. Select Bowtie Filter Alignment, refer to below:
Service Menu → Automated Alignment → Bowtie Filter Alignment

Perform air and filter scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
3. Check that the calculated Filter Center Channel data is within a specification:
If the AVERAGE value is out of specification (342.75 ± 0.3), perform the following step, then follow the
instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
a. Adjust the filter Theta (tangential) position:
i. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o’clock (home) position.
ii. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch.
iii. Loosen the two bolts indicated in illustration 3-9.
iv. Rotate the adjustment screw to shift the filter for the amount instructed on the CRT screen.
One turn 1 mm filter shift.

v. Tighten the two bolts loosened in step iii.
4. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.
Illustration 4-9 Filter Center Adjustment
Loosen these Bolts

Adjustment
Screw
Collimator with Front Cover Removed
4-23 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT

Note
The radial alignment is rarely performed. Only when loosening the detector locking screw (see
Illustration 3-12), this must be performed.
Prerequisite
• Radial Alignment Tool : 2234059
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘ switch.
c. Rotate the Gantry (Tube) to the 12 o‘clock (home) position.
d. Remove the bow-tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual)
e. Remove the connector cover from the DAS assy.
f. Switch ON the ‘Rotate‘ switch.
2. Select Radial Alignment, refer to below:
Service Menu → Automated Alignment → Radial Alignment

Perform air and tool scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 3-11 (A).)
Repeat the above scans for the other tool attachment to obtain calculated Radial Alignment data.
(Attachment of the Radial Alignment Tool is as shown in illustration 3-11 (A’).)
4-24 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT (CONTINUED)
Illustration 4-10 Radial Alignment Tool
Radial Alignment Tool
A'
3. Check that an average of the 2 calculated Radial Alignment data is within a specification.
If not, perform the following steps:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘ switch.
b. Remove the Radial Alignment tool.
c. Install a Dial Indicator on the side of the Detector using an attachment tool.
d. Loosen the three (x2) mounting screws and a locking screw.
e. Refer to the average value, rotate the Detector in the specified distance and direction.
f. Tighten the mounting screws and the locking screw.
• Locking Screw Torque: 11 Nm (117 kgfcm)
g. Remove the Dial Indicator with attachment tool.
h. Switch ON the ‘Rotate‘ switch.
i. Repeat the Radial Alignment procedure, to verify the adjustment.
4-25 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
4-10 RADIAL ALIGNMENT (CONTINUED)
Illustration 4-11 Locking Screw and Mounting Screws
Mounting
Screws
Mounting
Screws
Dial Indicator
Locking Screw
Detector
Attachment Tool
4. Perform the following alignment:
• ISO Center Alignment
• Filter Center Alignment
4-26 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
SECTION 5 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION
5-1 GENERAL
NOTICE
If customer has the asymmetric scan option, please confirm it was installed before system
calibration, otherwise redo system calibration.
This ‘System Calibration’ describes the following check/calibrations/adjustment:
• CAM Amplifier Linearity Check (by performing x-ray exposures)
• Hilight Calibration; consisting of the following:
Q Calibration (Q-cal)
XT Calibration (XT-cal)
AV Calibration (AV-cal)
DG Calibration (DG-cal)
• Air and Phantom Calibrations
• CT Number Adjustment
The above calibrations and adjustment should be performed if any of the following replacements and/or system
adjustments are performed since the last calibrations/adjustment.
‘CAM Amplifier Linearity Check’ may be performed before calibrations/adjustment.
• X-ray tube replacement
• Detector replacement
• DAS or CAM Board replacement
• Collimator or Filter replacement
• Plane of rotation alignment
• Detector beam-on-window alignment
• Iso center alignment.
• Filter center alignment
5-1 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039

The following table shows that which Hilight calibration (Q-cal, XT-cal, AV-cal, or DG-cal) should be performed for
the above occasions and also the calibration/adjustment order to be followed.
Calibratio Detector X-ray tube or Plane of DAS CAM Board #1 CAM

n/ replaced or Collimator or rotation or replaced replaced Board (at the
Adjustme Detector Filter Iso center or right end) re-
nt Order beam-on- replaced Filter center placed
↓ window alignment
alignment performed
performed
1 Q-cal Chan- Q-cal Channal Q-cal Channal - - Q-cal Chan-
nal Ratio Ratio Ratio nal Ratio
2 Q-cal Q-cal Q-cal DG-cal Air Cal Air Cal
3 XT-cal Air Cal Air Cal Air Cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal
4 AV-cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal Phantom Cal CT Number CT Number
Adjust Adjust
5 Air Cal CT Number CT Number CT Number - -
Adjust Adjust Adjust
6 Phantom Cal - - - - -
7 CT Number - - - - -
Adjust.
5-2 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during system calibrations/adjustment.
Make sure they are clean and contrast-free.
Phantom For System with ESR Tube

Water Phantom (25 cm) 2221972
Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (42 cm) 2221975
Quality Assurance Phantom (QA Phantom) P9100SG
(See Illustration 4-1)
Crosstalk Phantom (XT Phantom) 2221977
(See Illustration 4-1)
Illustration 5-1 QA Phantom and XT Phantom
QA Phantom XT Phantom
Diameter : 12.6 cm
(Polypropylene)
5-3 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X-RAYS)

Perform the following procedure to check that the non-linearity of the CAM Board amplifiers is within 0.1%.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the “Rotate“ switch.
b. Remove the gantry front cover.
c. Remove the bow-tie filter from the collimator. (Refer to the Component Replacement manual.)
d. Switch ON the ‘’ Rotate” switch.
2. Perform two air stationary scans; one with 30, 20, or 15 mA, the other with 60, 40, or 30 mA:
a. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Offline Scan
b. Select Stationary from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]’.
c. Perform the following scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
Azimuth : 0 deg. Azimuth : 0 deg.
Scan Time : 1, 1.5, or 2 sec Scan Time : 1, 1.5, or 2 sec
(Select the shortest one available in the system. The selection in Scan 1 must be used also in Scan 2.)
Thickness : 10 mm Thickness : 10 mm
Focus : Large Focus : Large
KV: 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA: 30 mA (1 sec) or MA : 60 mA (1 sec) or
20 mA (1.5sec) or 40 mA (1.5 sec) or
15 mA (2sec) 30 mA (2 sec)
(Others) : (defaults) (Others) : (defaults)
3. Store the following vector files (mean files) 1 and 2 out of the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
Raw Data File Raw Data File No. Mean Vector File Comment
to be Selected No.
(30, 20 or 15 mA Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, 1 30, 20, or 15 mA
Acq No: 1 Ach
(60, 40 or 30 mA Scan) Exam#2, Series#1, 2 60, 40, or 30 mA
Acq No: 1 Ach
Note: ”Ach” described in File Comment means A channel . “Bch“ should be commented
when testing B channel
5-4 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X-RAYS)(CONTINUED)

a. Select Format Raw Data; refer to below:
Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Format Raw Data

b. Select A side. (A channel)
c. Select the raw data file (Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.
d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings, then click on OK:
Offset File Correction Yes

Reference Correction Yes
Natural Log Conversion No
e. Select Active Mean as “Select Type of Data:”.

f. Click on Store to File.
g. Enter 1 as “ Mean Vector Number” and 30, 20 or 15 mA Ach as” File Comment”, the click on OK.
h. Click on Select RawID... to return to the Fan Data Format screen, and repeat steps c to g to make Vector
files 2.
4. Apply a division to the vector files No.1 and No.2:
a. Select Vect/Vect. Op; refer to below:
Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis →

Calculations → Vect/Vect. Op
b. Select A/B from ‘Select Operation.’
c. Select MeanFile 1 as Vect Data File A.
Select MeanFile 2 as Vect Data File B.

d. Enter 3 as “Output Vector Number“ and 30/60 ( 20/40, or 15/30) mA Ach as “Comment“, then click on OK.
5. Check the calculated vector file No.3 using View Vector:
a. Select View Vector; refer to below:
Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis →

View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 3- 30/60 mA (20/40 mA, or 15/30 mA) Ach as “Select SupMean File:“.
c. Click on [Plot].
d. Select ‘Manual Scale.’
Enter 0.99 for Data Min.
Enter 1.01 for Data Max. (Change this, if necessary)
5-5 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-2 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY CHECK (X-RAYS)(CONTINUED)

Click on OK.
A graph is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 4-2.
Check that the non-linearity (shown as “E” in the illustration) is less than 0.001 (0.1 %). In the illustration, “A” and
“B” indicate the average values of approximately 10 channels each. The difference between “B” and “A” (= “E”)
shows the magnitude of the non-linearity of the amplifiers.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for B Side ( B channel).
Illustration 5-2 Non-linearity at Amplification Change
1.005 B 10 channels
E
10 channels
0.995
5-6 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-3 HILIGHT CALIBRATION
5-3-1 General
This Hilight calibration should be performed prior to the air and phantom calibrations; and the air and phantom
calibrations should be performed if once the Hilight calibration is performed.
The x-ray tube must be sufficiently cool (the tube case temperature must be below 10 % heat level).
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARDS! SOME HILIGHT CALIBRATIONS ROTATE THE GANTRY (SEE THE
TABLE BELOW). WHEN HILIGHT CALIBRATION IS PERFORMED WITHOUT THE GANTRY
COVERS INSTALLED, ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT NO PERSON IS IN THE SCAN ROOM.
Hilight Calibration Does gantry rotate?

Q-CAL Yes (The Gantry rotates during warm-up sequence,
but stops during data acquisition sequence.)
XT-CAL Yes
AV-CAL No
DG-CAL Yes (The Gantry rotates during warm-up sequence,
but stops during data acquisition sequence.)
5-7 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-3-2 Q Calibration
The focus position of the x-ray tube shifts with temperature change. It will consequently shift the x-ray beam position
along the Z-axis. In this calibration, the following scans are automatically performed:
• four scans (Thickness: 1, 2, 3, 5, and 10 mm) (when the x-ray tube is cold)
• warm-up scans
• four scans (Thickness: 1, 2, 3, 5, and 10 mm) (when the x-ray tube is hot)
This calibration takes approximately 10 minutes.
1. Preparation:
Note
The bow-tie filter must be removed during Q callibration .

2. Select Q-CAL; refer to below:
Service Menu → Service Calibration → Q-CAL

3. Follow the procedure that appears on the CRT screen.
5-3-3 XT Calibration
The Lumex crystals of the detector cells generate light when they are hit by x-rays. Since the crystals are placed
close to the crystals of the adjacent channels, the light from one channel can interfere with adjacent channels,
causing crosstalk noise. This procedure creates a calibration file to compensate this interference.
1. Preparation:
2. Select XT-CAL; refer to below:
Service Menu → Service Calibration → XT-CAL

3. Perform air scans, following the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
5-8 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-3-3 XT Calibration (continued)
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARDS! WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON
AND SMALL BUTTON), THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE 0° POSITION. IF IT IS
NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY,
SWITCH OFF THE ‘SCAN’ SWITCH FIRST.
4. Position the XT phantom at the (scan center + 180 mm) height:
a. Install the XT phantom to the phantom holder.
b. Shift the phantom to the up-limit, using the up-down adjuster.
c. Position the phantom at the scan center; align the positioning lights and a cross marked on the phantom
surface.
d. Hold down the [Height] button to display the current height (ex. ‘-198’), and press the [Up] button to raise
the Table by 180 mm (ex. Until the Display reads ‘-018’).
If the Table can not be raised to the specified height due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the T3
Table dip switch on the TGP Board to disable the interlock function, and continue to raise the Table. In this
case, be careful not to have the Table collide against anything.
e. Select [Confirm] on the screen.
Illustration 5-3 XT Phantom Centering
Do not position this area to the lights
Positioning
Lights
Up/Down Adjuster
5-9 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-3-3 XT Calibration (continued)

5. Follow the instructions that appear on the CRT screen.
6. Switch OFF the T3 Table dip switch (if it is set to ON) on the TGP Board.
NOTICE
Do not forget to switch OFF the T3 Table dip switch (if it is set to ON), otherwise there will
be collision hazard, since the interlock function does not work, if T3 is set to ON.
5-3-4 AV Calibration
The light emission of the Lumex Crystal persists after the x-ray radiation stops. This phenomenon is called ‘After
Glow.’ This procedure creates a file called After Glow Vector, used to compensate the After Glow.
1. Preparation:
2. Select AV-CAL; refer to below:
Service Menu → Service Calibration → AV-CAL

5-10 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-3-5 DG Calibration
If some scans are performed with the same conditions but with different scan times, the CT numbers may not be the
same for these scans. This is due to CAM Board gain changes caused by different scan times. The DG calibration
reduces the CT number changes.
1. Preparation:
2. Select DG-CAL; refer to below:
Service Menu → Service Calibration → DG-CAL

5-11 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-4 AIR AND PHANTOM CALIBRATIONS
Precondition
• The bow-tie filter should be installed.
1. Select Service Adjustment from the Service menu.
2. Select Service Calibration from the Service Adjustment.
3. Select Auto Sequence 1 (Air Cal → Phantom Cal) from the Service Calibration menu.
4. Select [Confirm] on the screen to select all the calibration stations.
5. Follow the instructions displayed on the CRT screen.
6. Proceed to the ‘CT Number Adjustment’ procedure.
5-12 SYSTEM
REV 20 2326039
5-5 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT

Perform this <CT Number Adjustment> after completing the air and phantom calibrations.
In addition, if you have any doubt whether the CT numbers of the phantom are good or not, perform the CT Number
Adjustment. This adjustment modifies the CT numbers of the 25 cm and 43 cm CAL files until water has a CT
number equal to zero and air has a CT number equal to -1000.
It takes approximately one hour to complete this adjustment.
Note
The CT# of water will change according to its temperature by a factor of -0.4/°C.
1. Select Service → CT Number Adjustment .
( Select all kV.)
Note
If you do not click on Confirm in the scan confirm screen within 15 minutes, Time- out occures.
3. Verify that the water CT # and air CT # equal 0 ±3 and -1000 ±5 respectively.
Note
The followings are displayed in the result screen.

A: A channel, B: B channel, F: Fused scan(for the system with asymmetric scan option installed only)
Note
For the system with the asymmetric option only, the CT # value displayed is the original one. Note that the updated
data is NOT displayed.
5-13 SYSTEM
5-14 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
SECTION 6 - IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
6-1 GENERAL
This ‘Image Performance Verification’ contains tables of scan techniques and specifications for evaluating image
performance.
Sample Raw Data

The system contains the MOD that includes the images saved before shipment from the manufacturer as sample
data. (The calibration data are also included in the same MOD.)
You can use these images as a reference when you perform image troubleshooting.
To restore the image to the system:
Restore the Patient image to the system. Refer to the Operator manual. (Image Words -> Archive -> Restore -
> Selection -> All examination ->Restore -> Restore examimation ->OK)
After restoring image data, perform Archive -> Detach, then eject the MOD.
General Requirements
Perform the following before continuing:
1. Verify that system calibration (Hilight calibration, air and phantom calibrations, and CT Number Adjustment)
has been completed.
All image performance scans must use calibration data that are less than eight hours old.
2. Warm up the system at least two hours (minimum) prior to data collection.
Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during image performance verification.
Make sure they are clean and contrast-free.
• Water Phantom (25 cm)
• Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (42 cm)
• Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom
6-1 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
6-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE

1. Acquire the scans listed in Table 6-1.
Select ‘Abdomen,’ or any anatomy of interest for ‘Infant.’
The phantoms to be scanned should be centered.
2. For each slice, verify the following:
• Visually check each image for rings, bands, streaks, shadings or artifacts near the image center.
• Position a circular ROI at the locations listed below (see also Illustration 6-1) and write down the data on
Table 6-1.
- Mc-Mean CT number of a center ROI.
- SD-Standard deviation of a center ROI.
- Mo-Mean CT number of a ROI 10 cm off center (Y = 0).
• The following ROI sizes (area) are used to measure ROI data.
FOV ROI AREA

25 cm 674.11 mm2
43 cm 1994.30 mm2
• To display a ROI data;

a.Position a cursor (here, a circle cursor).
b.Press the [ROI] key.
• Verify that the data falls within the specifications shown in Table 6-2 to 6-5.
Note
The CT# of water will change according to its temperature by a factor of -0.4/°C.
High Contrast Spatial Resolution and Artifact Check Using QA (Quality Assurance) Phantom
3. The 1.0 mm pattern (see Illustration 6-2) must be clearly visible by the following techniques:
Table 6-1
Kind of Scan FOV (cm) KV Time (sec) mA THK (mm) Interval (mm)
Axial Head 25 120 2.0 150 10 -
Helical Head 25 120 2.0 150 10 10
Axial Body 43 120 1.5 or 2.0* 130 or 10 -
100*
Helical Body 43 120 1.5 or 2.0* 130 or 10 10
100*
Note: * indicates that the system for ProSpeed EII Only is available.
Check if any artifact is observed on the image or not.
6-2 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
6-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE (CONTINUED)
Illustration 6-1 ROI Locations
+Y ROI Circle
(Area of 674.11 mm2 or 1994.30 mm2)
Image
-X +X
Mc (0.0 cm)
Mo (10.0 cm)
SD (0.0 cm)
-Y
Illustration 6-2 QA Phantom
1.0 mm Pattern
6-3 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
6-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

The 46-241852G1 Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom is used by both the customers and service people to assess
image quality in accordance with BRH requirements (21CFR, Section 1030 33). Use of this phantom is described
in the Operator’s Manual.
The operator’s manual instructs customers to perform QA checks on a daily basis. Service persons, however, shall
perform QA checks after any of the following events has occurred:
• System installation
• X-ray tube replacement
• Detector replacement
• Periodic maintenance.
Note
The service person shall complete all of the procedures in the Operator’s Manual.
6-4 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
6-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE (CONTINUED)
Table 6-2 Image Performance Check (For ProSpeed AII System)
For ProSpeed AII

PTM FOV*1 KV TIME MA THK Mode SPECIFICATION DATA Description
(cm) (sec) (mm) 1i mode 2i mode
A B |Delta SD
MC SD MC SD MC SD (A–B)| ratio MC SD
(A/B)
42 cm PP Large 120 1.5 170 10 2i No Rings/
Bands checked
42 cm PP Large 120 1.5 170 10 1i visually
42 cm PP Large 120 1.5 120 1 2i
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 140 10 2i 0±2 < 5.0 0±2 < 5.0 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 140 10 1i 0±2 < 5.0 -
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 200 7 2i 0±2 < 5.0 0±2 < 5.0 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 120 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 120 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 140 10 2i 0±2 < 5.5 0±2 < 5.5 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 140 10 1i 0±2 < 5.5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 40 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 60 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 80 5 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 100 3 2i 0±2 0±2 5
*1: Large: 43 cm Small: 25 cm
6-5 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
Table 6-2 Image Performance Check (For ProSpeed AII System) (Continued)
For ProSpeed AII

A B |Delta SD
(A–B)| ratio
MC SD MC SD MC SD MC SD
(A/B)
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 100 1 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 40 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 60 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 70 5 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 80 3 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 90 2 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 100 1 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 40 10 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 70 6 1i 0±2

25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 80 4 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 100 2 1i 0±3
25 cm WTR Small 140 1.5 40 10 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 1.5 70 6 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 1.5 80 4 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 1.5 100 2 1i 0±3
6-6 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
Table 6-3 Image Performance Check (For ProSpeed FII System)
For ProSpeed FII

A B |Delta SD
(A–B)| ratio
(A/B)
Bands checked
42 cm PP Large 120 1.5 120 1 2i
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 200 10 2i 0±2 < 5.0 0±2 < 5.0 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 200 10 1i 0±2 < 5.0 -
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 200 7 2i 0±2 < 5.0 0±2 < 5.0 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 160 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 160 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 200 10 2i 0±2 < 5.5 0±2 < 5.5 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 200 10 1i 0±2 < 5.5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 60 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 80 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 100 5 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 120 3 2i 0±2 0±2 5
6-7 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
Table 6-3 Image Performance Check (For ProSpeed FII System) (Continued)
For ProSpeed FII

A B |Delta SD
(A–B)| ratio
(A/B)
25 cm WTR Large 120 1 160 1 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 60 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 80 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 100 5 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 120 3 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 140 2 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1 160 1 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 60 10 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 100 6 1i 0±2

25 cm WTR Large 140 1 120 4 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Large 140 1 160 2 1i 0±3
25 cm WTR Small 140 1 60 10 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 1 100 6 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 1 120 4 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 1 160 2 1i 0±3
6-8 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
Table 6-4 Image Performance Check (For ProSpeed EII System)
For ProSpeed EII

A B |Delta SD
(A–B)| ratio
(A/B)
42 cm PP Large 120 2 120 10 2i No Rings/
Bands checked
42 cm PP Large 120 2 120 10 1i visually
42 cm PP Large 120 2 160 1 2i
25 cm WTR Large 120 2 100 10 2i 0±2 < 5.0 0±2 < 5.0 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Large 120 2 100 10 1i 0±2 < 5.0 -
25 cm WTR Large 120 2 150 7 2i 0±2 < 5.0 0±2 < 5.0 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Large 140 2 80 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 140 2 80 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 100 10 2i 0±2 < 5.5 0±2 < 5.5 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 100 10 1i 0±2 < 5.5
25 cm WTR Large 120 2 30 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 2 40 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 2 50 5 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 2 60 3 2i 0±2 0±2 5
6-9 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
Table 6-4 Image Performance Check (For ProSpeed EII System) (Continued)
For ProSpeed EII

A B |Delta SD
(A–B)| ratio
(A/B)
25 cm WTR Large 120 2 80 1 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 30 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 40 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 50 5 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 60 3 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 70 2 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 2 80 1 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Large 140 2 30 10 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Large 140 2 50 6 1i 0±2

25 cm WTR Large 140 2 60 4 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Large 140 2 80 2 1i 0±3
25 cm WTR Small 140 2 30 10 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 2 50 6 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 2 60 4 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 2 80 2 1i 0±3
6-10 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
Table 6-5 Image Performance Check (For CT/e Dual System)
For CT/e Dual

A B |Delta SD
(A–B)| ratio
(A/B)
Bands checked
42 cm PP Large 120 1.5 120 1 2i
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 140 10 2i 0±2 < 5.0 0±2 < 5.0 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 140 10 1i 0±2 < 5.0 -
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 200 7 2i 0±2 < 5.0 0±2 < 5.0 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 120 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 120 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 140 10 2i 0±2 < 5.5 0±2 < 5.5 5 1 ±0.1
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 140 10 1i 0±2 < 5.5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 40 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 60 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 80 5 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 100 3 2i 0±2 0±2 5
6-11 SYSTEM
REV 13 2326039
Table 6-5 Image Performance Check (For CT/e Dual System) (Continued)
For CT/e Dual

A B |Delta SD
(A–B)| ratio
(A/B)
25 cm WTR Large 120 1.5 100 1 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 40 10 2i 0±2 0±2 5

25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 60 7 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 70 5 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 80 3 2i 0±2 0±2 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 90 2 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Small 120 1.5 100 1 2i 0±3 0±3 5
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 40 10 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 70 6 1i 0±2

25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 80 4 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Large 140 1.5 100 2 1i 0±3
25 cm WTR Small 140 1.5 40 10 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 1.5 70 6 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 1.5 80 4 1i 0±2
25 cm WTR Small 140 1.5 100 2 1i 0±3
6-12 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM LEVEL SAFETY TESTS
WARNING
POTENTIAL FOR SHOCK.
GROUND WIRES WILL HAVE GROUND CURRENT PRESENT WITH POWER “ON”. FOLLOW
APPROPRIATE SAFETY PROCEDURES FOR WORKING WITH AN ENERGIZED SYSTEM.
NOTICE
Follow ALL required safety and PPE procedures customary for your organization, when
working on this product.
7-1 PATIENT TOUCH LEAKAGE TEST

This test should ensure that a patient undergoing a scan cannot touch or otherwise contact any conductive surfaces.
Complete this procedure after the installation of all options.
7-1-1 Personnel Requirements

One (1) Field Engineer for 10 minutes preparation and 20 minutes operation procedure.
7-1-2 Tools and Test Equipment
Item Qty
Standard service tool kit 1
Dale 600/601 Meter (from tool pool)* 1
Dale extended length leads* 1
*: GE Healthcare performed validation of this procedure using the Dale 600/601
meter ONLY. Due to the unique nature of this meter, GE cannot guarantee the
accuracy of this procedure if you use another meter.
7-1-3 Required Conditions

• Only trained service personnel should service the GE Scanner.
• GE Healthcare performed validation of this procedure using the Dale 600/601 meter ONLY. GE cannot
guarantee the accuracy of this procedure if you use another meter.
• You must remove the Table Front Bottom Cover.
7-1 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
7-1-4 Test Conditions

• Test with the Table at maximum elevation and again with the Table at minimum elevation.
• Test to cover ALL points in an envelope described by Table travel from mimimum to maximum extension,
including the Table extender.
• Test from both the head and foot of the Table -- e.g., test assuming that a patient may lie either HEAD-
FIRST or FEET-FIRST.
• Test to ensure that all conductive surfaces are 6 feet (1.9m) below and 7 feet (2.1m) above the Table
surface -- e.g., test assuming that a patient may lie either FACE-DOWN or FACE-UP and can touch or
otherwise contact conductive surfaces both above and below the table.
• Test to ensure that a protective envelope, free of ANY and ALL conductive surfaces, extends at least 6
feet (1.9m) around the patient. Surfaces of concern include:
- I.V poles and tray assemblies
- Smart step monitors and stands
- Table bearing rails, if accessible
- The A1 Disconnect
- The PDU
- All other conductive surfaces
6' (1.9m)
6'
(1
.9
m
)
Cradle (w/extender) Cradle in

fully extended Home position
6'
)
.9m
(1
.9
m
6' (1
7-2 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
7-1-5 Procedure
7-1-5-1 Cover Removal

1. Move the Table to ISO elevation.
2. Remove the Table Front Bottom Cover and the Gantry Left Side Cover.
7-1-5-2 Leakage Current Testing

Refer to the Dale 601 Operator’s Manual for instructions on the use of the Dale 600/601 Meter for measuring leakage
current or refer to Illustration 7-1 for a quick overview.
Illustration 7-1 Using the Dale 600/601 Meter to Measure Leakage Current
7-3 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
7-1-5-2 Leakage Current Testing (Continued)

1. Plug the Dale 600/601 Meter into the outlet on the Gantry left side and confirm that the outlet is wired correctly
by observing the three LED indicators on the meter.
Note
Your meter must display a valid calibration sticker.
2. Connect the meter leads to the meter as follows:
a. Connect one end of the shorter black lead to the chassis plug and the other to the Table ground bus.
b. Connect the red or longer black test lead to the external plug on top of the Dale 600/601 meter.
Note
Some meters include a black lead and a red test lead, while other meters include two black leads.
If your meter includes two black leads, the longer black lead is the test lead.
3. Set the function switch on the Dale Meter to external and test that the meter is operational by touching the ex-
ternal lead to the meter’s test terminal.
4. Keep the shorter black lead connected to the Table base ground bus and connect the red lead or longer black
lead to the devices (components) under test, being sure to:
a. Test with the power ON.
b. Test between the system reference ground point (Table base) and the unit reference ground points.
c. Test all conductive surfaces and components within patient reach - within 6 feet (1.9m) of the Table, and
within 7 feet (2.1m) above the surface of the Table, measuring at Table maximum travels.
Note
At some sites, sinks and wall outlet cover plates may create areas of concern.
d. Test ALL optional components, such as in-room monitors, injectors, overhead monitor suspensions, and
Table options.
NOTICE
Beware of static discharge from the scan window, keypads, display, touch pads, and other
plastic surfaces.
5. Record the results of your tests in Table 7-1, making certain that no leakage current exceeds the following lim-
its:
• Critical care areas (invasive) - 10 μ a
• General care areas - 20 μ a (Use this test criterion)
• Not intended for patient area - 50 μ a
7-4 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
7-1-5 Leakage Current Testing (Continued)
Table 7-1 Test Result List
Gnd Bus to Install < 20 μ A

Any Table ground points within the 6’ range
Any Gantry ground points within the 6’ range
Injector assembly metal surface
Boom-in-Room metal surface
Monitors or metal surface
Sink or metal surface
Installed Table accessories
Other
Other
6. Re-install the Table Front Bottom Cover and the Gantry Left Side Cover.
Procedure Hints
• Items with abnormally high or low measurements could indicate improper wiring, or loose or poor con-
nections due to corrosion, painted surfaces, etc.
• High leakage could indicate a wiring error such as a neutral connected to the ground.
• Fluctuating ground currents could indicate a short, poor connection, or facilities ground.
• Refer to the Illustration below for visual depictions of the required measurements.
Illustration 7-2 Measurement Points
7’
7’
7’
7’
6’
6’
6’
6’
7-5 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
7-2 CT SYSTEM CHASSIS LEAKAGE TEST

Unless required by your state, the CT System Chassis Leakage Test is an optional procedure.
DANGER
POTENTIAL FOR ELECTRIC SHOCK.
SERVICING HARDWARE WITH POWER “ON”.
EQUIPMENT SERVICE CAN ONLY BE PERFORMED SAFETY WITH THE MAIN
POWER “DISCONNECT” TAGGED AND LOCKED OUT.
7-2-1 Personnel Requirements

One (1) Field Engineer for 2 hours operation procedure or one (1) customer electrician for 2 hours operation proce-
dure.
7-2-2 Action List

2 hours labor on site, includes:
• Removal of covers
• Leakage test
• Re-installation of covers
• Recording of site data on the CT System Chassis Leakage Test Form, if required by your state. Forward
the completed form to your Project Manager of Installation.
7-2-3 Tools and Test Equipment
Item Qty
Standard service tool kit 1
Dale 600/601 Leakage Current Meter 1
GEH LOTO Kit 1
*: GE Healthcare performed validation of this procedure using the Dale 600/601
meter ONLY. Due to the unique nature of this meter, GE cannot guarantee the
accuracy of this procedure if you use another meter.
7-6 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
7-2-4 Required Conditions

• Only trained service personnel should service the GE Scanner.
• Servicing hardware with power “On” equipment service can only be performed safely with the main pow-
er “disconnect” Tagged and Locked Out.
• GE Healthcare performed validation of this procedure using the Dale 600/601 meter ONLY. GE cannot
guarantee the accuracy of this procedure if you use another meter.
• You must remove the Table Front Bottom Cover and Gantry Front and Side Covers.
7-2-5 PROCEDURE
NOTICE
Follow LOTO and other safety procedures found in this manual before starting this proce-
dure.
7-2-5-1 Cover Removal

1. Remove the Gantry Front and Side Covers.
2. Remove the Table Front Bottom Cover to gain access to the ground cables and ground bar.
Note
Do NOT disconnect ANY grounds at this time.
7-2-5-2 Electrical Connection Removal

1. Confirm that all system grounds are securely attached to the system ground bus and NOT the Table base.
2. Direct the electrician to remove all external electrical connections made during installation, including:
• Main system ground at PDU
• Power feeder flex connection at PDU
• Room door interlocks and room warning light connections
• Any and all other external ground connections to the system.
3. Confirm the removal of all external gantry, table, console, and PDU connections, and have the electrician do
the same.
Note
Some wires, such as the room warning light, may have external power and wire nuts, which should
be installed to protect from arcing.
4. Replace all covers removed except for the Table Front Bottom Cover.
5. Follow the Lockout/Tagout procedure for re-energizing power and boot to application level. If not already done,
remove the Table Front Bottom Cover while the system boots.
7-7 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
7-2-5-3 System Ground Wire Testing

1. Plug the Dale 600/601 Leakage Current Meter into one of the outlets on the gantry.
2. Connect the meter leads to the meter as follows:
a. Connect one end of the shorter black lead to the chassis plug and the other to he table ground bus.
b. Connect the red or longer black test lead to the external plug on top of the Dale 600/601 meter.
Note
Some meters include a black lead and a red test lead, while other metes include two black leads.
If your meter includes two black leads, the longer black lead is the test lead.
3. Set the function switch on the Dale 600/601 meter to external. Using the red or longer black external lead,
touch the meter’s test terminal to confirm that the meter is operational.
Note
For more information, refer to the Dale 600/601 operator’s Manual or see Illustration 7-1.
4. With the system at application level and all components functional, test the system ground wires as follwos:
• Set up the meter
• Connect the shorter black lead to the system ground bus
• Remove a system ground wire
• Connect the red or longer black lead to the ground wire
• Read the value on the meter
• Replace the system ground wire
• Record the results of your tests in the CT System Chassis Leakage Test Completion Form. (See Illus-
tration 7-3)
• Repeat, testing all system ground wires one-at-a time. The CT System Chassis Leakage Test Comple-
tion Form lists each system ground wire.
NOTICE
The measured leakage current must not exceed 5 mA in any ground wire.
7-8 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
Illustration 7-3 System Ground Chassis Leakage Test Form
GE Healthcare
GE Form - System Ground Chassis Leakage Test

Customer Site Data
Where Installed
City State
Customer's Telephone Number Room No.
System ID # GON #
DVM Serial # Cal Due Date
Leakage Meter Manufacturer Model #
Serial # Cal Due Date
Installer’s Name: Company
This system was tested in accordance with NFPA 99: Standard for Health Care Facilities.
The measured leakage current must not exceed 5 MA in any ground wire.
Table Ground Bus Results Test Date Tester
Gantry ground wire

Table ground wire
PDU ground wire
Console ground wire
Options – If present
Boom in Room ground wire
(other)
(other)
(other)
This system was tested in accordance with NFPA 99 Sections 8.4.1.3.4.1, and 8.4.1.3.4.2:
Standard for Health Care Facilities.
All tests as listed above: Passed Failed
Return to: Project Manager of Installation
7-9 SYSTEM
REV 17 2326039
7-2-5-4 System Power Down

1. After completing all tests, follow the Lockout/Tagout procedure to power down the system.
2. Direct the electrician to reinstall all electrical connections, conduits, cables and wires removed in section 7-2-
5-2 and to secure all connections per NEC code.
3. Check to confirm that all connections are securely tightened.
4. Reinstall all removed system covers, except for the gantry left side cover near the service switch panel.
7-2-5-5 System Power-Up and Test

Note
Be sure to complete this section of the procedure on site.
1. Follow the Lockout/Tagout procedure for re-energizing power.
2. Turn on the gantry service switches and power up the Console.
3. Check that no cables remain in the gantry rotating path.
4. Return cover dollies to storage areas.
5. Check that the table controls and footswitch function properly.
6. Re-test the system by completing a system functional scan. If installed, be sure to test the room warning light
and the door interlock also at this time.
7. Complete the CT System Chassis Leakage Test Completion Form, if required by your state, and forward the
completed form to your Project manager of installation.
7-10 SYSTEM
REV 4 2326039
OPERATOR CONSOLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - OC COMPONENTS (FOR O2 COMPUTER) 1-1

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-3-1 General Procedures for Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-3-2 Adjustment / Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
SECTION 2 - OC OPERATION (FOR O2 COMPUTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 OC POWER-UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-5 MISC TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-6 WORKSTATION DEFAULT TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
SECTION 3 - OC COMPONENTS (FOR LINUX COMPUTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-3-1 General Procedures for Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-3-2 Adjustment / Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
SECTION 4 - OC OPERATION (FOR LINUX COMPUTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 OC POWER-UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-5 MISC TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
i OPERATOR CONSOLE
ii OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 4 2326039
SECTION 1 - OC COMPONENTS (FOR O2 COMPUTER)
1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES

The Operator Console contains three power supplies: +12V, -12V and +5V.
1. Switch OFF the Operator Console.
2. Remove the OC right side cover to access the OC power supplies (see illustration 1-1).
Ground Connection
If this is the first time to check the OC power supplies after system installation, preform this ‘Ground Connection’
check.
3. Check the ground connection of the power supplies as follows (see illustration 1-1):
Note
When you adjust power supply potentiometers, slowly turn them; otherwise, power supply built-in
protector will shut themselves down. If this happens, switch OFF the Operator Console, wait
approximately a few minutes, and switch ON the Console.
a. Connect a digital multimeter between the OC ground stud and ground (FG Ground) on one power supply.
(Multimeter: resistance measure mode)
b. Verify that the resistance reads less than 0.2 ohms. If resistance exceeds the above value, tighten, clean
or re-crimp connections, and measure again.
c. Perform the above check on the other power supplies.
1-1 OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 4 2326039
1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-1 OC DC Power Supplies
OC right side view +12V Power

-12 V Power Supply
Supply
Ground
+5V Power
Supply

REV 4 2326039
Voltage Check
4. Check the output of the +5 VDC power supply as follows:
a. Switch ON the Operator Console
b. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip (J18) on the NPSC assy (Multimeter: voltage measure
mode) (see illustration 1-2).
c. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +5.00 VDC ∼ +5.10 VDC. If it falls outside these limits, adjust
it by turning the potentiometer (see illustration 1-1).
d. Connect an oscilloscope to the dame points as above.
e. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 200mVp-p. If it falls outside this range, replace
the power supply.
a. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip (J19) on the NPSC assy (Multimeter: voltage measure
b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +11.76 VDC ∼ +12.24 VDC. If it falls outside these limits,
adjust it by turning the potentiometer (see illustration 1-1).
c. Connect an oscilloscope to the dame points as above.
d. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 100mVp-p. If it falls outside this range, replace
the power supply.
6. Check the output of the -12 VDC power supply as follows:
b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within -11.76 VDC ∼ -12.24 VDC. If it falls outside these limits,
the power supply.

REV 4 2326039
Illustration 1-2 Measure Point for DC Power Supplies
OC right side view

NPSC Assy
J18 J19 J20

REV 4 2326039
1-2 FANS
1. Turn OFF the OC main power.
2. Remove the following covers:
• OC Front Cover
• Right side Cover
• Rear Cover
3. Using a flashlight, or by feeling for the proper airflow, check that the FAN is operating normally.
If any fan is defective, replace the unit.
Illustration 1-3 OC Fan Locations
FANS FANS FANS
FANS FANS
FRONT REAR
AIR FLOW
OC RIGHT SIDE VIEW
AIR FLOW
AIR FLOW

REV 4 2326039
1-3 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

This section describes how to adjust the monitor. For other adjustments (listed below) without description in this
section, refer to Installation Procedure, Section 1, Monitor Set-Up.
Item Reference Manual

Installation Functional Check / Adjustment
(this manual)
Contrast x
Brightness x
Size & Center x
Geometry x
Color x
Convergence x
Language x
Option x
Help x
1-3-1 General Procedures for Setup

For usage of adjustment menu, refer to Installation, Section 4, Monitor Set-Up.
1-3-2 Adjustment / Selection

You can adjust or select convergence, language, option (degauss, ect...), and help using the method below.
1. Press (menu) button on the front panel of the monitor to display setup menu.
2. Using or button, move the cursor to the item you select.

3. Press the menu button to enter the sub-menu.
4. Using or button, move the cursor to the item to be adjusted.
5. If required, using or button perform adjustment.

REV 5 2326039
SECTION 2 - OC OPERATION (FOR O2 COMPUTER)
WARNING
2-1 OC POWER-UP SEQUENCE

The processor of the Operator Console starts with a power-on self test right after powered on, as follows:
• System disk test
• CD-ROM test
• MOD Driver test
• DASM test
• Raw data disk test
• NPR (Recon board) test
-PCI test, DSP test
• DBPCI board test
-PCI test
• HINV (Hardware Inventory) test

REV 5 2326039
2-1 OC POWER-UP SEQUENCE (CONTINUED)

The test progress information is displayed on the CRT monitor.
After the power-on test completes with no error occurred, the processor loads the OS and application software from
the hard disk into memory and starts the application software.
When no error is found in these processes, the start-up screen will be shown on the CRT monitor.
If error occurs, the power-on test will stop and the test log window appears. You can confirm the problem by
reviewing test log, then select either of the following:
• [H/W diag] : Go to [H/W diag Main Menu]
(Refer to Diagnostics manual.)
Note
Using [H/W diag Main Menu] -> [Offline test] -> [Quick] or [Normal], the detailed power-on test can
be performed.
NOTICE
When the interactive test or off-line test is completed, the system MUST be powered OFF
([Exit] -> [OK]) to avoid accidental X-ray Exposure. That is because system reboot can NOT
activate the system reset line.
• [Startup] : The error is skipped and the power-on sequence proceeds so that the start-up screen will be
shown on the CRT monitor.
Note
When the start-up screen does NOT appear even if using the [Startup] command, the system must
be shutdown using [shutdown] button in the desktop menu.
• [Shutdown] : The system runs the shutdown sequence, resulting in the system powered OFF
automatically.

REV 5 2326039
2-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST

This includes the following main tests:
• Color test
• Display pattern test
1. Select [Service] -> [Diagnostics] -> [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] -> [Interactive Test] -> [Monitor Test].
The monitor test screen appears.
2. To return to [Interactive Test Menu], click on [Back].
Note
To exit from [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] menu, the system must be rebooted so that the [Exit] button
must be used to shut down the system.
Color
3. Click on any color key (RED, GREEN, BLUE, WHITE, or BLACK).
The display color changes in the selected one.
4. Verify that no hole exits on the monitor display.
5. To exit from this test, press the left button of the mouse.
This operation returns to the monitor test screen.
Display Pattern
6. Click on any pattern key (Flat, Horizontal Gradation 1 or 2, or Vertical Gradation 1 or 2).
The display pattern changes in the selected one.
7. Using the test pattern to be displayed, adjust position, size, trapezoid, or parallelogram of the monitor.
(For adjustment, refer to Installation, Wiring and Power-ON.)
Auto Sequence Test

This runs the mixing tests of color and display pattern described above automatically. To go to next test, press the
left button of the mouse.

REV 5 2326039
2-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST

• Input test
• LED ON/OFF/Flash test
• 103 keyboard test
1. Select [Service] -> [Diagnostics] -> [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] -> [Interactive Test] -> [Keyboard Test].
The keyboard test screen appears.
Note
Input Test
This test sends command from the keyboard to the screen (system).
3. Press any key on the keyboard.
4. Verify that the key on the screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.
LED ON/OFF/Flash Test

This test sends command from the screen (system) to the keyboard.
5. Press any button ( [Prescribed Tilt], [Move to Scan], [Stop Move], [Start Scan], [Pause], [X-ray on], [Stop Scan],
[Emergency Stop], or [Talk] ) on the screen.
6. Verify that the key on the keyboard related to the pressed screen key is ON, OFF, or Flashed.
103 Keyboard Test

7. Select [103 Keyboard Test].
The keyboard test screen disappear, then the 103 Keyboard Test screen will appear.
8. Press any button on the keyboard.
9. Verify that the key on the keyboard screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.
10. Click on any place on the 103 keyboard test screen using the left button of the mouse to returns to the keyboard
test screen.
Note
The LEDs for Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock MUST be OFF before exiting from the 103
keyboard test. If it is not, it has significant impact on other tests.

REV 5 2326039
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST

• OC speaker test, including tests for Auto Voice, CD player, X-ray ON, and Alert
• Gantry speaker test, including Auto Voice and CD player
1. Select [Service] -> [Diagnostics] -> [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] -> [Interactive Test] -> [Audio Test].
The Audio test screen appears.
Note
OC Speaker - Auto Voice

3. Click on [Show Player] for Auto Voice.
4. Click on [Audio] . The Input/Output screen appears.
5. Click on [Output] . The audio confidence test screen appears.
6. Click on [OK]. The voice message, “This is audio confidence test. If...” will be heard from the OC speaker.
7. While playing auto voice message, move the L and R volume sliders for Auto voice so that the message will
become loud or faint.
Note
When the [Play Back] button is ON, a sound via the Gantry microphone (patient voice) will NOT be
heard from the OC speaker. This function is one for recording, so that the [Play Back] button MUST
be OFF when exiting from this test if it is performed.
8. Click on [OK] again. The audio confidence test screen disappears.
9. Click on [Exit] to exit from this test.
OC Speaker - CD player
10. Click on [Show Player] for CD (music) player of the OC.
11. Set a music CD into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
12. While playing CD, move the L and R volume sliders for CD so that sound will become loud or faint.

REV 5 2326039
2-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST (CONTINUED)
OC Speaker - X-ray ON Buzzer

13. Click on [ON/OFF] button so that it remains ON. Verify that X-ray ON buzzer continues to sound until the button
is OFF.
14. Move the [Mod] (Modulation) and [Freq] (Frequency) slider for X-ray ON buzzer so that sound varies.
15. Move the L and R volume sliders for the X-ray ON buzzer so that sound will become loud or faint.
16. Click on [ON/OFF] button so that it remains OFF.
OC Speaker - Alert
17. Click on [ON] button once. Verify that alert sounds once.
18. Move the [Width] and [Freq] (Frequency) slider for Alert so that sound varies.
19. Move the L and R volume sliders for Alert so that sound will become loud or faint.
Table Speaker - Auto Voice / CD Player

20. When adjusting the Table speaker for Auto Voice or CD player, use buttons for OC speaker.
Note
When adjusting the speaker volume for Auto Voice, use the volume on the OC keyboard.
Audio Setting Save / Load

When current Audio setting want to be temporarily saved, click on [Save] button. Then modifying setting and clicking
on [Load] returns to the setting before modification.
Note
The file saved will be deleted when shutting down the system since it is a temporary file.

REV 5 2326039
2-5 MISC TEST

This includes the following tests:
• Hardware Inventory
• SCSI test
• View SYSLOG
• NPR LED Test
• Safety Loop test
• Shutdown test
1. Select [Service] -> [Diagnostics] -> [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] -> [Interactive Test] -> [Misc Test].
The Misc test selection window appears.
Note
Hardware Inventory
This program shows the hardware configuration of the Host Computer. This program runs “hinv” command.
Note
When changing the hardware configuration (e.g. Memory addition, Disk change...), always run this
program to check if the system properly recognizes the hardware to be changed.
3. Click on [Hardware Inventory] from the Misc test selection window.
The list of hardware connected to the host computer appear.
4. Click on [Close] to return to the Misc test selection window.

REV 5 2326039
2-5 MISC TEST (CONTINUED)

• Example for Result to be displayed:
******************************* Displayed *******************************.......
..........
.................
.................
Integral SCSI controller 0: Version ADAPTEC 7880
Disk drive: unit 1 on SCSI controller 0
Integral SCSI controller 1: Version ADAPTEC 7880
CDROM: unit 1 on SCSI controller 1
Optical disk: unit 2 on SCSI controller 1
Optical disk: unit 6 on SCSI controller 1
PCI SCSI controller 3: Version ADAPTEC 7880
On-board serial ports: tty1
On-board serial ports: tty2
On-board EPP/ECP parallel port
CRM graphics installed
Integral Ethernet: ec0, version 1
Iris Audio Processor: version A3 revision 0
Video: MVP unit 0 version 1.4
with no AV Card or Camera.
Vice: TRE
PCI card, bus 0, slot 94, Vendor 0x0, Device 0x0
PCI card, bus 0, slot 98, Vendor 0x0, Device 0x0
.................
.................
.................
• If the marked content above is NOT displayed, check the following cable for loose connection or short
circuit:
- Signal cable between CPU board and PCI backplane controller card
- Power cable between NPD J8 and PCI backplane P8/P9
• The unit number of the SCSI device to be displayed MUST be the same number as the device ID.
SCSI Test
This program runs HDD access test, CD-ROM access test, MOD #0 access test, MOD #1 access test, ST-1800
access test, and DASM access test so that their results will be displayed.
Note
SCSI information can be known by the hardware inventory test, but this SCSI test will give you more
detailed information.
Note
For Option Image disk, this SCSI test will be skipped, so that this result is NOT displayed.
5. Click on [SCSI Test] from the Misc test selection window.
The result of their tests appear.

REV 5 2326039
View SYSLOG
This program displays system log information after last reboot.
7. Click on [View SYSLOG] from the Misc test selection window.
The system log information appears.
Note
The system log to be displayed shows only a day’s worth of log after last reboot. When the following
day comes, the log of the day before is saved on “SYSLOG.0” file, then it will be deleted from the
SYSLOG viewing window.
Note
8 day’s worth of log files are being saved as a backup on the directory “/var/adm”. You can see
them using “ls” and “cat” commands. Today’s log is “SYSLOG”. Yesterday’s is “SYSLOG.0”.
NPRM LED Test

This program can check if
9. Remove the front cover of the OC, then remove the Nest cover to access the NPRM board.
10. Click on [NPR LED Test] from the Misc test selection window.
11. Verify that the same number of the LEDs as the setting of the Dip switch S1 are ON.
(The LEDs and dip switch are located at the upper left side of the NPRM board.)
Safety Loop
This program can switch ON or OFF the relay for safety loop of the OC.
13. Click on [Safety Loop] from the Misc test selection window.
14. The message screen appears. Click on [OK] button.
The safety loop relay of the OC is in close position, so that OC safety loop is connected and the selector is ON.
15. Click on [Safety Loop] again to open the safety loop relay of the OC.
NOTICE
Before starting other test, the safety loop MUST return to the default setting. (The OC relay
is OPEN.)

REV 5 2326039
Shutdown
This program shutdown the system.
17. Click on [Shutdown Test] from the Misc test selection window.
The system runs shutdown sequence automatically, then the system is down.
Note
If either of the relay of the front panel or DBPCI board is faulty, the system can NOT shut down.

REV 5 2326039
2-6 WORKSTATION DEFAULT TEST

• Audio
• Monitor
• Mouse
Select [Service] -> [Diagnostics] -> [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] -> [Interactive Test] -> [Workstation Default Test].
The test selection window appears.
Note
Audio Test
Click on audio icon. The same test window as audio function appears. For usage, refer to 2-4 Audio Function Test.
Monitor Test
Click on monitor icon. The monitor pattern list appears. Select any pattern and verify that appropriate pattern can
be shown.
Mouse Test
Click on mouse icon. The mouse image appears on the screen. Press any mouse key to verify that the proper key
on the screen is highlighted.
Move the mouse to verify that the mouse image on the screen moves to the same direction.


REV 4 2326039
SECTION 3 - OC COMPONENTS (FOR LINUX COMPUTER)
3-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES

The Operator Console contains three power supplies: +12V, -12V and +5V.
1. Switch OFF the Operator Console.
2. Remove the OC right side cover to access the OC power supplies (see illustration 3-1).
Ground Connection
If this is the first time to check the OC power supplies after system installation, preform this ‘Ground Connection’
check.
3. Check the ground connection of the power supplies as follows (see illustration 3-1):
Note
When you adjust power supply potentiometers, slowly turn them; otherwise, power supply built-in
protector will shut themselves down. If this happens, switch OFF the Operator Console, wait
approximately a few minutes, and switch ON the Console.
a. Connect a digital multimeter between the OC ground stud and ground (FG Ground) on one power supply.
(Multimeter: resistance measure mode)
b. Verify that the resistance reads less than 0.2 ohms. If resistance exceeds the above value, tighten, clean
or re-crimp connections, and measure again.
c. Perform the above check on the other power supplies.

REV 4 2326039
Illustration 3-1 OC DC Power Supplies
OC Right Side View +12V Power

-12V Power
Supply Supply
Ground
+5V Power
Supply

REV 4 2326039
Voltage Check
The System Disk and the Raw Data Disk are powered by the inbuilt Host PC ATX Power Supply.
a. Switch ON the Operator Console
b. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip (J18) on the NPSC assy (Multimeter: voltage measure
c. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +5.00 VDC ∼ +5.10 VDC. If it falls outside these limits, adjust
it by turning the potentiometer (see illustration 3-1).
d. Connect an oscilloscope to the dame points as above.
e. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 200mVp-p. If it falls outside this range, replace
the power supply.
b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +11.76 VDC ∼ +12.24 VDC. If it falls outside these limits,
the power supply.
6. Check the output of the -12 VDC power supply as follows:
b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within -11.76 VDC ∼ -12.24 VDC. If it falls outside these limits,
the power supply.

REV 4 2326039
Illustration 3-2 Measure Point for DC Power Supplies
OC Right Side View

NPSC Assy
J18 J19 J20

REV 4 2326039
3-2 FANS
1. Turn OFF the OC main power.
2. Remove the following covers:
• OC Front Cover
• Right side Cover
• Rear Cover
3. Using a flashlight, or by feeling for the proper airflow, check that the FAN is operating normally.
If any fan is defective, replace the unit.
Illustration 3-3 OC Fan Locations
FANS FANS FANS
FANS FANS
FRONT REAR
AIR FLOW
OC RIGHT SIDE VIEW
AIR FLOW
AIR FLOW

REV 4 2326039
3-3 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

This section describes how to adjust the monitor. For other adjustments (listed below) without description in this
section, refer to Installation Procedure, Section 1, Monitor Set-Up.
Item Reference Manual

Installation Functional Check / Adjustment
(this manual)
Contrast x
Brightness x
Size & Center x
Geometry x
Color x
Convergence x
Language x
Option x
Help x
3-3-1 General Procedures for Setup

For usage of adjustment menu, refer to Installation, Section 4, Monitor Set-Up.
3-3-2 Adjustment / Selection

You can adjust or select convergence, language, option (degauss, ect...), and help using the method below.
1. Press (menu) button on the front panel of the monitor to display setup menu.
2. Using or button, move the cursor to the item you select.

3. Press the menu button to enter the sub-menu.
4. Using or button, move the cursor to the item to be adjusted.
5. If required, using or button perform adjustment.

REV 5 2326039
SECTION 4 - OC OPERATION (FOR LINUX COMPUTER)
WARNING
4-1 OC POWER-UP SEQUENCE

The processor of the Operator Console starts with a power-on self test right after powered on, as follows:
• System disk test
• CD-ROM test
• MOD Driver test
• Serial Expander Card test
• DASM test
• Raw data disk test
• NPR (Recon board) test
-PCI test, DSP test
• DBPCI board test
-PCI test
• HINV (Hardware Inventory) test

REV 5 2326039
4-1 OC POWER-UP SEQUENCE (CONTINUED)

The test progress information is displayed on the CRT monitor.
After the power-on test completes with no error occurred, the processor loads the OS and application software from
the hard disk into memory and starts the application software.
When no error is found in these processes, the start-up screen will be shown on the CRT monitor.
If error occurs, the power-on test will stop and the test log window appears. You can confirm the problem by
reviewing test log, then select either of the following:
• [H/W diag] : Go to [H/W diag Main Menu]
(Refer to Diagnostics manual.)
Note
Using [H/W diag Main Menu] -> [Offline test] -> [Quick] or [Normal], the detailed power-on test can
be performed.
NOTICE
When the interactive test or off-line test is completed, the system MUST be powered OFF
([Exit] -> [OK]) to avoid accidental X-ray Exposure. That is because system reboot can NOT
activate the system reset line.
• [Startup] : The error is skipped and the power-on sequence proceeds so that the start-up screen will be
shown on the CRT monitor.
Note
When the start-up screen does NOT appear even if using the [Startup] command, the system must
be shutdown using [shutdown] button in the desktop menu.
• [Shutdown] : The system runs the shutdown sequence, resulting in the system powered OFF
automatically.

REV 5 2326039
4-2 MONITOR FUNCTION TEST

• Color test
• Display pattern test
1. Select [Service] -> [Diagnostics] -> [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] -> [Interactive Test] -> [Monitor Test].
The monitor test screen appears.
Note
Color
3. Click on any color key (RED, GREEN, BLUE, WHITE, or BLACK).
The display color changes in the selected one.
4. Verify that no hole exits on the monitor display.
Display Pattern
6. Click on any pattern key (Flat, Horizontal Gradation 1 or 2, or Vertical Gradation 1 or 2), then click on any color
key.
The display pattern changes in the selected one.
7. Adjust position, size, trapezoid, or parallelogram of the monitor.
(For adjustment, refer to Installation, Wiring and Power-ON.)
Auto Sequence Test

This runs the mixing tests of color and display pattern described above automatically. To go to next test, press the
left button of the mouse.

REV 5 2326039
4-3 KEYBOARD FUNCTION TEST

• Input test
• LED ON/OFF/Flash test
• 103 keyboard test
1. Select [Service] -> [Diagnostics] -> [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] -> [Interactive Test] -> [Keyboard Test].
The keyboard test screen appears.
Note
Input Test
This test sends command from the keyboard to the screen (system).
3. Press any key on the keyboard.
4. Verify that the key on the screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.
LED ON/OFF/Flash Test

This test sends command from the screen (system) to the keyboard.
5. Press any button ( [Prescribed Tilt], [Move to Scan], [Stop Move], [Start Scan], [Pause], [X-ray on], [Stop Scan],
[Emergency Stop], or [Talk] ) on the screen.
6. Verify that the key on the keyboard related to the pressed screen key is ON, OFF, or Flashed.
103 Keyboard Test

7. Select [103 Keyboard Test].
The keyboard test screen disappear, then the 103 Keyboard Test screen will appear.
8. Press any button on the keyboard.
9. Verify that the key on the keyboard screen related to the pressed key is highlighted.
10. Click on any place on the 103 keyboard test screen using the left button of the mouse to returns to the keyboard
test screen.
Note
The LEDs for Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock MUST be OFF before exiting from the 103
keyboard test. If it is not, it has significant impact on other tests.

REV 5 2326039
4-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST

• OC speaker test, including tests for Auto Voice, CD player, X-ray ON, and Alert
• Gantry speaker test, including Auto Voice and CD player
1. Select [Service] -> [Diagnostics] -> [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] -> [Interactive Test] -> [Audio Test].
The Audio test screen appears.
Note
OC Speaker - Auto Voice

3. Click on [Show Player] for Auto Voice.
4. Click on [Play]. The voice message, “Breathe in ...” will be heard from the OC speaker.
5. While playing auto voice message, move the L and R volume sliders for Auto voice so that the message will
become loud or faint.
Note
When the [Play Back] button is ON, a sound via the Gantry microphone (patient voice) will NOT be
heard from the OC speaker. This function is one for recording, so that the [Play Back] button MUST
be OFF when exiting from this test if it is performed.
6. Click on [File] -> [Exit] to exit from this test.
OC Speaker - CD player
7. Click on [Show Player] for CD (music) player of the OC.
8. Set a music CD into the CD-ROM drive of the OC.
9. While playing CD, move the L and R volume sliders for CD so that sound will become loud or faint.

REV 5 2326039
4-4 AUDIO FUNCTION TEST (CONTINUED)
OC Speaker - X-ray ON Buzzer

10. Click on [ON/OFF] button so that it remains ON. Verify that X-ray ON buzzer continues to sound until the button
is OFF.
11. Move the [Mod] (Modulation) and [Freq] (Frequency) slider for X-ray ON buzzer so that sound varies.
12. Move the L and R volume sliders for the X-ray ON buzzer so that sound will become loud or faint.
13. Click on [ON/OFF] button so that it remains OFF.
OC Speaker - Alert
14. Click on [ON] button once. Verify that alert sounds once.
15. Move the [Width] and [Freq] (Frequency) slider for Alert so that sound varies.
16. Move the L and R volume sliders for Alert so that sound will become loud or faint.
Gantry Speaker - Auto Voice / CD Player

17. When adjusting the Gantry speaker for Auto Voice or CD player, use buttons for OC speaker.
Note
When adjusting the speaker volume for Auto Voice, use the volume on the OC keyboard.
Audio Setting Save / Load

When current Audio setting want to be temporarily saved, click on [Save] button. Then modifying setting and clicking
on [Load] returns to the setting before modification.
Note
The file saved will be deleted when shutting down the system since it is a temporary file.

REV 5 2326039
4-5 MISC TEST

This includes the following tests:
• Hardware Inventory
• View SYSLOG
• Safety Loop ON/OFF
• Shutdown Test
• SCSI Test
1. Select [Service] -> [Diagnostics] -> [H/W Diag (Shutdown)] -> [Interactive Test] -> [Misc Test].
The Misc test selection window appears.
Note
Hardware Inventory
This program shows the hardware configuration of the Host Computer. This program runs “lhinv” command.
Note
When changing the hardware configuration (e.g. Memory addition, Disk change...), always run this
program to check if the system properly recognizes the hardware to be changed.
3. Click on [Hardware Inventory] from the Misc test selection window.
The list of hardware connected to the host computer appear.

REV 5 2326039

• Example for Result to be displayed:
******************************* Displayed *******************************
00:00.0 Host bridge: Intel Corp. 82845G/GL [Brookdale-G] Chipset Host Bridge (rev
03)
Subsystem: Holco Enterprise Co, Ltd/Shuttle Computer: Unknown device fb50
Control: I/O- Mem+ BusMaster+ SpecCycle- MemWINV- VGASnoop- ParErr-
Stepping- SERR- FastB2B-
Status: Cap+ 66Mhz- UDF- FastB2B+ ParErr- DEVSEL=fast >TAbort- <TAbort-
<MAbort+ >SERR- <PERR-
Latency: 0
Region 0: Memory at d8000000 (32-bit, prefetchable) [size=64M]
Capabilities: <available only to root>
00:01.0 PCI bridge: Intel Corp. 82845G/GL [Brookdale-G] Chipset AGP Bridge (rev
03) (prog-if 00 [Normal decode])
Control: I/O+ Mem+ BusMaster+ SpecCycle- MemWINV- VGASnoop- ParErr- Step-
ping- SERR+ FastB2B-
Status: Cap- 66Mhz+ UDF- FastB2B+ ParErr- DEVSEL=fast >TAbort- <TAbort-
<MAbort- >SERR- <PERR-
Latency: 64
Bus: primary=00, secondary=01, subordinate=01, sec-latency=32
Memory behind bridge: dc000000-ddffffff
Prefetchable memory behind bridge: d0000000-d7ffffff
BridgeCtl: Parity- SERR- NoISA+ VGA+ MAbort- >Reset- FastB2B-
.................
.................
.................
05:07.0 Serial controller: Moxa Technologies Co Ltd Smartio C104H/PCI (rev 02)
(prog-if 80)
Control: I/O+ Mem+ BusMaster- SpecCycle- MemWINV- VGASnoop- ParErr- Step-
ping- SERR- FastB2B-
Status: Cap- 66Mhz- UDF- FastB2B+ ParErr- DEVSEL=medium >TAbort- <TAbort-
<MAbort- >SERR- <PERR-
Interrupt: pin A routed to IRQ 10
Region 1: I/O ports at 9c00 [size=128]
Region 2: I/O ports at a000 [size=64]
Region 3: I/O ports at a400 [size=16]
**************************************
Hardware inventory test (hinv) : PASS
**************************************
*** hinv resault ***
SCSI Test
This program runs MOD #0 access test, MOD #1 access test, and DASM access test so that their results will be
displayed.
Note
SCSI information can be known by the hardware inventory test, but this SCSI test will give you more
detailed information.
Note
For Option Image disk, this SCSI test will be skipped, so that this result is NOT displayed.
5. Click on [SCSI Test] from the Misc test selection window.
The result of their tests appear.

REV 5 2326039
View SYSLOG
This program displays system log information after last reboot.
7. Click on [View SYSLOG] from the Misc test selection window.
The system log information appears.
Note
The system log to be displayed shows only a day’s worth of log after last reboot. When the following
day comes, the log of the day before is saved on “SYSLOG.0” file, then it will be deleted from the
SYSLOG viewing window.
Note
8 day’s worth of log files are being saved as a backup on the directory “/var/log”. You can see them
using “ls” and “cat” commands. The log name is “boot.log”.
Connectivity Test
Safety Loop
This program can switch ON or OFF the relay for safety loop of the OC.
9. Click on [Safety Loop] from the Misc test selection window.
10. The message screen appears. Click on [OK] button.
The safety loop relay of the OC is in close position, so that OC safety loop is connected and the selector is ON.
11. Click on [Safety Loop] again to open the safety loop relay of the OC.
NOTICE
Before starting other test, the safety loop MUST return to the default setting. (The OC relay
is OPEN.)

REV 5 2326039
Shutdown
This program shutdown the system.
13. Click on [Shutdown Test] from the Misc test selection window.
The system runs shutdown sequence automatically, then the system is down.
Note
If either of the relay of the front panel or DBPCI board is faulty, the system can NOT shut down.

REV 13 2326039
GANTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 POWER SUPPLIES ON STATIONARY FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
SECTION 2 - ROTATIONAL MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS . . . . . 2-1
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-5 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-6 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
SECTION 3 - ROTATIONAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 MOVEMENT CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-4 ROTATION SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
SECTION 4 - SLIP RINGS AND BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 CAUTION AND NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-3 SIGNAL AND POWER BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-4 HSDCD SLIP RING CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-4-1 Method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-4-2 Method 2 (Recommend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
SECTION 5 - TILT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 ROTATION CHECK WHILE TILTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 TILT ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-3 TILT SPEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-4 TILT ANGLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-4-1 Tilt Angle Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-4-2 Tilt Angle Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
i GANTRY
REV 13 2326039
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 6 - COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 APERTURE RATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 BOW-TIE FILTER CURVE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-3 APERTURE Z-AXIS BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
SECTION 7 - TABLE AND GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 TABLE POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-2-1 Halogen Positioning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-3-1 Table Up, Down, Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-3-2 Table In, Out, Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-3-3 Move to Scan, Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-3-4 Tilt Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-3-5 POSN Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-3-6 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-4 TABLE AND GANTRY INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
ii GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
SECTION 1 - DC POWER SUPPLIES
1-1 POWER SUPPLIES ON STATIONARY FRAME

Understand and follow the Safety Guidelines Manual.
1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the front and left side covers.
3. Check DC power supply voltages on the TGP Board and SUB board, according to Table 1-1 by referring to
illustration 1-1. Adjust the Power Supplies PS1 and PS2 if necessary.
Illustration 1-1 Stationary Gantry Voltage Adjustment

Adjusting
Potentiometer GANTRY LEFT SIDE
TP1
TP2
PS2 SUB BOARD
TP5
PS1 TP4
PS1/PS2
TGP BOARD TP6
TP7
TP2
Table 1-1 Power Supply Specifications
DC Measuring Points SPECIFICATION

VOLTAGE
Board (High) (Low)
+5 V TGP TP4(+5V) TP5(+DGND) 5V ± 0.1V (check/adjustment)
+24 V SUB TP1(GNT24V) TP2(COM) 24.0V ± 0.5V (check/adjustment)
+24 V TGP TP2(+24V) TP5(+DGND) 24 V ± 0.6 V (checking only)
+15 V TGP TP6(+15V) TP5(+DGND) +15 V ± 0.9 V (checking only)
-15V TGP TP7(-15V) TP5(+DGND) -15 V ± 0.9 V (checking only)
1-1 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME

1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the front and right side Gantry covers.
3. Switch ON the Service Switch, then Rotate the Gantry to approximately 190° tube position.
4. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
5. Remove the Power Supply PS L Cover by unscrewing four nuts. (Refer to illustration 1-2)
6. Disconnect the OGP, DTRF and RF power cables connectors.
7. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
8. Measure and adjust if necessary, the potentiometers of the Power Supply according to the table 1-1. The
potentiometer positions is shown in the illustration 1-2.
Illustration 1-2 Power Supply PS L Voltage Adjustment
PS1
PS7
PS2
PS6
PS3
PS5
PS4
PS4
PS5
PS3
PS6
PS2
PS7
PS1
RED GRY YEL
1 4 7
WHT 2 5 8 BLK
3 6 9 ORG
GRN Nut
BLU
DAS POWER CABLE CONNECTOR
Note: The denominations PS1 ∼ PS7 are only for reference in this procedure. They do not
correspond to the part name in Renewal Parts.
1-2 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
1-2 POWER SUPPLIES ON ROTATIVE FRAME (CONTINUED)
Power Supply Measuring Point Pins Voltage Range
PS1 DAS Power Cable Connector 7&8 5.1 ∼ 5.2V
PS3 DAS Power Cable Connector 3&4 -12.4 ∼ -12.3V
PS5 Temp Cont Power Cable Connector 1&2 24.0 ∼ 24.2V
DAS Fan Power Cable Connector 1&2 24.0 ∼ 24.2V
OGP DTRF Power Cable (3 or 5) & (4 or 6) 24.0 ∼ 24.2V
PS6 OGP DTRF Power Cable (1 or 7) & (2 or 8) 5.0 ∼ 5.1V
PS7 RF Power Cable Connector 1&2 14.35 ∼ 15.85V
1-3 GANTRY
1-4 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
SECTION 2 - ROTATIONAL MECHANISM
2-1 CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTATIONAL AND STATIONARY COMPONENTS
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD!
WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON AND SMALL BUTTON),
THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE -14 DEG. POSITION. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO
PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH OFF THE
‘ROTATE’ SWITCH FIRST.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring’ switches at the Gantry rear Base.
b. Remove the front, right side, and left side covers of the Gantry.
c. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
2. Verify that the clearance between each rotating component part and all fixed parts is more than 10mm, while
rotating the Gantry in the CW direction by hand.
3. Check to make sure that the cables does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
Illustration 2-1 Clearance between Rotational and Stationary Components
more than 10mm

more than 10mm
more than 10mm
more than 7mm
more than 10mm
2-1 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE
Special Equipment
• Spring Balance (Fish Scale)
WARNING
MECHANICAL HAZARD!
FAILURE TO HOLD THE GANTRY USING THE AZIMUTH LOCK PIN PRIOR TO REMOVING
COMPONENTS MAY LEAD TO GANTRY MOTION WHICH CAN STRIKE A PERSON CAUSING
INJURY OR DEATH.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power’ and ‘Slip Ring’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the front, right side, and left side covers of the Gantry.
Illustration 2-2 Gantry Balance Weight Locations
Main Weight (0.5kg)

Install them from the front side.
Side Weight
(0.5kg)
DAS Assy
2-2 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE (CONTINUED)

2. Perform the rough weight balance check/adjustment by observing the free movement:
a. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
b. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight (under the DAS Assy) reaches the 6 o’clock position.
c. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, increase the side weight by 1 kg (0.5kg x 2).
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, decrease the side weight by 1 kg (0.5kg x 2).
d. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.
e. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight reaches the 6 o’clock position.
f. Verify that the Gantry does not rotate on its own, due to unbalance.
If the Gantry rotates in the CW direction, decrease the main weight by 1 kg (0.5kg x 2).
If the Gantry rotates in the CCW direction, increase the main weight by 1 kg (0.5kg x 2).
g. Repeat above step until the Gantry is balanced.
Illustration 2-3 Rough Weight Balance
CCW CW CCW CW
Main Weight
Side Weight
Main Weight
Side Weight
2-3 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-2 ROTATION BALANCE (CONTINUED)

3. Perform the fine weight balance check/adjustment using a spring balance:
a. Rotate the Gantry until the main weight reaches the 12 o’clock position.
b. Measure the force (F1 and F2) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring
balance.
If the value ( F2-F1 ) is positive, decrease the weight in the Side Weight.
If the value is negative, increase the weight in the Side Weight.
c. Rotate the Gantry until the side weight reaches the 6 o’clock position.
d. Measure the force (F3 and F4) required to initiate Gantry rotation by pulling the Gantry with a spring
balance.
If the value ( F4-F3 ) is positive, decrease the weight in the Main Weight.
If the value is negative, increase the weight in the Main Weight.
4. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
Illustration 2-4 Gantry Static Balance Force Measurements
F2
F3
Use the stud bolt

F1 for adjustment.
F4
Side Weight Main Weight
| F2–F1 | Balance Weight(s) | F4–F3 | Balance Weight(s)

0.0 0.4 – – 0.0 0.5 – –
0.6 1.2 1 pcs. (0.5kg) 0.6 1.6 1 pcs. (0.5kg)
1.4 2.2 2 pcs. (1.0kg) 1.8 2.6 2 pcs. (1.0kg)
2.4 3.0 3 pcs. (1.5Kg) 2.8 3.8 3 pcs. (1.5Kg)
3.2 3.8 4 pcs. (2.0Kg) 4.0 4.8 4 pcs. (2.0Kg)
2-4 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Gantry rear and left maintenance covers.
c. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
d. Push the Emergency Reset switch on the TGP board.
2. Rotate the Gantry in the CW direction by hand until LED on the G. Pulse1 sensor turn OFF (on the stationary
rear side). Refer to illustration 2-5.
3. Measure the angle of the collimator plate. Verify that the angle is -1.0 ±0.5 deg.
4. Switch OFF the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
Illustration 2-5 G. Pulse Photo Sensor Location
Photo Sensor
Plate (G. Pulse 1) - Stationary Side LED
Photo Sensor Plate

(G. Pulse 2) - Rotational Side
TGP BOARD
Emergency Reset RESET
(EMRG RESET)
TEST1
TEST2
2-5 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-3 G. PULSE POSITION (CONTINUED)
Illustration 2-6 Photo Sensor & Plate Position
(SIDE VIEW)
Photo Sensor
Plate
6mm + 0.5mm
(TOP OR BOTTOM VIEW)

Photo Sensor
Plate (G. Pulse 1)
(Stationary) (Stationary)
-1 deg. Gantry Position Plate
Photo Sensor (Rotational)
H
(G. Pulse 2) A
(Rotational)
A = H/2 + 1.5mm
Plate Photo Sensor

Plate (G. Pulse 1)
(Stationary) (Rotational)
(Stationary)
0 deg. Gantry Position
A = H/2 + 1.5mm
H
A
Photo Sensor
(G. Pulse 2)
(Rotational)
2-6 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘ and ‘XG Power‘ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
2. Remove the Axial Motor Pulley cover by unscrewing its 8 screws.
3. Adjust the adjusting bolt:
a. Loosen the three mounting plate bolts.
b. Loosen the set nut, and then rotate the adjusting bolt in the CCW direction until the distance D (between
part A and part B) is approximately 2 ∼ 3mm.
NOTICE
Over tension. After part A and part B are just touching, do not rotate the adjusting bolt;
otherwise, this will cause over tension and will shorten the life of the axial drive belt.
c. Turn the adjusting bolt in the CW direction until part A and part B are just touching.
d. Tighten the set nut.
e. Tighten the three mounting plate bolts.
4. Install the Axial Motor Pulley cover.
2-7 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-4 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION (CONTINUED)
Illustration 2-7 Belt Tension Adjuster
GANTRY REAR VIEW

A
Set Nut
D
Spring
Adjusting Bolt
Axial
Belt
Mounting
Plate Bolts
Mounting Plate
Axial Motor Pulley
2-8 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-5 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION
Special Equipment
• Alignment Tool
NOTICE
HSDCD Receiver and Antenna are static sensitives. Before touching the components, attach
the wrist strap to your wrist and to the metal part of the chassis.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘, ‘XG Power‘ and ‘Slip Ring‘ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Gantry rear and left maintenance covers.
2. Remove the HSDCD Receiver Cover.
3. Remove the Slip Ring Covers.
4. Disconnect the RF cables.
5. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
6. Install the dial gauge onto HSDCD Slip Ring PCB surface, using the attachment tool (see illustration 2-17).
7. Rotate the Gantry by hand and find the average of radial eccentric position of the slip ring:
a. Find the Innermost and Outermost point;
b. Calculate the average between both;
c. Rotate the Gantry so that the obtained average value stay positioned underneath the HSDCD
Receiver Assy position.
d. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
Illustration 2-8 HSDCD Receiver Assy and its supports

HSDCD Support 1
HSDCD Support 2
HSDCD Receiver
HSDCD Antenna
HSDCD Support 4
2-9 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-5 HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY POSITION (CONTINUED)

8. Screw temporarily but not tighten the three screws (with washers) of HSDCD Antenna that holds the HSDCD
Support 1. (Illustration 2-9).
Illustration 2-9 HSDCD Receiver Assy position adjustment
Screw and
washer (x3)
screw in the middle of hole
HSDCD HSDCD
Antenna Support 1
PCB
Slip Ring
9. Insert the thickness gauge provided in the Alignment Tool between the HSDCD Antenna and Slip Ring.
Illustration 2-10 Special thickness gauge
Screws (x2)
HSDCD
Receiver
Keep the HSDCD

HSDCD Antenna always in
Antenna contact with the
thickness gauge.
2-10 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039

10. Tighten the two screws of HSDCD Support 2 on the Mounting Plate keeping the HSDCD Receiver in contact
with thickness gauge. (Illustration 2-11).
Illustration 2-11 HSDCD Receiver Assy on the mounting plate
Screws (x2)
11. Tighten the two screws A of HSDCD Support 2. These screws keep the HSDCD Antenna in parallel with Slip
Ring’s PCB. (Illustration 2-12).
Illustration 2-12 Screws for positioning adjustment
A (both side)
HSDCD Support 1 HSDCD
B Support 2
C
(both side)
2-11 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039

12. Remove the thickness gauge.
13. Adjust the HSDCD Antenna position along the antenna of Slip Ring so that the tolerance between the center
lines does not exceed 0.4 mm. (Illustration 2-13).
14. Loosen but not remove the three screws B (Illustration 2-12) to allow fine horizontal adjustment.
15. Adjust with screws C (Illustration 2-13) for fine horizontal adjustment. Use the magnifying glass included in the
Alignment Tool to make the adjustment.
16. Tighten the three screws B of HSDCD Support 1. (Illustration 2-12).
(approx. 0.4 mm) (approx. 0.4 mm)
Slip Ring C screw (x2)

HSDCD HSDCD HSDCD
PCB Antenna PCB Antenna PCB Antenna Antenna
Antenna Antenna
OK OK Not allowed
Readjustment
required
2-12 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
MEASUREMENT CHECK
Special Equipment
Prepare the following measurement tools:
• Shim (Alignment Tool)
• Master Gauge (Alignment Tool)
• Magnifying glass
a. Prepare a 4.3mm shim and insert/remove few times in the 4.5mm Master Gauge. The objective of this
procedure is to obtain a better accuracy by familiarizing yourself the clearance of a determined thickness.
Illustration 2-14 Master Gauge
Master Gauge
Master Gauge
4.3mm shim
2-13 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039

b. Prepare a 1.0mm shim and certify that might be inserted between the HSDCD Antenna and Slip Ring in four
places indicated in the Illustration 2-15.
c. Prepare a 1.8mm shim and certify that might not be inserted between the HSDCD Antenna and Slip Ring
in four places.
d. If at least one of condition b. and c. does not agree, proceed againg the HSDCD Receiver Assy Position
from the step 10. Otherwise proceed the next step.
Check the clearance here
PCB
HSDCD
Antenna
17. Lock the screws C with ìLocktiteî.
2-14 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039

18. Reconnect the RF cables to its original configuration. Place them close by HSDCD Antenna to avoid
interference between HSDCD Receiver Cover and these cables.
Illustration 2-16 RF Cables must be placed close by HSDCD Antenna
RF Cables
HSDCD
Antenna
19. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board near the TGP board.
20. Rotate the Gantry manually to perform the following checks:
Check to make sure that the HSDCD Antenna does not touch the Slip Ring during its revolution.
Check to make sure that the cables does not catch on any stationary components during each revolution.
Check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more than one complete rotation.
21. Perform the Gantry rotation using TGP service switches and verify if the movement is smooth.
22. Restore the HSDCD Receiver cover original configuration.
23. Perform following adjustment and check according to the CD-ROM manual, Functional Check & Adjustment,
DAS/DETECTOR.
DATA TRANSFER CHECK
24. Install the rear, right side, and left maintenance covers.
25. Switch ON the ‘Rotate‘, ‘XG Power‘, ‘Slip Ring115V‘ and ‘Table Tilt‘ switches at the Gantry rear base.
27. END
2-15 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-6 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION
Special Equipment
• Gloves
• Vacuum Cleaner
• Attachment Tool
• Plastic Hammer
CAUTION
When servicing the Slip Rings and Brushes, wait approximately five minutes after switching
OFF the CB1 in the PDU for all capacitors in the XG Unit to discharge.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when working with slip ring components to avoid contact, inhalation, and
ingestion of slip ring brush powder.
Gloves : Large size : 46-194427P400, X-Large size : 46-194427P401

HEPA Vacuum Cleaner : 46-297933P1 to remove brush block powder (dust).
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can
contaminate the ring.
NOTICE
Do not touch the slip ring surfaces. Do not touch the brush surfaces either.
Do not handle the slip ring surfaces and brushes without GLOVES.
2-16 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
2-6 SLIP RING RADIAL POSITION (CONTINUED)

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the PDU front cover by unscrewing its 2 screws.
b. Switch OFF the CB1 and CB5 breakers in the PDU.
c. Switch OFF the “Rotate” switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the Gantry rear, right side and left maintenance covers.
e. Remove the following components from the Gantry: (Refer to Component Replacement Manual, Gantry,
Gantry Rotational, Slip Ring Assy)
• Magnet Bracket (Bottom) 2 Screws

• Brush Block Assy 4 Screws
• All Slip Ring Cover
• HSDCD Receiver Assy for HSDCD Slip Ring
• 4 Cable Protect Cover
2. Install the dial gauge onto slip ring groove or PCB surface, using the attachment tool (see illustration 2-17).
3. Check the radial position of the slip ring:
a. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board.
b. Check that the rotation center of the slip ring is not out of the Gantry rotation center, while rotating the Gantry
in the CCW direction by hand
for HSDCD Slip Ring: less than 0.7mm, ignore the PCB TERMINATION GAP on the PCB surface.
If the radial position of slip ring is out of specification, perform step 4.
If the position is within the specification, go to step 7.
Illustration 2-17 Dial Gauge Attachment
Attachment Tool
For RF Dial Gauge
Slip Ring
Slip Ring Groove
For HSDCD
Slip Ring Dial Gauge
PCB surface
2-17 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039

4. Adjust the radial position of the slip ring:
a. Rotate the Gantry by hand until a slip ring support frame is accessible.
b. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts that fasten the slip ring assy to the support frame.
c. Rotate the Gantry by hand until another support frame is accessible.
d. Loosen the mounting blots, and repeat the procedure to loosen a total of 24 mounting bolts.
e. Tighten the 6 mounting bolts (Torque: 0.98Nm/10kg.cm) shown in illustration 2-18.
Illustration 2-18 Slip Ring Support Frame and Mounting Bolts
Alignment Groove Pin(*1)
(*2)
Slip Ring (*2)
Support Frame
Tighten 6 Mounting
Pin (*1) Bolts (Torque:
0.98Nm/10kg.cm)
Mounting Bolts
Slip Ring Assy Pin (*1)

(*2)
Slip Ring Assy
Bolts
(*1): Pin behind Support Frame

(*2): Support Frame without Pin
2-18 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039

f. Rotate the Gantry by hand and stop when the rod of the dial gauge retracts most (see illustration 2-19).
g. Shift the slip ring assy in the a-a’ direction using the plastic hammer while checking the slip ring movement
with the dial gauge.
NOTICE
Hammer the inner circumference part of the slip ring assy only. Do not hit other parts.
If the slip ring assy does not move, perform the following until the slip ring can be moved by hammering:
i. Loosen the 6 mounting bolts tightened in step e, and tighten them again. (Torque: decrease by
1kg.cm).
h. Repeat steps f and g, until the slip ring assy is positioned at the Gantry rotation center.
for HSDCD Slip Ring: less than 0.7mm, ignore the PCB TERMINATION GAP.
Note
If the position of the slip ring assy does not meet the specification, loosen the 2(x3) bolts fastening
support frame (without Pin) to Gantry rotational frame, and perform step h, then tighten the 6 (2x3)
bolts (Torque: 6N.m) (see illustration 2-18).
Illustration 2-19 Slip Ring Positioning
Dial Gauge Outer

Circumference
Rod
a
a’
Correct Radial Position

of the Slip Ring Slip Ring Assy
Inner Circumference
2-19 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039

5. Tighten the 6 mounting bolts (Torque: 6N.m) in the order shown in illustration 2-20 ( 1 ∼ 6 ).
6. Tighten the rest mounting bolts (Torque: 6N.m) in the cross order shown in illustration 2-20 ( 1 ∼ 6 ).
7. Install the following components:
• Magnet Bracket (Bottom)

• Brush Block Assy
• All Slip Ring Cover
• HSDCD Receiver Assy for HSDCD Slip Ring (Refer to Section 2-5. HSDCD RECEIVER ASSY
POSITION)
• 4 Cable Protect Cover
8. Restore the Gantry and the PDU to original configuration.
9. END
Illustration 2-20 Mounting Bolts Tightening
Pin
1 (behind Support Frame)
Pin
(behind Support Frame)
1 4
6 3
6 2
4 5
3 5
2 Pin
(behind Support Frame)
2-20 GANTRY
REV 7 2326039
SECTION 3 - ROTATIONAL OPERATION
3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF all the switches at the Gantry rear base.
(‘Rotate’, ‘XG Power(Safety Loop)’, ‘Table/Tilt’, and ‘Slip Ring 115V’)
b. Remove the front and left side covers from the Gantry.
c. Set the safety bracket located on the right side of the Gantry.
2. Verify the following settings:
• Service Switch of the SUB Board is OFF.
• Azimuth Lock pin is released.
3. Set the service switches of the TGP Board as follows;
ABT/SVE/FIX:FIX
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0:SPD0
FAST/MID/SLOW:SLOW
CONT/HOME/90°:HOME
SYS/OFF/MNL:MNL
3-1 GANTRY
REV 7 2326039
3-1 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT (CONTINUED)
CAUTION
Gantry may experience sudden high speed rotation due to order from the OC. Be very
careful; stand clear of the rotating Gantry.
4. Check that the Gantry Initialize Sequence is normally performed.

a. Be ready to hit the Emergency OFF switch in case of any rotational problems, and then, switch ON the
Gantry switches in the following sequence:
‘Slip Ring‘ --> ‘Rotate‘ --> ‘Table/Tilt‘
(Do NOT switch ON the ‘XG (Safety Loop)’ switch)

Note
The Gantry rotation alarm sounds indicate that Gantry rotation is enabled.
The Gantry starts rotating at 15 sec/Rot and stops at the Home position after one rotation (during which
Gantry Initialize Sequence is performed). The Gantry Display shows the Test Sequence pattern. See
Illustration 3-1.
During the Gantry Initialize Sequence, if the Gantry can not rotate (ex. TGP service switch (SYS/OFF/MNL)
is set to OFF), LEDs ‘ERRG’ and ‘LOOPG‘ are lit on alternately on the TGP Board. (Waiting for Gantry
rotation) To release this status, push the reset button, after setting the service switches properly.
5. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.
6. Set the TGP service switch ABT/SVE/FIX to SVE.
3-2 GANTRY
2326039
GANTRY
FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
Management
Table Processor Processor
DISP B'd Disp
SW B'd B'd LG B'd
Position Tilt
Disp4 Disp1 Disp0 Disp2 Disp3 DS DS DS DS DP DS Disp5 Disp7 DS DS Disp6 DS DS DS
Inter Pos Hit PS PI 1 2 3 4 5 TS TI 6 7 DP 8 EXLM FWD BWD Xon 1 2 F S
Lock
0
1
2
3
3-3
4
GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT (CONTINUED)
Gantry Initialize Display
5
6
7
8 ( )
Illustration 3-1
9
GE HEALTHCARE
10
REV 7
11
3-1
REV 7 2326039
3-2 MOVEMENT CHECK

1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the front, right side, and left side covers from the Gantry.
c. Set the safety switch bracket on the right side of the Gantry.
d. Switch ON the ‘Rotate‘ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Set the TGP service switches as described below:
SYS/OFF/MNL: : MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 : SPD0
FAST/MID/SLOW : SLOW
CONT/HOME/90° : HOME
3. Check the Gantry rotation movement by setting all the possible speeds:
a. Set the CONT/HOME/90° switch to CONT from HOME. Gantry will start the rotation.
Verify that the Gantry rotates smoothly, and that there is no abnormal noise, while the Gantry rotates for
more than one rotation.
b. Set the CONT/HOME/90° switch to HOME from CONT. Gantry will stop the rotation.
c. Do the same check above for each of the following settings.
TGP SERVICE SWITCH

SYS/OFF/MNL ABT/SVE/FIX SPD2/SPD1/ FAST/MID/ CONT/HOME/
SPD0 SLOW 90°
MNL FIX SPD0 SLOW CONT/HOME
MNL FIX SPD0 MID CONT/HOME
MNL FIX SPD0 FAST CONT/HOME
4. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

Set the TGP service switch ABT/SVE/FIX to SVE.
3-4 GANTRY
REV 7 2326039
3-3 ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET

1. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
2. Switch ON the ‘Rotate‘ and ‘Table/Tilt‘ switches at the Gantry rear base.
(Switch OFF the ‘XG Power(Safety Loop)‘, and ‘Slip Ring 115V‘)
3. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (switch S2 : location 7S) to ON on the TGP Board.
4. Push the TEST1 switch to enter TGP off-line function #400 (Gantry azimuth position display mode).
5. Set the TGP service switches as described below (xxx means any position):
ABT/SVE/FIX : SVE
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0 : xxx
FAST/MID/SLOW : xxx
CONT/HOME/90° : CONT
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
6. Verify that the seven segment display of the Servo Amp shows ‘0‘ (Servo ON).
7. Push TEST2 switch on the TGP.
A decimal point of the Position Display and Position Display ‘↔‘ LED start to blink.
8. Wait until blinking stops.
9. Measure the time from the first change to next change on Gantry Position display. If it is less than 4 seconds,
go to step 7. Otherwise proceed to next step.
10. If CHANGE LED on the TGP lit on, press the FAST and the RANGE keys simultaneously on the gantry switch
panel to store the new adjustment data.
Check that the CHANGE LED turns off.

3-5 GANTRY
REV 7 2326039
3-4 ROTATION SPEED

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the Gantry left side cover.
b. Switch ON the ‘Rotate‘, ‘Table/Tilt‘ and ‘Slip Ring 115V‘í switches at the Gantry rear base.
(Switch OFF the ‘XG Power‘.)
2. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to OFF.
3. Enter the TGP off-line function #401 (Gantry rotation speed display mode), by following step:
a. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (switch S2 : location 7S) to ON on the TGP Board.
b. The Gantry Display panel displays a test number ‘400‘.
c. Press the TEST1 switch once on the TGP Board. The Gantry Display will change from ‘400‘ to ‘401‘.
4. Rotate the Gantry at a specified speed and check/adjust the Gantry rotation speed displayed on the Gantry
Display:
a. Set the TGP service switches as follows to rotate the Gantry (1.0 sec/Rot).
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
b. After Gantry rotation is stabilized (a few rotations are required), push TEST2 switch on the TGP Board:
A decimal point of the Position Display and Position Display ‘↔‘ LED start to blink.
When the system completes velocity gain adjustment, blinking stops.
c. Check if the rotation time shown in the Position Display shows a value 1000 ±5.
If not, return to step 4-b.
5. If CHANGE LED on the TGP Board lit on, press the FAST and the RANGE keys simultaneously on the gantry
switch panel to store the new adjustment data.
Check that the CHANGE LED turns off.
3-6 GANTRY
REV 7 2326039
3-4 ROTATION SPEED (CONTINUED)

6. Perform the same check for the following Gantry rotation speeds, by repeating steps 3b, 3c, and 4, for each
gantry rotation speed.
Table 3-1 Gantry Rotation Speed
TGP SERVICE SWITCH SPEED GANTRY DISPLAY VALUE

(Speed Specification)
MNL/SPD0/FAST/CONT/FIX 5.0 sec/Rot 5000 ± 100
MNL/SPD1/SLOW/CONT/FIX 3.0 sec/Rot 3000 ± 60
MNL/SPD1/MID/CONT/FIX 2.0 sec/Rot 2000 ± 40
MNL/SPD1/FAST/CONT/FIX 1.5 sec/Rot 1500 ± 30
MNL/SPD2/SLOW/CONT/FIX 1.0 sec/Rot 1000 ± 20
7. Set the TGP service switches as follows, when completed all of above check/adjustment procedure.
ABT/SVE/FIX : SVE
CONT/HOME/90° : HOME
SYS/OFF/MNL : SYS
8. Set the G6 Gantry dip switch (switch S2 : location 7S) to OFF on the TGP Board.
9. Press the RESET switch on the TGP Board.
3-7 GANTRY
3-8 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
SECTION 4 - SLIP RINGS AND BRUSHES
4-1 CAUTION AND NOTICE
CAUTION
When servicing the Slip Rings and Brushes, wait approximately five minutes after switching
OFF the CB1 in the PDU for all capacitors in the XG Unit to discharge.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when working with slip ring components to avoid contact, inhalation, and
ingestion of slip ring brush powder.
Gloves : Large size : 46-194427P400, X-Large size : 46-194427P401
HEPA Vacuum Cleaner : 46-297933P1 to remove brush block powder (dust).
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can
contaminate the ring.
NOTICE
Do not handle the slip ring surfaces and brushes without GLOVES.
GANTRY REAR VIEW HSDCD SLIPRING
Power
Slip
Rings Power
Cables
Brush
Block
Assy
Power
Brushes
CN1
Signal
Brushes
4-1 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT
Special Equipment
• Ring Service Tool (2206131)
This includes a test battery source. The output voltage should be 6 V or more; otherwise replace the dry
batteries with new ones.
• Oscilloscope
• Maintenance Connector
Overview
The following procedure checks if the contact (conductivity) between signal brushes and slip rings is proper. The
conductivity is examined by injecting a DC current and observing the current flow in the circuit by the oscilloscope
while rotating the slip ring, as outlined in Illustration 4-1.
Ten signal slip rings are equipped on the slip ring frame:
7 & 8: for DAS Trigger signal
9 & 10: for TGP → OGP Com. Data
11 & 12: for OGP → TGP Com. Data
The contact check will be performed for each of these three sets of rings.
Illustration 4-1 Connection Diagram

Signal Brushes
Signal Board
7 & 8, or
9 & 10, or
11 & 12
6 VDC 120ohm
120 W
Oscilloscope
Short Circuit in
Slip Ring Frame
4-2 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-2 SIGNAL BRUSH CONTACT (CONTINUED)

1. Preparation:
c. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the Gantry rear, right side and left maintenance covers.
e. Set the safety switch brackets located on the right side of the Gantry.
2. Short-circuit the slip rings:
The following will short-circuit Rings 7 & 8, 9 & 10, and 11 & 12, all at once.
a. Disconnect the signal cable connector from the Signal Interface Board.
b. Connect the maintenance connector to the Signal Interface Board.
Illustration 4-2 Connection Exchange
Signal Cable Connector
Signal Interface Board
Slip Ring
4-3 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039

3. Set the Signal Brush Board for current flow check:
a. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 from the signal brush board.
b. Connect the oscilloscope probes and 6 VDC power wires to the Signal Brush Board as shown in illustration
4-3 (for Rings 7 & 8). (Use a digital storage type oscilloscope; envelope mode)
Illustration 4-3 Signal Brush Board Wire Connection - HSDCD Brush Block
Signal Brush Board
Oscilloscope
Test Buttery Source

6 VDC
CN1
11 9 7
Resistor
12 10 8 120W
120ohm
4-4 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
NOTICE
Check to make sure the removed cables does not catch on the any stationary components
during each revolution.
4. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch at the rear of the Gantry.
5. Rotate the Gantry and observe the current flow (voltage across a register) on oscilloscope:
a. Set the TGP Service Switches as follows to rotate the Gantry (0.7 sec/Rot).
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
FAST/MID/SLOW : FAST
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
b. Verify that there are no voltage drops grater than 0.5 V or voltage fluctuations.
c. Set the CONT/HOME/90° Service Switch to ‘HOME‘.
6. Repeat the above check for the other slip rings and brushes (for Rings 9 & 10 and 11 & 12) (see illustration 4-3).
7. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘ switch.
8. Restore the Signal Brush Board and Slip Ring to original configuration.
a. Remove the oscilloscope probes and power supply wires.
b. Connect the cable connector CN1 to the Signal Brush Board.
c. Disconnect the maintenance connector from the Signal Interface Board, and connect the signal cable to it.
9. Set the TGP Service Switches to original configuration.
4-5 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-3 SIGNAL AND POWER BRUSHES
NOTICE
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion)

Perform the following check periodically (once every three months).
1. Preparation:
c. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘ switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the Gantry rear cover.
2. Remove the Brush Block assy by unscrewing its 4 Allen screws.
For HSDCD Brush Block, follow according to the CD-ROM manual below:
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT - GANTRY Section - HSDCD BRUSH Assy, Removal subsection.
4-6 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-3-1 Signal and Power Brush Wear (Erosion) (continued)
HSDCD Brush Block

3. Visually inspect all brushes (Signal Brushes and Power Brushes) for wear.
There is a check mark on each brush; if any brush is worn the check mark then the brush assembly must be
replaced. See Illustration 4-4. Refer to ‘Component Replacement Manual / Gantry / Gantry Stationary / Brush
Assy‘.
Illustration 4-4 Checking the worn-out brushes
Low-Power
Brushes (GND)
Low-Power Brushes
(115V)
High-Power
Brushes (480V)
Signal Brushes
Check
mark
New Brush Check during Replace at the

next Periodic next Periodic
Maintenance Maintenance
or within 300k
rotations
4. Restore the Brush Block to its original configuration. Refer to CD-ROM manual below:
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT - GANTRY Section - HSDCD BRUSH Assy, Installation subsection.

4-7 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy
HSDCD Brush Block Assy
Special Equipment
• HEPA Vacuum Cleaner
• Kim Wipe (2254011)
1. Preparation:
d. Remove the rear Gantry cover.
2. Disconnect the cable connector CN1 connected to the signal brush board.
3. Remove the protect cover by unscrewing its 4 screws from the HSDCD brush block assy.
4. Remove the Brush Block following the CD-ROM manual below:
Power
GANTRY REAR VIEW Cables Power Slip
Rings
Brush Block
Assy
Power
Brushes
CN1
Signal
Brushes
4-8 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-3-2 Cleaning of Brush Block Assy (continued)

5. Clean all the HSDCD Brush Block assy using dry Kim Wipe.
NOTICE
Handle the Brushes with care to avoid breakages or deep scratches.
Illustration 4-5 Brushes
Signal Brushes
High-Power Brushes
(480V)
Low-Power
Brushes (115V)
Low-Power
Brushes (GND)
6. Wipe the scrapings from the brush surface with the dry Kim Wipe.
7. Restore the Brush Block to its original configuration. Refer to CD-ROM manual below:

4-9 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-4 HSDCD SLIP RING CLEANING
4-4-1 Method 1
Special Equipment
• Kim Wipe (2254011)
During periodic maintenance, or when changing the brushes, the Gantry slip rings should be checked for loud
scrapping noises.
NOTICE
Keep grease or dust away from the brushes as grease or dust will considerably deteriorate
the life and performance of the brushes.
1. Preparation:
d. Remove the Gantry rear and left maintenance covers.
2. Remove the Brush Block following the CD-ROM manual below:
Illustration 4-6 Removal of the Brush Block Assy
4-10 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-4 HSDCD SLIP RING CLEANING (CONTINUED)
NOTICE
Do not file the slip rings using abrasive or equivalent.
3. Clean the power slip rings and the surrounding area:
a. Switch ON the ‘Rotate‘ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Rotate the Gantry (15 sec/Rot) by setting the TGP service switches as follows;
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
During the rotation, use a vacuum cleaner to clean the filings/powder on the rings and ring housing.
Clean with a Vacuum Cleaner only.
c. Stop the Gantry rotation by set the CONT/HOME/90° Service Switch to HOME.
d. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘ switch.
e. Use dry Kim Wipe to clean the ring housing, and the surfaces of the base frame located below the slip ring
housing.
4. Install the Brush Block following the CD-ROM manual below:

5. Switch ON the ‘Rotate‘ switch at the Gantry rear base.
6. Rotate the Gantry manually to check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more
than one complete rotation.
7. Rotate the Gantry (0.7 sec/Rot) about several minutes to let the Brush Block Assy match the Slip Ring com-
pletely by setting the TGP service switches as follows;
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
9. Restore the Gantry and the PDU to the original configuration.
4-11 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-4 HSCDC SLIP RING CLEANING (CONTINUED)
4-4-2 Method 2 (Recommend)
Special Equipment
• SlipRing Eraser (5169251)
1. Gantry Preparation:
d. Remove the Gantry rear maintenance cover.
2. Remove slip ring covers.
3. Disconnect all connections to the Brush Block Assy.
4. Carefully remove the Brush Block Assy.
Note
Use of Neoprene or nitrile gloves to limit irritation and ingestion of metallic dusts is recommended.
Do not remove gloves near an exposed slip ring. The powder inside the glove can contaminate the
ring.
5. Clean off the dust from the slip ring tracks and carefully around the block with a HEPA vacuum cleaner and the
soft brush attachment.
Note
The soft brush attachment that comes with the HEPA vacuum cleaner should NOT be used for any-
thing other than slip ring brush debris cleaning. The brush must be kept clean to avoid aontamina-
tion of the slip ring and brush tips. It is recommended to store the brushes or brush block in a sep-
arate closed bag (such as a plastic Zip-lock bag).
6. With the slip ring eraser (Illustration 4-7), carefully rub the tracks using a large, sweeping motion.
Illustration 4-7 Slip Ring Eraser
4-12 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-4 HSDCD SLIP RING CLEANING (CONTINUED)
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Do not rub intensely in one spot for a long period of time. The ring color should return to a
shiny new brass color. (Illustration 4-8)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Illustration 4-8 Cleaning with the Eraser
Use knife to cut
7. Clean the track again with the HEPA vacuum cleaner and the soft brush attachment.
8. Wipe the track with a soft white linen cloth while using the vacuum cleaner to remove any other debris.
9. Remove gloves and wash hands thoroughly after cleaning.
4-13 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-4 SLIP RING CLEANING (CONTINUED)

10. Install the Brush Block following the CD-ROM manual below:

11. Switch ON the ‘Rotate‘ switch at the Gantry rear base.
12. Rotate the Gantry manually to check if the movement is smooth and there is no abnormal noise. Make more
than one complete rotation.
13. Rotate the Gantry (0.7 sec/Rot) about several minutes to let the Brush Block Assy match the Slip Ring com-
pletely by setting the TGP service switches as follows;
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
4-14 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING

1. Preparation:
c. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the Gantry rear and front covers.
2. Remove the slip ring covers.
3. Clean the following portion using the HEPA Vacuum Cleaner.
• Inside of the Gantry Front Cover

• Inside of the Gantry Rear Cover
• Gantry Rear Base
• Inside of the Slip Ring Cover
• Slip Ring Tracks
• Slip Ring Wear Cover
4. Clean the following portion using the dry Kim Wipe.
• Detector Surface
• Inside of the Myler Ring
4-15 GANTRY
REV 20 2326039
4-5 BRUSH DEBRIS CLEANING (CONTINUED)
Illustration 4-9 Cleaning Portion
Inside of the Gantry Covers Gantry Rear Base and Slip Ring Inside of the Slip Ring Covers
Detector Surface Inside of the Myler Ring
4-16 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
SECTION 5 - TILT OPERATION
5-1 ROTATION CHECK WHILE TILTED

1. Remove the left maintenance cover from the Gantry.
2. Verify that the other Gantry covers are installed.
3. Return the cradle to the furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.
4. Set the Table height to approximately ‘100 mm’ according to the Gantry Display.
5. Verify that the Gantry tilts safely, while pushing the Gantry switch ‘FWD’ until Gantry tilts to FWD 20 deg.
position .
6. Rotate the Gantry while in the FWD 20 deg. tilt position by setting the TGP Service switches as follows:
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
FAST/MID/SLOW : MID (1.0 sec/Rot)
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
Verify that no abnormal movement / vibration / noise / tilt position occurs during rotation.
7. Set the CONT/HOME/90° switch to HOME, to stop the rotation.

8. Verify that the Gantry tilts safely, while pushing the gantry switch ‘BWD‘ until Gantry tilts to BWD 20 deg.
position .
9. Rotate the Gantry while in the BWD 20 deg. tilt position by setting the TGP Service switch CONT/HOME/90°
switch to CONT.
Verify that no abnormal movement / vibration / noise / tilt position occurs during rotation.
10. Set the CONT/HOME/90° switch to HOME, to stop the rotation.

5-1 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
5-2 TILT ROLLERS

The tilt rollers on the side plates support the motion of the arched frames during tilt operations.
Four rollers are equipped; located on left bottom front, left bottom rear, right bottom front and right bottom rear. All
the rollers should rotate during tilt operations.
1. Remove the front, rear, right and left side covers from the Gantry.
2. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘, and ‘XG Power‘ switches at the Gantry rear base.
3. Tilt the Gantry to BWD 20 deg. position.
4. Remove the Protect Cover for Right Side Rollers.
5. Tilt the Gantry to the forward direction to allow enough space for 0° Adjuster Tool installation. (Illustration 5-1).
6. Install the 0° Adjuster Tool on both side of Gantry.
7. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg. position until touching the 0° Adjuster Tool as shown in the Illustration 5-1.
Illustration 5-1 0° Adjuster Tool Installation
05 Adjuster Tool
(both sides)
5-2 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
5-2 TILT ROLLERS (CONTINUED)
Tilt Roller Clearance Check

8. Verify that any roller can not be rotated by hand.
If a roller was rotated, perform the following adjustment to gain no clearance.
Illustration 5-2 Tilt Rollers
TABLE
NO CLEARANCE
NO CLEARANCE
(LEFT SIDE ROLLERS)
5-3 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
5-2 TILT ROLLERS (CONTINUED)
Tilt Roller Adjustment

a. Set the 0° Adjuster Tool with both side of arm.
b. Verify that these four rollers (left side front/rear, right side front/rear) can not be rotated by hand (no
clearance).
If the roller was rotated, perform the following adjustment:
i. Adjust the position of the right side front roller to just touch the arm. The right side front roller has a
cam mechanism.
ii. Tighten the right side front roller by 98Nm.
iii. Tighten the tensioner lock nut.
c. Repeat steps a to b until all the rollers (both on the right and left sides) are adjusted.
Illustration 5-3 Tilt Roller Adjustment
05 Adjuster Tool 05 Adjuster Tool
Right Side Front Roller

(LEFT SIDE ROLLERS) (RIGHT SIDE ROLLERS)
9. Remove both 0° Adjuster Tools.

10. Install the Protect Cover, removed at step 4.
5-4 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
5-3 TILT SPEED
Tilt Speed Check

1. Verify that all the Gantry covers are installed.
2. Verify that the Tilt Lock is unlocked and the gantry is enable to tilt all over its course.
3. Set the Table height to approximately ‘100 mm‘ according to the Gantry Display.
4. Set the Gantry to the BWD 20 deg. position using the ‘BWD‘ button on the Gantry Panel.
5. Measure the time from BWD 20 deg. to FWD 20 deg., and from FWD 20 deg. to BWD 20 deg. Verify that their
values are in the following specified ranges:
Table 5-1 Tilt Speed Specification
Operation Time
From BWD 20 deg. to FWD 20 deg. 37 ±3 sec. (34 ∼ 40 sec.)
From FWD 20 deg. to BWD 20 deg. 37 ±3 sec. (34 ∼ 40 sec.)
Note
Actually, the tilt operation stops at 0 deg. when you tilt the Gantry from BWD 20 deg. to FWD 20
deg., or from FWD 20 deg. to BWD 20 deg. For this reason, measure the time in the following way:
Time from BWD 20 deg. to FWD 20 deg. Time from BWD 20 deg. to 0 deg.
+
Time from 0 deg. to FWD 20 deg.
Time from FWD 20 deg. to BWD 20 deg. Time from FWD 20 deg. to 0 deg.
+
Time from 0 deg. to BWD 20 .deg.
If the time is out of the specified range, perform the ‘Tilt Speed Adjustment‘.
5-5 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
5-3 TILT SPEED (CONTINUED)
Tilt Speed Adjustment

6. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘ and ‘XG Power‘ switches at the Gantry rear base.
Removing the Table Front Bottom Cover to access the Hydraulic Valve Adjuster
a. Move the cradle OUT to its fully retracted position (farthest from Gantry).
b. Raise the Table to its highest position.
c. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt‘ switch at the Gantry rear base.
d. Remove the two screw caps from the rear bottom cover.
e. Unscrew the two screws and remove the rear bottom cover.
f. Remove the four screw covers from foot pedals.
Note
If the Foot Pedal Option is not installed, skip the step g.
g. Unscrew the four Allen screws and remove the four foot pedals.
h. Remove the four screw caps from the front bottom cover.
i. Unscrew the four screws and remove the front bottom cover.
Illustration 5-4 Table front and rear Bottom Covers
Screw Cover
Foot Pedal
Screw
Rear Bottom Cover Caps
Front Bottom Cover
5-6 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
Illustration 5-5 Valve Adjuster Location
GANTRY FRONT
Hydraulic Valve Adjuster
Set the hydraulic valve adjusters to initial values

j. Mark the current position of Hydraulic Valve Adjuster(s) for reference. See Illustration 5-6.
k. Rotate the two adjusters (FWD and BWD) to the CW limit (S limit). See Illustration 5-6.
Illustration 5-6 Hydraulic Valve Adjuster
F : FAST
F S : SLOW
FWD
S
F
BWD
5-7 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
NOTICE
This is thermal-sensitive adjustment: When the tilt operation is repeated many times, oil in
the tilt line becomes hot so that the tilt speed is faster. Therefore, perform this adjustment
speedily.
7. Adjust the FWD adjuster:
a. Measure the time of movement from BWD 20 deg. to FWD 20 deg.
b. If the time is 37 ± 3 sec, go to step 8; otherwise, perform the following:
If the time is less than 34 sec, rotate the FWD adjuster for 1.0 scale interval in the CCW (S) direction.
If the time is more than 40 sec, rotate the FWD adjuster for 1.0 scale interval in the CW (F) direction.
c. Repeat steps a and b, until the time equals 37 ± 3 sec.

8. Adjust the BWD adjusters:
a. Measure the time of movement from FWD 20 deg. to BWD 20 deg.
b. If the time is 37 ± 3 sec, go to step 9; otherwise, perform the following:
If the time is less than 34 sec, rotate the BWD adjuster for 1/5 of a scale interval in the CCW (S) direction.
If the time is more than 40 sec, rotate the BWD adjuster for 1/5 of a scale interval in the CW (F) direction.
c. Repeat steps a and b, until the time equals 37 ± 3 sec.

9. Erase the original positions and mark the final adjusted positions
10. Restore the Front Bottom Cover and Rear Bottom Cover to original configuration. Refer to steps i to d in reverse
order.
5-8 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
5-4 TILT ANGLE
5-4-1 Tilt Angle Check

1. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘ switch.
2. Remove the Gantry front and left side covers.
3. Set the Table height to approximately ‘100 mm‘ according to the Gantry Display.
4. Press the ‘FWD‘ button continually until the Gantry tilt to the FWD 20 degree position (by Gantry display).
5. Verify that the tilt mark (FWD20) on the tilt arm meets the rear edge of the Gantry side frame (see illustration
5-7).
If the rear edge does not meet the tilt mark (FWD20), perform ‘5-4-2 Tilt Angle Adjustment‘.
Illustration 5-7 Tilt Mark
Arm
Tilt Mark
Side
Plate
Tilt Mark
Arm
Side
Plate Tilt Mark 05
Arm
Side Plate
Arm
Tilt Mark
(FWD20)
Arm
Tilt Mark
Arm
Side
Plate
Tilt Mark
(BWD20)
5-9 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
5-4-1 Tilt Angle Check (continued)

6. Continually press ‘BWD‘ until the Gantry stops. Verify that the Gantry stops at the 0° tilt position and the Tilt
Display shows 0°. If the rear edge does not meet the tilt mark (0 deg.), perform ‘5-4-2 Tilt Angle Adjustment‘.
7. Release the ‘BWD‘ button, and then press it again until the Gantry tilts to BWD 20 degree position (by Gantry
display).
8. Verify that the tilt mark (BWD20) on the tilt arm meets the front edge of the Gantry side frame (see illustration
5-7).
If the front edge does not meet the tilt mark (BWD20), perform ‘5-4-2 Tilt Angle Adjustment‘.
5-10 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
5-4-2 Tilt Angle Adjustment

If the tilt angle on the Gantry display does not correspond to the tilt mark on the tilt arm, perform the adjustment as
follows:
1. Set Dip Switch T6 on the TGP board to ON (illustration 5-8) .
Illustration 5-8 TGP Board
CHANGE LED RESET
TEST1
ON
TEST2
OFF
T1 T8 S1
TGP BOARD
2. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display of the Gantry display panel indicates ‘000‘. (refer
to illustration 5-8)
3. Press the FWD button until the Gantry tilt forward to FWD 20 degree position (by tilt mark FWD20 on the tilt
arm).
NOTICE
If the Gantry can not be tilted to the specified angle due to the interlock function, switch ON
(up) the T3 Table dip switch on the TGP board to disable the interlock function, and continue
to tilt the Gantry. In this case, be careful not to have the Gantry collide against anything.
4. Set the position display to ‘5‘ using INLM (Internal Landmark) and EXLM (External Landmark) keys on the
Gantry Switch Panel.
5. Push TEST2 switch on the TGP board.
a. If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys (Gantry Switch Panel) together.
b. Verify that CHANGE LED is OFF.
6. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display of the Gantry display panel indicates ‘001‘.
7. Press the BWD button until the Gantry tilt backward to BWD 20 degree position (by tilt mark BWD20 on the
tilt arm).
8. Set the position display to ‘405‘ using INLM and EXLM keys on the Gantry Switch Panel.
a. If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys (Gantry Switch Panel) together.
b. Verify that CHANGE LED is OFF.
5-11 GANTRY
REV 21 2326039
5-4-2 Tilt Angle Adjustment (Continued)

10. Set Dip Switch T6 on the TGP board to OFF.
WARNING
DO NOT FORGET TO SWITCH OFF THE T3 TABLE DIP SWITCH (IF IT IS SET TO ON),
OTHERWISE THERE WILL BE COLLISION HAZARD, SINCE THE INTERLOCK FUNCTION
DOES NOT WORK, IF T3 IS SET TO ON.
11. Perform the Tilt Angle Check (refer to 5-4-1 Tilt Angle Check ).
5-12 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
SECTION 6 - COLLIMATOR
6-1 APERTURE RATIO

1. Perform the following six offline scans, following the steps below.
Exam No. Scan Parameter/Condition

Thickness Scan Parameter/Condition
1 7 mm
Other Scan Parameters (common to all the scans):
Air, Stationary, 1 sec, 120 kV, 60 mA
Auto Collimator on
Bow-tie Filter: Installed
2 1 mm
3 2 mm
4 3 mm
5 5 mm
6 10 mm

c. Perform the scans listed above.
6-1 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
6-1 APERTURE RATIO (CONTINUED)

2. Obtain the following mean files 1 ∼ 6 (vectors) from the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
Raw Data File Raw Data File No. to be Mean File (Vector) No. File Comment
Selected
(7 mm Thickness Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, 1 7mm Ach
Acq No: 1
(Except for ProSpeed EII) Acq No: 1
Acq No: 1
Acq No: 1
Acq No: 1
Acq No: 1
Note: “Ach“ described in File Comment means A channel. “Bch“ should be commented when testing B chan-
nel
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Format Raw Data
b. Select A Side. ( A channel )
c. Select the raw data file ( Exam#1, Series#1, Acq No: 1 ) from the Raw data browser lists.

Reference Correction No
e. Select Active Mean as “Select Type of Data:“.

g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number“ and 7mm Ach as “File Comment“, then click on OK.
files 2 to 6.
6-2 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039

3. Perform division operations to obtain the following mean files (vectors) 7 ∼ 11, by repeating the steps below.
Vector Data Files

Vector Division Output Vector Number Comment
File A File B
No. 2 (1 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 2 1 7 1/7 Ach
No. 3 (2 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 3 1 8 2/7 Ach
No. 4 (3 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 4 1 9 3/7 Ach
No. 5 (5 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 5 1 10 5/7 Ach
No. 6 (10 mm) / No. 1 (7 mm) 6 1 11 10/7 Ach
Note: "Ach" described in File Comment means A channel. "Bch" should be commented when testing B
channel
Service Menu → Diagnostics → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Analysis →


d. Enter 7 as “Output Vector Number“ and 1/10 ( or 1/7 Ach) as “Comment“, then click on OK.
e. Repeat steps c to d to make Vector files 8 to 11.
4. Check the aperture ratio using View Vector:


View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 7-1/7 Ach as “Select SupMean File:“.
6-3 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
Check for ‘(1 mm) / (7 mm) Ach’

c. Click on [Plot].
Enter 0.11 for DATA MIN.

Enter 0.18 for DATA MAX. (The specification for the vector file No. 7 is 0.12 ∼ 0.18)
A graph like in Illustration 6-1 is drawn.

Check that the graph (aperture ratio) falls within the specification, 0.117 ∼ 0.174.
Illustration 6-1 Aperture Ratio
0.16
0.15
0.14
0.13
0.12
0.11
Check for Other Aperture Ratios

e. Check the other aperture ratios (vector files No. 8, 9, 10, and 11) as described in Table below, by similarly
repeating steps b through d. (at step b, select 8, 9, 10, or 11, for a vector No., respectively)
Table 6-1 Aperture Ratio Specification
Vector File No. Aperture Ratio Specification

7 (1 mm) / (7 mm) (0.117 ∼ 0.174)
8 (2 mm) / (7 mm) (0.234 ∼ 0.349)
9 (3 mm) / (7 mm) (0.325 ∼ 0.523)
10 (5 mm) / (7 mm) (0.584 ∼ 0.873)
11 (10 mm) / (7 mm) (1.169 ∼ 1.746)
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for B Side (B channel).
6-4 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
6-2 BOW-TIE FILTER CURVE TEST
General Information
Prerequisites for this test are as follows:
• The DAS/Detector has been powered ON for more than two hours.
• The x-ray alignment (‘Plane of Rotation’, ‘Detector Bean-on-Window’, ‘Q-cal Channel Ratio’, ‘Iso Center
Alignment’, and ‘Filter Center Alignment’) is proper.
After ending this test, the ‘Filter Center Alignment’ check/adjustment is required.
Replace the filter if the test below fails; or, replace the filter approximately every 100,000 scans, since the filter
material will be gradually deteriorated by x-ray radiation, which may cause crack or break in the filter.
1. Preparation:
a. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the gantry front and both side covers.
c. Switch ON the ‘Rotate’ switch.
2. Perform two air stationary scans with the filter installed and removed:

b. Select Stationary from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]‘.
6-5 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
6-2 BOW-TIE FILTER CURVE TEST (CONTINUED)

c. Perform the following scans:
Scan 1 Scan 2
Scan Time : 3.0 sec Scan Time : 3.0 sec
Thickness : 10 mm Thickness : 10 mm
Focus : Large Focus : Large
KV: 120 kV KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 mA MA : 60 mA
(Others) : (defaults) (Others) : (defaults)
Filter : Installed Filter : Removed

For filter removal, refer to the Component Replacement manual.
(Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch prior to removing the filter!)
3. Store the following vector files (mean files) 1 and 2 out of the acquired raw data, by repeating the steps below.
Raw Data File Raw Data File No. to be Mean Vector File Comment
Selected No.
(Filter Scan) Exam#1, Series#1, 1 Filter Ach
Acq No: 1
(No Filter Scan) Exam#2, Series#1, 2 No Filter Ach
Acq No: 1
Note: “Ach“ described in File Comment means A channel. “Bch“ should be commented when
testing B channel

Reference Correction Yes
e. Select Active Mean as “Select Type of Data:“.

g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number“ and Filter Ach as “File Comment“, then click on OK.
files 2 .
6-6 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
6-2 BOW-TIE FILTER CURVE TEST (CONTINUED)

4. Apply a division to the vector files No.1 and No.2:


d. Enter 3 as “Output Vector Number“ and Filter/NoFilter Ach as “Comment“, then click on OK
5. Check the calculated vector file No.3 using View Vector:

View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 3 -- Filter/NoFilter Ach as “Select SupMean File:“.
c. Select the vector file No. 3.
d. Click on [Plot].
e. Select ‘Manual Scale.’
Enter 0 for Data Min.
Enter 50 for Data Max. (Change this, if necessary)
A filter curve is drawn, as is shown in Illustration 6-2.

Check that the curve is smooth.
6-7 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
Illustration 6-2 Filter Curve
40.000
10.000
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for B Side (B channel).

7. Perform ‘Filter Center Alignment’ of ‘System’ Functional Check/Adjustment -- “ X -- ray Alignment.
6-8 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
6-3 APERTURE Z-AXIS BELT TENSION

1. Preparation:
a. Set the Gantry to the 0 deg. tilt position and lower the Table to the lowest position.
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ and ‘XG Power’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove the Gantry front cover.
d. Switch ON the Service Switch on the SUB board.
e. Rotate the Gantry until the x-ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position by hand.
f. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
2. Disconnect the cable connectors of the L_Fan Assy, and remove the following covers (to access the CIF
board).
DAS Cover_L
FR Cover
3. Verify no slack in the Aperture Z-Axis Belt
6-9 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
6-3 APERTURE Z-AXIS BELT TENSION (CONTINUED)

4. Set the SW2 on the CIF Board to the Vibration Mode (see illustrtion below), and push the SW1 switch on the
CIF board once. The pulley of the Z-Axis Motor begins to vibrate.
SW2 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the belt tension is correct, both sides of the belt (upper and lower) are vibrating.
if not, adjust the belt tension as follows:
a. Loosen the four Allen screws that fasten the Motor to the motor bracket.
b. Rotate the pulley of the screw assy in the CW direction by hand, until the upper or lower belt vibrates.
i. If the upper belt is vibrating, increase the belt tension by rotating the adjustment bolt in the CCW direc-
tion, until both sides of the belt vibrates.
ii. If the lower belt is vibrating, decrease the belt tension by rotating the adjustment bolt in the CW direc-
tion, until both sides of the belt vibrates.
c. Push the SW4 switch on the CIF board once, and tighten the four Allen screws (30kgf.cm).
d. Push the SW1 switch, and check if the both sides of the belt are vibrating.
e. Push the SW4 switch.
f. Unscrew one of the four Allen screws, and apply loctite 242 to the screw, then tighten it again with 30kgf.cm.
g. Repeat the above step for the other screws, one by one.
5. Set the SW2 on the CIF Board to normal position.
6. Install the FR Cover and DAS Cover-L.
6-10 GANTRY
REV 5 2326039
Illustration 6-3 Z-Axis Belt
Allen Screws Z-Axis Motor Pulley Belt Screw Assy Pulley
Allen Screws Adjustment Bolt
Upper Belt Screw Assy

Pulley
Z–Axis Motor
Pulley Lower Belt
6-11 GANTRY
6-12 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
SECTION 7 - TABLE AND GANTRY
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING

The following procedure adjusts the Table position in the right-left direction so that the Table center line and the scan
center are aligned. See Illustration 7-1.
After completing the adjustment, anchor the Table; see the Installation manual.
1. Preparation:
a. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg.
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.
Illustration 7-1 Table Right-left Positioning
GANTRY
Scan Center
TABLE
Right-Left
Table Center Line Direction
7-1 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING (CONTINUED)
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD! WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON
AND SMALL BUTTON), THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE 0 DEG. POSITION. IF IT
IS NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY,
SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ SWITCH FIRST.
2. Perform an axial scan of the head holder:
a. Mount the axial head holder to the end of the cradle.
b. Switch ON the positioning lights.
c. Advance the cradle into the Gantry until the internal light cuts the approximately middle section of the head
holder.
d. Perform an axial scan of the head holder using the following technique:
e. Scan Parameters: 35 cm FOV, 3 sec, 120 kV, 60 mA, 10 mm Thickness
3. Check whether the Table center line and the scan center are aligned:
Verify that the difference in the distances ( |1-2| ) is within ± 2 mm. If not, proceed to next step.
1 2
7-2 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
7-1 TABLE POSITIONING (CONTINUED)

4. Adjust the Table right - left position:
a. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ and ’Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Table front and rear bottom covers.
(Refer to the Component Replacement manual, if necessary)
c. Loosen the Table base mounting nuts. See Illustration 7-2.
d. Move the Table to center the head holder in the scan plane, according to step 3.
e. Tighten the Table base mounting nuts securely.
f. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ switch.
g. Return to step 2.
Illustration 7-2 Table Mounting Screws
Gantry Base
Mounting Nut
Table Base M8 (x2)
7-3 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
7-2 POSITIONING LIGHTS
7-2-1 Halogen Positioning Lights

Five positioning lights are equipped on the Gantry rotative frame; these are:
Inner right and left lights
Outer right and left lights
Outer top light.
Illustration 7-3 Halogen Positioning Lights Locations
RIGHT-LEFT
DIRECTION
INNER INNER
HORIZONTAL LEFT RIGHT
DIRECTION GANTRY
OUTER OUTER
LEFT RIGHT
GANTRY
OUTER
TOP
OUTER
TOP
TABLE VERTICAL TABLE
DIRECTION
(TOP VIEW)
(SIDE VIEW)
The positions of the Inner right and left lights, and Outer right and left lights are adjusted in the horizontal and
vertical directions.
The position of the Outer top light is adjusted in the right-left and horizontal directions.
7-4 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
7-2-1 Halogen Positioning Lights (continued)
WARNING
ROTATION HAZARD! WHEN YOU PRESS THE ’POSN LIGHT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON
AND SMALL BUTTON), THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE -14 DEG. POSITION. IF IT
IS NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY,
SWITCH OFF THE ‘ROTATE’ SWITCH FIRST.
1. Preparation.
a. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Gantry front and both side cover.
c. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ switch.
2. Place a fine pin (ex. M3 size hexagonal wrench) on the center of the phantom holder. See Illustration 7-4.
Illustration 7-4 Pin Positioning
Head Holder
7-5 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
Positioning a Pin at the Scan Center

Refer to Operator Manual, when necessary.
3. Position the pin perpendicular to the scan plane:
a. Perform a 0 deg. scout scan on the pin.
b. Magnify the image by a four factor in the following way:
i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair (+) cursor.
ii. Position the cursor approximately at the center of the pin image.
iii. Press the [Mag] key.
iv. Enter the magnification factor of four.
c. Display a vertical line in the following way:
i. Press the [Image Meas] key.
ii. Select Set Cursor.
iii. Select Vertical Line.
iv. Set V Angle to 0 deg.
d. Move the vertical line using the trackball onto the pin image to check that the pin and the vertical line are
aligned. See Illustration 7-5.
e. Position the pin so that the pin and the vertical line are aligned, according to the image.
f. Repeat steps a through e, until the pin and the vertical line are alined within ±0.5 mm.
After the pin is correctly positioned, do not move it.
Illustration 7-5 0 deg. Scout Image of Wrench
Align the Wrench

and the Vertical Line
Phantom Holder
7-6 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039

4. Position the pin at the scan center:
a. Perform an axial scan on the pin with the following settings;
Scan Parameters: 3 sec, 120 kV, 60 mA, 10 mm Thickness, 35 cm Recon FOV, x = y = 0
b. Display a grid.
c. Measure the distance between the pin and the scan center in the following way:
i. Press the [Crsr] key to display a crosshair cursor.
ii. Move the cursor using the trackball to the center of the pin, and press the [Dist Angle] key to copy the
cursor over the pin location.
iii. Move the cursor vertically to the X axis; press [Dist Angle] again, to deposit the end location and display
the distance between the pin and the X axis (A). See Illustration 7-6.
iv. Perform the above to measure the distance between the pin and the Y axis (B).
d. Position the pin so that the pin is placed at the scan center, according to the distances measured at the
above step.
Use the up-down adjuster and right-left adjuster of the phantom holder (one turn: 1 mm movement). (The
pin direction is adjusted parallel with the Gantry axial direction, per step 3)
e. Repeat steps a through d, until the pin is positioned at the scan center within ±0.5 mm.
Illustration 7-6 Axial Image of Wrench
Scan Center
Wrench
7-7 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
Vertical Position - Right and Left Lights

5. Turn ON the positioning lights.
6. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
7. Adjust the inner right and left lights in the vertical direction using the ëAí screw so that the horizontal light and
the pin are aligned within ± 0.5 mm. See Illustration 7-7.
Adjust the light angle using the ’D’ lever, if necessary.
8. Move the cradle in the Out direction over 190 mm.
9. Adjust the outer right and left lights in the vertical direction using the ’A’ screw so that the horizontal light and
the pin are aligned within ± 0.5 mm.
Illustration 7-7 Positioning Light Adjustment
Adjusting Tube
Adjust Adjust A
Direction Screw/Lever
1 – 1’ A Steel Plate
2– 2’ B a
3 – 3’ D
Before adjusting A, B, or D, loosen a,
b, or d respectively; after adjustment, b
tighten a, b, or d accordingly.
2
1
B
2’
1’ 3’
1 D
3’
d
Light Screen (A hex screw is installed inside this hole)
3
2
1’
2’
7-8 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
Right-Left Position - Top Light

10. Adjust the outer top light in the right-left direction using the ëAí screw so that the horizontal (Gantry axial
direction) light and the pin are aligned within ± 0.5 mm.
Verification of Table Positioning

11. Verify that the Table is installed perpendicular to the Gantry:
a. Perform a scout scan on the 25 cm water phantom at 0 deg. azimuth.
The scout image and a horizontal line appear.
b. Verify that the horizontal line and the phantom surface are parallel. See Illustration 7-8.
Illustration 7-8 Table Positioning Check
Phantom
Horizontal Line
Phantom Surface
7-9 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
Positioning the Water Phantom

12. Align the position of the water phantom surface to the scan plane:
a. Switch ON the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
b. Perform a scout scan on the 25 cm water phantom at 90 deg. azimuth.
The scout image and a vertical line appear.
c. Adjust the direction of the phantom holder, using the front surface angle adjuster (see Illustration 7-4,
according to the image, so that the phantom surface is parallel with the vertical line.
d. Repeat steps b and c, until the line and the phantom surface are parallel.
e. Move the vertical line until it just touches the surface of the phantom scout image. See Illustration 7-9.
f. Press the [Enter] key.
g. Press the [End] key.
h. Select ’Confirm’ on the Touch Panel screen and press the ’Table set’ button.
The phantom surface moves to the scan plane position.
Illustration 7-9 Localize on the Phantom Surface
Phantom Surface
Vertical Line
7-10 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
Horizontal Position - Right and Left Lights

13. Turn ON the positioning lights.
14. Switch OFF the ’Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
15. Adjust the inner right and left lights in the horizontal direction using the ’B’ screw so that the vertical light and
the phantom surface are aligned within ± 0.5 mm.
16. Move the cradle in the Out direction over 190 mm.
17. Adjust the outer right and left lights in the horizontal direction using the ’B’ screw so that the vertical light and
the phantom surface are aligned within ± 0.5 mm.
Horizontal Position - Top Lights

18. Adjust the outer top light in the horizontal direction using the ’B’ screw so that the right-left light and the phantom
surface are aligned within ±0.5 mm.
7-11 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK
7-3-1 Table Up, Down, Height

1. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg.
Move the cradle to the furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.
2. Push the ’Down’ button until the Table reaches its lowest position.
3. Hold down the ’Up’ button.
Verify that the ’cradle longitudinal position display’ changes to ’Table height display’, and that the Table stops
on the way up with the ’Table height display’ blinking.
Free the ’UP’ button and hold it down again until the highest position is reached.
4. Return the Table to its lowest position using the ’Down’ button.
5. Do the same check (step 3) with the Foot Switches.
6. Push the ’Height’ button and verify that the ’longitudinal display’ changes to ’height display’.
7-3-2 Table In, Out, Fast

1. Raise the Table to the highest position.
2. Verify that the cradle moves In and Out smoothly when pressing the ’In’ or ’Out’ button on the Gantry Panel
Switch.
3. Press the ’In’ or ’Out’ button together with the ’Fast’ button and verify that the cradle moves smoothly at
approximately twice the speed as in step 2; check both In and Out.
7-3-3 Move to Scan, Zero

2. Push the ’Zero’ button. Verify that the ’Table position’ display is ’0.0’.
3. Push ’Move to Scan’ and verify that the ’In’ LED starts to blink.
4. Continually press the ’In’ button until the cradle stops. Verify that the cradle moves 190 mm, and that the ’Table
position’ display increments to ’-190’, and then turns to ’0.0’.
7-3-4 Tilt Range

1. Push the ’Tilt Range’ button.
2. Verify that the ’tilt display’ changes to ’tilt range display.’
7-12 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
7-3 GANTRY PANEL SWITCH CHECK (CONTINUED)
7-3-5 POSN Light

1. Push the ’POSN Light’ button.
Verify that the Gantry rotates to the Home position and the 5 positioning lights are turned ON.
(The Gantry does not rotate, if it is already positioned at the Home position)
Verify that the positioning lights are turned OFF automatically after approximately 1 minute.
(If the positioning lights are not turned ON, push the reset switch on the TGP Board once and perform the
above)
7-3-6 Home
1. Raise the Table to approximately -50 mm height.
Move the cradle to the 200 mm position in the In direction from the outer limit position.
Tilt the Gantry to the BWD or FWD limit.

2. Hold down the ’Home’ button.
3. Verify the following:
The Gantry rotates to the 0 deg. position;
The cradle moves to the outer limit position;
The Table lowers to the lowest position.
7-13 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
7-4 TABLE AND GANTRY INTERLOCK

Tilt the Gantry to the 0 deg. position.
Move the cradle to any position except the out limit position.
2. Move the Table down until it stops automatically; this is the interlock position.
Verify that the Table up/down function and Gantry tilt function are interlocked along the dashed line indicated
in Illustration 7-10, but that the cradle in/out function can still operate.
3. Move the cradle to the out limit position.
Verify that the Table can be lowered to the lowest position.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 with other tilt angles.
Illustration 7-10 Table/Gantry Interlock
FWD 25.0
20.0 INTERLOCK AREA
15.0
TILT ANGLE [deg.]
10.0
5.0
0.0
UP/DOWN, TILT AREA
5.0
10.0
15.0
20.0
BWD 25.0
–250 – 200 –150 –100 –50 0
TABLE HEIGHT [mm]
THE DASHED LINE IS IN/OUT INTERLOCK, WHICH IS SET AT 5 mm

AND 0.7 degrees OUTSIDE OF UP/DOWN – TILT INTERLOCK
7-14 GANTRY
REV 0 2326039
TABLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - ELEVATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE BOTTOM COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 INSTALLATION OF THE FOOT SWITCH (PEDAL AND MAT TYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3 MECHANICAL LIMIT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4 TABLE HEIGHT SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-4-1 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-4-2 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-5 HEIGHT COMPENSATION BETWEEN TABLE AND GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
SECTION 2 - LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 CRADLE MECHANICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1-1 Unlatch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-1-2 Parallel Setting of Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2-1 Longitudinal Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2-2 Cradle Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 CRADLE COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-5 OUTPUT TORQUE ADJUSTMENT OF STEPPING MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-5-1 For LC Table (Stepping Motor 2299288) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
SECTION 3 - SHORT-FOOT-PRINT FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 TABLE DOWN LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2-1 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-3 CRADLE IN LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-3-1 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
i TABLE
ii TABLE
REV 19 2326039
SECTION 1 - ELEVATION FUNCTION
NOTICE
Go to Section 3 “Short-Foot-Print Function” in this Tab, when it is using Short-Foot-Print
Mode at the Site.
1-1 REMOVAL / INSTALLATION OF THE TABLE BOTTOM COVERS

1. Move the Cradle to the out limit position. (farthest from Gantry)
2. Raise the Table to its highest position.
3. Switch OFF the “Table/Tilt” switch at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the two screw caps from the rear bottom cover.
5. Unscrew the two screws and remove the rear bottom cover.
6. Remove the four screw covers from foot pedals, if Foot Pedal Option has been installed.
7. Unscrew the four Allen screws and remove the four foot pedals.
8. Remove the four screw caps from the front bottom cover.
9. Unscrew the four screws and remove the front bottom cover.
10. END
Illustration 1-1 Table front and rear Bottom Covers
Screw Cover
Foot Pedal
Screw Caps
Rear Bottom Cover Front Bottom Cover
1-1 TABLE
REV 19 2326039
1-2 INSTALLATION OF THE FOOT SWITCH (PEDAL AND MAT TYPE)

For detailed procedure, please refer to Component Replacement manual, Table, Foot Switch section.
1. Move the Cradle to the out limit position. (farthest from Gantry)
3. Switch OFF the “Table/Tilt, Rotate” switches at the Gantry rear base.
4. Remove the rear and front bottom cover.
5. Set the foot switches (pedal or mat type switches) at both side of table.
6. Connect the foot switch connector with table connector.
7. Fix the cables with tie-wrap.
Verify that the cable is fixed secure.
8. Switch ON the “Table/Tilt, Rotate” switches at the Gantry rear base.
9. Step on and off the foot switches, and verify that they work correctly as follows.
a. The Key mark LED on the Gantry Switch Panel will be lit on as green, when mat switch is ON.
And each operation switches on the Gantry Switch Panel can be worked correctly.
b. The Key mark LED on the Gantry Switch Panel will be off, when mat switch is OFF.
And each operation switches on the Gantry Switch Panel does not work, when mat switch is OFF.
10. Restore the Table to original configuration.
Note
If customer does not order the Foot Switch, be sure that the Dummy Connector (2202687-2) be connected to the
Table Connector (2299264-2).
11. END
1-2 TABLE
REV 19 2326039
1-3 MECHANICAL LIMIT CHECK

The following procedure checks the mechanical limit, both at the lowest and highest positions.
1. Preparation:
a. Set the Table to it’s highest position.
b. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “Table/Tilt” switches at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove the left maintenance cover from the Gantry. (Refer to the “Component Replacement” manual)
d. Remove the Table front and rear bottom covers. (Refer to Section 1-1)
e. Switch ON the “Table/Tilt” switch.
2. Set the T3 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to ON position (illustration 1-2).
(Cancels the Table-Gantry interlock function)
3. Press and hold the ‘DOWN’ from Gantry Panel Switch (or from the Foot Switch Pedal Option), and the following
actions occur:
a. The Gantry tilts to 0 degrees.
b. The Table lowers to its lowest position. (Mechanical Lower Limit Position)
c. The cradle moves to its furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.
Verify that the Table and Gantry motions are smooth and quiet.
4. Verify that the Table height ‘H’ is less than 301mm . See Illustration 1-3 for proper measuring points.
5. Press and hold the ‘UP’ button on Gantry Panel Switch.
The Table stops at a height of approximately 675mm.
Release the ‘UP’ button and depress it again until the Table stops at its highest position.
(Mechanical Highest Limit Position)
6. Verify that the Table height ‘H’ is more than 887mm. See Illustration 1-3 for proper measuring points.
7. Set the T3 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position (illustration 1-2).
(Enable the Table-Gantry interlock function)
NOTICE
Do not forget to switch OFF the T3 switch, otherwise there will be collision hazard, since the
interlock function does not work.
Note
Verify that the Table up and down operations can be correctly performed by Gantry Panel Switch
(or by each foot pedal option), when the above check procedure is finished and the front and rear
bottom covers are re-installed.
1-3 TABLE
REV 19 2326039
1-4 TABLE HEIGHT SETTING
1-4-1 Check
1. Remove the front cover and left maintenance cover from the Gantry. (Refer to the “Component/Replacement”
manual)
2. Remove the Table front and rear bottom covers. (Refer to Section 1-1)
3. Move the Cradle to the out limit position. (farthest from Gantry).
5. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates ‘011’.
TGP BOARD
Change LED RESET
ON TEST1
OFF TEST2
T1 T8
S1
T3 T6
6. Lower the Table to the down limit position.

7. Measure the Table height ‘H’. (e.g. It may be 301 mm or so.)
8. Read the value of position display, while pushing RANGE key on the Gantry Switch Panel.
9. Verify that the position display reads
{(H - 301) X 2} ± 10. (e.g. It may be “30±10” or so.)
If not, perform Table Height adjustment.
10. Raise the Table to the up limit position.
11. Measure the Table height ‘H’. It may be 887 mm or so.
12. Read the value of position display, while pushing RANGE key on the Gantry Switch Panel.
13. Verify that the position display reads {(H - 301) X 2} ± 10. (e.g. It may be “1172±10“ or so.)
If not, perform Table Height Adjustment.
1-4 TABLE
REV 19 2326039
1-4 TABLE HEIGHT SETTING (CONTINUED)
Illustration 1-3 Table Height Measure
(FRONT VIEW)
(84.3mm) H 74.8 mm
9.5mm
FLOOR
Bottom Center Frame Approx. 50mm
1-5 TABLE
REV 19 2326039
1-4 TABLE HEIGHT SETTING (CONTINUED)
1-4-2 Adjustment
1. Move the Cradle to the out limit position.
2. Set the T3 (interlock release) switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to ON position (illustration 1-2).
3. Lower the Table to the mechanical down limit position.
In the mechanical down limit, the Table height ‘H’ may be 301mm.
5. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates ‘009’.
6. Check the value of position display indicates “1”.
If not, adjust the position display to “1” by pressing the ‘INLM (Internal Landmark)’ or ‘EXLM (External
Landmark)’ keys.
7. Push TEST2 switch on the TGP board (illustration 1-2).
If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys together on the Gantry Switch Panel.
Check that CHANGE LED is OFF.
9. Raise the Table to the mechanical up limit position.
In the mechanical up limit, the Table height ‘H’ may be:
LC Table: approximately 887mm.
11. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates ‘010’.
12. Check the value of position display indicates ”1177”.
If not, adjust the position display to ”1177” by pressing the ‘INLM’ or ‘EXLM’ keys.
14. Set the T3 and T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position (illustration 1-2).
1-6 TABLE
REV 19 2326039
1-5 HEIGHT COMPENSATION BETWEEN TABLE AND GANTRY

Note
This function is available for the Gantry with TGP board 2234978 or later.
Note
Prior to this adjustment, the table height adjustment MUST be completed.
This adjustment can cancel variations in interlock gap between the table and Gantry which occurs due to different
installed height of the Table and Gantry.
1. Raise the Table up to -50 mm ~ 0 mm down from the Up limit position (shown on Gantry display).
2. Perform an axial scan
a. Advance the cradle into the Gantry so that the position of 20 cm ~ 40 cm from the cradle edge can be
scanned.
b. Perform an axial scan of the cradle.
3. Measure distance (X) between scan center and cradle upper surface.

6. Adjust the position display XXXX to {1000 + 2X} by pressing the ‘INLM’ or ‘EXLM’ keys.
e.g.: When the cradle is positioned at 10mm above the scan center, adjust display to1020 (1000 + 2x10).
When the cradle is positioned at 10mm under the scan center, adjust display to 980 (1000 + 2x (-10)).
8. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position.
1-7 TABLE
1-8 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
SECTION 2 - LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION
2-1 CRADLE MECHANICS
2-1-1 Unlatch Switches

To perform the following procedure, a person should ride on the cradle, or some substitute should be placed on the
cradle.
1. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by the ‘OUT’ button.
2. While moving the cradle in the In direction by continuously pushing the ‘IN’ button, perform the following:
a. Push the Unlatch switch (‘Free’). See Illustration 2-1 and 2-2.
Verify that the cradle stops moving, and that the Gantry Display goes blank; this indicating that the cradle
is unlatched.
b. Push the Unlatch switch again (‘Latch’).
c. Release the ‘IN’ button, and then push it.
Verify that the cradle starts moving and the Gantry Display changes to normal (displaying a position in
millimeter).
3. Repeat the above same check for the Unlatch switch on the opposite side.
Illustration 2-1 Unlatch Switch Location
One Unlatch Switch

per Side (Total 2)
2-1 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-1-2 Parallel Setting of Cradle

1. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the Table right and left side covers.
3. Move the cradle to the Mechanical Out limit position by hand.
4. Adjust the position of the bearings to meet the following conditions. See Illustration 2-2.
• The Table frame and the cradle are parallel; adjust so that the difference between gap DF (measured on
the In side) and gap DR (measured on the Out side) becomes 1.5 mm or less.
• A gap of 0.1 mm or more (‘A’) exists between the cradle and the bearing (at least one of the right and
left bearings); however, the total of the gaps on the right and left sides should be 2.5 mm or less.
Illustration 2-2 Gap Between Frame and Cradle
FRAME
DF DR
CRADLE
GANTRY
FRAME
A
BEARING
2-2 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-1-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support

1. Switch OFF the ‘Table/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
2. Remove the Table right and left side covers.
3. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by hand.
4. Measure the distances “AR” and “AL” , and write them down with the first decimal place.
5. Remove the screw, then adjust the gap between the cradle and the cradle support bearing by using the shim,
so that the gap becomes 0.5 ± 0.1mm.
6. Adjust the position of the cradle support to meet the ’AR’ and ’AL’ recorded at step 4., and tighten the screw.
Illustration 2-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support

TOP VIEW AL
Bearing
Roller Bearing
SIDE VIEW AR
0.5mm + 0.1mm
Cradle Bearing
Shim
Roller
Cradle Support
AR(AL) Screw
2-3 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-2 CRADLE RELATIVE POSITION

The following procedures (’Longitudinal Accuracy’ and ’Cradle Repeatability’) check the encoder and its related
mechanics and electrics.
2-2-1 Longitudinal Accuracy

1. Set the Gantry to 0° tilt position.
2. Raise the Table to it’s highest position.
Out to In Travel
3. Move the cradle to the Mechanical Out limit position by hand.
4. Press the ’INLM’ button, and verify that the Gantry Display indicates Zero.
5. Mark the Table cover with a marking tape or other at one end of the cradle. Define this position as a reference.
6. Move the cradle to 1000 mm (Display) by pushing the ‘In’ button (use the slow speed).
7. Measure the actual distance of cradle movement.
Verify that the measurement is 1000 ± 2 mm.
In to Out Travel
8. Move the cradle to the Mechanical In limit position by hand.
11. Move the cradle to 1000 mm (Display) by pushing the ’Out’ button (use the slow speed).
12. Measure the actual distance of cradle movement.
Verify that the measurement is 1000 ± 2 mm.
2-4 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-2-2 Cradle Repeatability

1. Set the Gantry to 0° tilt position.
2. Raise the Table to itís highest position.
Out to In Travel
3. Move the cradle to itís Mechanical Out limit position by hand.
4. Move the cradle approximately 100 mm, by pushing ’In’ button.
7. Move the cradle to 1000 mm (Display) by pushing the ’In’ button (use the slow speed).
9. Measure the cradle position difference between before and after the travels.
Verify that the measurement is 0 ± 0.27 mm.
In to Out Travel
10. Move the cradle to its Mechanical In limit position by hand.
11. Move the cradle approximately 100 mm, by pushing ’Out’ button.
15. Move the cradle to 0 mm (Display) by pushing the ’In’ button (use the slow speed).
16. Measure the cradle position difference between before and after the travels.
Verify that the measurement is 0 ± 0.27 mm.
2-5 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION
Check
1. Press ’OUT’ key and ’FAST’ key on the Gantry switch panel to move the cradle to out limit position.
2. Press ’OUT’ key again for few seconds, then press ’INLM’ key.
3. Move the Cradle by hand to mechanical out limit position.
4. Check that the position display indicates “5.0 ± 2.5”.
5. If not, perform the adjustment procedure, on the next page.
6. Move the cradle to in limit position by pressing ’IN’ and ’FAST’ keys.
7. Press ’IN’ key again for few seconds.
8. Check that the position display indicates “1525 ± 5.0”.
9. If not, perform adjustment.
2-6 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-3 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION (CONTINUED)
Adjustment
If the Cradle position is out of specification, proceed as shown below.
Note
Table height adjustment must be done before this adjustment.
1. Set the Gantry to the 0 degree TILT position.
2. Set the table to ’200’ mm height postition (shown on Gantry display).
3. Move the cradle to the mechanical out limit position by hand. (farthest from gantry).
CHANGE LED RESET
TEST1
ON
TEST2
OFF
T1 T8 S1
T6
TGP BOARD
4. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to ON (illustration 2-4).

5. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates ’003’.
6. Verify that the position display indicates ’0’, then push TEST2 switch on the TGP board (illustration 2-4).
If the CHANGE LED (illustration 2-4) is lit, press the RANGE and FAST keys together on the Gantry Switch
panel.
Verify that the CHANGE LED is OFF.
7. Verify that the cradle is still at mechanical out limit position.
8. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board, until the height display on the Gantry Display reads ’004’.
9. Verify that the position display indicates 0.
Then move the cradle IN by pushing IN button until the position display indicates ’3040 ± 10’.
If cradle stopped due to interlock and the position display indicated smaller than ’3030’, move the cradle IN until
the position display indicates ’3040 ± 10’ by hand.
If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys together on the Gantry Switch panel.
Verify that the CHANGE LED is OFF.
2-7 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-4 CRADLE COMPENSATION

12. When the Table is raised or lowered, the cradle is automatically moved into the OUT or IN direction to remain
at the same distance from the Gantry. The following procedure checks or adjusts this function.
Check
1. Raise the Table to 100mm height (shown on Gantry display).
2. Move the cradle IN approx. 400mm from the out limit.
3. Push the positioning light switch and mark the position on the cradle where is lit up with positioning light beam.
4. Raise the table to 0mm height by pushing UP button. (shown on Gantry display)
5. Push the positioning light switch again, and check if the distance between the mark and the positioning light
beam is less than 1 mm.
If the distance is more than 1mm, perform adjustment.

6. Lower the table to 200mm height by pushing DOWN button. (shown on Gantry display)
7. Push the positioning light switch again, and check if the distance between the mark and the positioning light
beam is less than 1 mm.
If the distance is more than 1mm, perform adjustment.
2-8 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-4 CRADLE COMPENSATION (CONTINUED)
Adjustment
If the cradle compensation is out of specification, proceed as shown below.
1. Raise/lower the Table to 50mm height (shown on Gantry display).
2. Move the cradle IN approx. 400mm from the out limit.
3. Push the positioning light switch and mark the position on the cradle where is lit up with positioning light beam.
4. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to ON (illustration 2-5).
5. Push TEST1 switch on the TGP board until the height display on the Gantry Display indicates ’012’ .
7. Lower the Table approx. 150mm (using a measure).
8. Push the positioning light switch again, and move the cradle until the mark made in step 3 is lit up with
positioning light beam.
If CHANGE LED is lit, press FAST and RANGE keys together on the Gantry Switch panel.
Verify that CHANGE LED is OFF.
10. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position.
CHANGE LED RESET
TEST1
ON
TEST2
OFF
T1 T8 S1
T6
TGP BOARD
2-9 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-5 OUTPUT TORQUE ADJUSTMENT OF STEPPING MOTOR
2-5-1 For LC Table (Stepping Motor 2299288)

The following procedure adjusts the stepping motor output torque after proceeding step motor driver’s replacement.
Tools and Special Equipment

• Multimeter
• Ergometer or Mechanical Fishing Scale
• Screwdriver
2. Move the cradle to the out limit position by hand.
3. Place a weight (object or person) of approximately 55kg on the cradle.
4. Set the spring balance to the cradle end as indicated in the illustration 2-6.
Illustration 2-6 Setting the Spring balance
Fishing Scale
2-10 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
2-5 OUTPUT TORQUE ADJUSTMENT OF STEPPING MOTOR (CONTINUED)

6. Move the cradle OUT to its fully retracted position (farthest from Gantry).
7. Set the speed of cradle at 0.5 mm/sec by proceeding the Table Processor Off-line Test No.’020’, which sets
the cradle travel speed to 0.25 to 15mm/sec in increments of 0.25 mm/sec.
8. Push IN switch on the front control panel.
9. Measure the voltage between the test point I_REF and test point GND on Step Motor Driver with multimeter.
(red test lead on I_REF and black test lead on GND). Limit the stepping motor output ‘torque’ between 186N ~
196N (19Kgf.cm ~ 20Kgf.cm) by adjusting the VR4 with screwdriver; the measuring voltage of multimeter is about
1.797DC Volts.
Method of measuring the stepping motor output torque:
a. Tie a rope without elastic in the middle of the cradle handle at the rear of the cradle;
b. Catch the rope with ergometer;
c. Move the cradle IN, pull the ergometer at the opposite cradle moving direction, measure the maximal torque
value of the ergometer at the cradle halt point.
10. Set the speed of cradle at 20 mm/sec by proceeding the Table Processor Off-line Test No.’014’, which sets the
cradle travel speed to 2 to 150mm/sec in increments of 2 mm/sec.
11. Set all the switches of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position (illustration 1-2).
12. Push IN switch on the front control panel.
13. Measure the voltage between the test point I_REF and test point GND on Step Motor Driver with multimeter
(red test lead on I_REF and black test lead on GND). Limit the stepping motor output ‘torque’ between 186N ~
196N (19Kgf ~20Kgf) by adjusting the VR5 with screwdriver; the measuring voltage of multimeter is about 1.9DC
Volts.
The position of test point----I_REF, GND and variable resistor---VR4, VR5 shown below.
Illustration 2-7 Stepping Motor Drive for LCT Table (2299288)
14. END
2-11 TABLE
2-12 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
SECTION 3 - SHORT-FOOT-PRINT FUNCTION
3-1 CAUTION
Note
This function is available for the Gantry with TGP board 2156510-5 or later.
The short-foot-print function can limit table-DOWN movement or cradle-IN movement so that the system can be
installed in a small scan room.
WARNING
PATIENT INJURY!
WHEN SHORT-FOOT-PRINT FUNCTION IS USED, AT THE MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING
ROOM MUST BE DEDICATED TO PREVENT THE PATIENT FROM PINCHING BETWEEN
TABLE (OR CRADLE) AND WALL.
Illustration 3-1 Minimum Room for Short-foot-print mode
Table DOWN Limit Cradle IN Limit

More than
120mm
More than
120mm
NOTICE
When table height is limited between 500 mm and 800mm as its DOWN limit, the Gantry front
cover must be removed by two persons and with a special protector (2225358) or a blanket.
3-1 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
3-2 TABLE DOWN LIMIT
3-2-1 Adjustment
15. Move the Cradle to the out electrical limit position.
16. Lower the Table to the lowest position desired.
WARNING
PATIENT INJURY!
WHEN SHORT-FOOT-PRINT FUNCTION IS USED, AT THE MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 120
MM MUST BE DEDICATED TO PREVENT THE PATIENT FROM PINCHING BETWEEN TABLE
(OR CRADLE) AND WALL. SEE ILLUSTRATION 3-1.
TGP BOARD
Change LED RESET
TEST1
ON
TEST2
OFF
S1
T2 T6
21. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position. ( Do NOT touch the T2 switch )
22. Press the Reset switch to reset the TGP board (illustration 3-2).
23. Move the table up and down to verify that the Table lowest position is set to the desired one.
NOTICE
Keep the T2 switch to ON position. If the T2 switch is set to OFF position and the RESET
switch is pushed, the table lowest height will be returned to the default position.
3-2 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
3-3 CRADLE IN LIMIT

Note
Prior to this adjustment, perform adjustment of table height (or adjustment Short Foot Print), and
cradle compensation MUST be completed.
3-3-1 Adjustment
1. Move the Table to the highest position.
2. Move the Cradle to the IN-limit position desired.
WARNING
PATIENT INJURY!
WHEN SHORT-FOOT-PRINT FUNCTION IS USED, A MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 120 MM
MUST BE DEDICATED TO PREVENT THE PATIENT FROM PINCHING BETWEEN TABLE AND
WALL. SEE ILLUSTRATION 3-1.
TGP BOARD
Change LED RESET
TEST1
ON
TEST2
OFF
S1
T4 T6
5. Set the T4 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to ON position (illustration 3-3)
7. Set the T6 switch of the TGP S1 dip-switch to OFF position. ( Do NOT touch the T4 switch )
8. Press the Reset switch to reset the TGP board.
9. Move the cradle OUT and IN to verify that Cradle IN-limit position is set to the desired one.
NOTICE
Keep the T4 switch to ON position. If the T4 switch is set to OFF and the RESET switch is
pushed, the Cradle In Limit will be returned to the default position.
3-3 TABLE
3-4 TABLE
REV 0 2326039
DAS/DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - DAS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 DAS OFFSET DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TEST (NO X-RAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
SECTION 2 - DC POWER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 DC POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
i DAS/DETECTOR
blank
ii DAS/DETECTOR
REV 5 2326039
SECTION 1 - DAS OPERATION
1-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER

1. Select DAS Data Transfer Test; refer to below:
Service Menu → Diagnostics → DAS Data Transfer Test

2. Select or specify the following test parameters:
Test Mode: Bit by Bit :Normal
Scan Mode :Rotate Scan
Scan Time :(Select the shortest time available on the system.)
No. of Scan :10
No. of Test :10
Until errors occur. :1
3. Execute the test.
Verify that no error occurred.

Note
The 184 ch, 230 ch, and 276 ch might have the random pattern because they are the channels for
debug.
1-1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 5 2326039
1-2 DAS OFFSET DATA
Precondition
Ensure that the DAS/Detector has been powered ON for at least ten minutes prior to performing the following
procedure.
1. Perform an axial scan with no x-rays (i.e., acquire a raw data file consisting of offset data):

b. Select Axial from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]’.
c. Perform the following scan:
Scan Time : (Select the shortest time available on the system.)
XG, Ray : OFF
Rotor : ON
Series No. : 1
(Others) : (defaults)
2. Verify that Avg of Mean data are within specifications without applying Offset File Correction on the acquired
raw data (offset data):
c. Select the raw data file (Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.
d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings:
Offset File Correction No

Then, the following data ‘Fan Data Averages’ are displayed:

******************************* Displayed *******************************
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Active Views
Max of Max= x.xxxxxxchannel x view x
Min of Min= x.xxxxxxchannel x view x
Avg of Mean= x.xxxxxx
Avg of SD= x.xxxxxx
Offset Views
Avg of SD= x.xxxxxx
************************************************************************
1-2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 5 2326039
1-2 DAS OFFSET DATA (CONTINUED)

e. Verify that Avg of Mean data (both of Active and Offset Views) are within specifications as described below:
Active Views
Avg of Mean = x.xxxxxx 2000 ≤ ≤ 6000 (Specification)
Offset Views
Avg of Mean = x.xxxxxx 2000 ≤ ≤ 6000 (Specification)
f. Repeat step 2 for B Side (B channel).
3. Verify that Avg of Mean and Avg of SD data are within specifications, by performing Offset File Correction on
the acquired raw data (offset data):
b. Select A side.
c. Select the raw data file (Acq No: 1) from the Raw data browser lists.
d. Perform Fan Data with the following settings:

Then, the following data ‘Fan Data Averages’ are displayed:

******************************* Displayed *******************************
******************************* Displayed *******************************
Active Views
Avg of SD= x.xxxxxx
Offset Views
Avg of SD= x.xxxxxx
************************************************************************
e. Verify that Avg of Mean and Avg of SD data (of Active Views) are within specifications as described below:
Active Views
Avg of Mean = x.xxxxxx -1.0 ≤ ≤ 1.0 (Specification)
Avg of SD = x.xxxxxx ≤ 2.0 (Specification)
f. Repeat step 3 for B Side (B channel).
1-3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 5 2326039
1-3 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TEST (NO X-RAYS)
Precondition
Ensure that the DAS/Detector has been powered ON for at least two hours prior to performing the following
procedure.
1. Perform six DAS Test scans:

c. Perform the following scan:
Scan Time : 2.0 sec
XG Ray : OFF
Rotor : OFF
No. of Scan : 2
DAS Mode : DAS 64L
(Two scans are performed, the data of the first scan will not be used, since the second data is considered
to be more stabilized)
d. Repeat the above scans with the following parameters (the other parameters are the same).
Scan DAS Mode

Exam# 2 DAS16L
Exam# 3 DAS16M
Exam# 4 DAS4M
Exam# 5 DAS4H
Exam# 6 DAS1H
1-4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 5 2326039
1-3 CAM AMPLIFIER LINEARITY TEST (NO X-RAYS) (CONTINUED)

2. Store vector files (mean files) out of the acquired raw data:
Store the following vector files 1 through 6, by repeating the steps below.
DAS Test Raw Data File No. to be Mean Vector No. File Comment
Selected
DAS64L Exam# 1, Series# 1, Acq# 2 1 64L Ach
DAS16L Exam# 2, Series# 1, Acq# 2 2 16L Ach
DAS16M Exam# 3, Series# 1, Acq# 2 3 16M Ach
DAS4M Exam# 4, Series# 1, Acq# 2 4 4M Ach
DAS4H Exam#5, Series# 1, Acq# 2 5 4H Ach
DAS1H Exam# 6, Series# 1, Acq# 2 6 1H Ach
Note: “Ach“ described in File Comment means A channel. “Bch“ should be commented when test-
ing B channel.
Offset File Correction No


f. Select Store to File.
g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and 64L Ach as “File Comment”, then click on OK.
files 2 to 6.
1-5 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 5 2326039

3. Apply a division to the vector files:
Calculate the following vector files NO. 7, 8, and 9, by repeating the steps below.
Vector File Division Vector Data to Output Vector No. Comment

be Selected
File A File B
64L/ 16L 1 2 7 64L/ 16L Ach
16M / 4M 3 4 8 16M / 4M Ach
4H / 1H 5 6 9 4H / 1H Ach
Note: “Ach“ described in Comment means A channel. “Bch“ should be commented when testing B
channel.

c. Select 1 (3, 5) as Vect Data FILE A.
Select 2 (4, 6) as Vect Data FILE B.

d. Enter 7 as “Output Vector Number” and 64L/16L Ach as “Comment”, then click on OK.
e. Repeat steps c to d to make Vector files 8 to 9.
1-6 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 5 2326039

4. Check the calculated vector files using View Vector:

View Vector
b. Select MeanFile 7– 64L/16L Ach as “Select SupMean File:”.
c. Click on [Plot].
Enter 0.999 for Data Min.
Enter 1.001 for Data Max. (Change this, if necessary)
Click on OK.
Verify that the graph of active channel is in the following range:

0.9995 < < 1.0005
e. Perform the same check as above for the vector files No. 8 and No. 9.
Illustration 1-1 Linearity
1.0005
0.9995
Channel
f. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for B Side (B channel).
1-7 DAS/DETECTOR
blank
1-8 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2326039
SECTION 2 - DC POWER SUPPLY
2-1 DC POWER SUPPLY

1. Remove the front and right side Gantry covers.
2. Switch ON the Service Switch and Rotate the Gantry to approximately 190° tube position.
3. Switch OFF the Service Switch.
4. Switch OFF the “Rotate” and “XG Power” switches at the rear Gantry base.
5. Disconnect the DAS, TEMP CONT, and DAS FAN power cables.
6. Measure and adjust if necessary, the potentiometers of the Power Supply according to the table 2-1. The
potentiometer positions is shown in the illustration 2-1.
Illustration 2-1 Power Supply PS L Voltage Adjustment

PS7
PS1
PS2
PS6
PS5
PS3
PS4
PS4
PS5
PS3
PS6
PS2
PS7
PS1
RED GRY YEL
1 4 7
WHT 2 5 8 BLK
3 6 9 ORG
GRN
BLU
DAS POWER CABLE CONNECTOR
The denominations PS1 ∼ PS7 are only for reference in this procedure. They do not correspond to
the part name in Renewal Parts.
2-1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 20 2326039
2-1 DC POWER SUPPLY (CONTINUED)
Power Supply Measuring Point Pins Voltage Range

PS3 DAS Power Cable Connector 3&4 -12.4 ∼ -12.3V
PS5 Temp Cont Power Cable Connector 1&2 24.0 ∼ 24.2V
DAS Fan Power Cable Connector 1&2 24.0 ∼ 24.2V
OGP DTRF Power Cable (3 or 5) 24.0 ∼ 24.2V
& (4 or
6)
PS6 OGP DTRF Power Cable (1 or 7) 5.0 ∼ 5.1V
& (2 or
8)
PS7 RF Power Cable Connector 1&2 14.35 ∼ 15.85V
2-2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2326039
X-RAY GENERATOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - X-RAY TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 TUBE CALIBRATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
SECTION 2 - KV AND MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 MA CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
i X-RAY GENERATOR
blank
ii X-RAY GENERATOR
REV 5 2326039
SECTION 1 - X-RAY TUBE
1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK

This check verifies that the x-ray tube dose falls within specifications by checking DAS Counts.
This check should be performed when the x-ray tube is replaced.
1. Perform a stationary scan:
c. Perform the following air scan:
Scan Time : 1.5 or 2.0 Sec (ProSpeed EII)
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 kV
MA : 60 or 45 mA (ProSpeed EII)
Bow-tie filter: Installed

2. Verify that MEAN MAX data is within specifications:
Service Menu → Generic System Analyzer (GSA) → Format Raw Data

The ‘Fan Data Averages’ screen are displayed:

f. Select Store to File.
g. Enter 1 as “Mean Vector Number” and DAS count check as “File Comment”, then click on OK.
h. The Attention window might appears. Click on OK.
1-1 XG
REV 5 2326039
1-1 DAS COUNT CHECK (CONTINUED)

i. Select Analysis → View Vector.
j. Select MeanFile 1- DAS Count check.
k. Click on Plot, then OK.
Illustration 1-1 Max of Active Mean
Max of Active Mean
Numeric indication
l. Verify that Max of Active Mean data is within specifications as described below:
Note
You can also display the data as a numerics using Numerical button.
- Max of Active Mean:100000 ≤ ≤ 200000 (Specification)
3. Repeat steps 2 for B Side (B channel).
1-2 TUBE CALIBRATION

The x-ray generator of this CT system requires no calibration after an x-ray tube is replaced.
Differences in characteristics of each x-ray tube are automatically learned by the generator, and the learned data
will be stored within the generator.
1-2 XG
REV 5 2326039
SECTION 2 - KV AND MA
2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY

1. Preparation:
a. Remove the left side cover from the Gantry.
b. Set the 42 cm Polypropylene Phantom to the phantom holder.
c. Move the cradle to position the phantom at the Detector window.
(This is to protect the Detector by reducing x-ray dose to it during the check procedure)
d. Perform Warm-up scans, if the x-ray tube is cold.
e. Wait five minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
2. Set the M5 Management dip switch to ON on the TGP Board.
(KV & MA display mode on Gantry Display)
2-1 XG
REV 5 2326039
2-1 KV & MA CHECK WITH GANTRY DISPLAY (CONTINUED)

3. Perform scans of KV - MA stations specified in Table 2-1, following the steps below, and verify that the KV and
MA values displayed on the Gantry Display is within the following specifications:
KV: ±5 kV
MA: ±20 mA
c. Set the scan parameters according to Table 2-1.
(KV and MA values are displayed in real-time during an exposure, and ‘0’ is displayed after the exposure is
finished)
Table 2-1 KV - mA Stations
Time Thickness KV mA
1.5 or 2.0 sec 5 mm 120 20 40 60 100 160 200
140 20 40 60 100 160 -
Stationary Scan (Present Degree)
(Other scan parameters): (defaults)
4. Set the M5 Management dip switch to OFF on the TGP Board.
2-2 XG
REV 5 2326039
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER

1. Preparation:
a. Perform Warm-up scans, if the x-ray tube is cold.
b. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate’ switch at the Gantry rear base.
c. Remove the front, right side, and left side covers of the Gantry.
d. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board near the TGP board.
e. Rotate the Gantry to the home position (x-ray tube at the 12 o’clock position).
f. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board
g. Switch OFF the 'Rotate', ' XG Power', and 'Slip Ring 115V' switches at the Gantry rear base.
CAUTION
Electric shock! Use a ground bar to discharge the high voltage connector any time you
disconnect it.
2. Connect an HV divider between the x-ray tube and the HV Tank:
Illustration 2-1 HV Divider Connection

X-Ray Tube
HV Divider
HV Tank
2-3 XG
REV 5 2326039
2-2 KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER (CONTINUED)

a. Connecting the HV Cables to the HV Tank:
i. Remove the HV cable connectors from the HV Tank (both anode and cathode connectors).
ii. Connect the HV divider cables, which are installed in the system, to the HV Tank.
(Before connecting the cables, wipe clean the HV connectors, and lubricate them with silicon oil)
b. Connecting the HV Divider to the X-Ray Tube:
i. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
Rotate the Gantry by hand until the X-Ray Tube reaches the 3 o’clock position.
Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
ii. Remove the HV cable connectors from the x-ray tube. (Both anode and cathode connectors)
iii. Connect the HV divider cables whose other ends are connected to the HV divider to the x-ray tube.
c. Placing the HV Divider on the Floor:
i. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
ii. Rotate the Gantry by hand until the X-Ray Tube reaches the 3 o’clock position.
iii. Place the HV divider on the floor without straining the HV cables.
iv. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
d. Connecting the HV Cables to the HV Divider:
i. Connect the HV divider cables which were connected to the tanks at step a to the HV divider (see
Illustrations 2-1 and 2-2).
Illustration 2-2 HV Tank Position
X-Ray Tube
HV Tank
2-4 XG
REV 5 2326039
2-2 2KV CHECK WITH HV DIVIDER (CONTINUED)
KV Read
3. Connect a digital multimeter to the output terminals of the HV divider.
(The multimeter should be in the DC voltage measurement mode)
Place the multimeter so that it can be read from the Operator’s room.
NOTICE
Do not switch ON the Rotation switch at the Gantry rear base.
4. Perform x-ray exposures and read the KV values:
a. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V‘ and ‘XG Power‘ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Perform scans described in Table 2-2, following the steps below, and verify that the KV readings are within
the specifications.
i. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:
ii. Select Stationary from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]‘.
iii. Set the scan parameters according to Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 KV Check Scans
KV mA KV Specification
120 200 or 160 (ProSpeed EII) 111.6 ≤ ≤ 128.4
140 160 130.2 ≤ ≤ 149.8
Scan Time: 3.0 sec
Thickness: 2mm
Focus: Large
(Others): (defaults)
2-5 XG
REV 5 2326039
2-3 MA CHECK
1. Preparation:
a. Perform Warm-up scans, if the x-ray tube is cold.
b. Wait five minutes or more following the last scan prior to proceeding to the next step.
c. Switch OFF the ‘Rotate‘, ‘XG Power‘, and ‘Slip Ring 115V‘ switches at the Gantry rear base.
d. Wait at least 2 minutes, and remove the front, right side, and left side covers of the Gantry.
e. Switch ON the Service switch on the SUB Board.
f. Rotate the Gantry by hand in the clockwise direction until the x-ray is positioned at the 12 o’clock position.
g. Switch OFF the Service switch on the SUB Board.
2-6 XG
REV 5 2326039
2-3 MA CHECK (CONTINUED)
Load Resister Check

2. To access the resistor (SH3, SH4) on he KV Measure Board, remove the power unit cover from the JEDI Power
Unit.
3. Connect a digital multimeter probes to the resistor (SH3 or SH4) or yellow capacitor (C8) leads on the KV
Measure board, located behind the KV Cont board.(see illustration 2-3).
4. Set the multimeter to the register measurement mode.
Read the value; it should be 5 (± 0.05) ohms.
Illustration 2-3 KV Measure Board Location
SH3
SH4
C8
Unit Cover SH3, SH4, or C8
KV Measure Board
Probes
KV Cont Board
2-7 XG
REV 5 2326039
2-3 MA CHECK (CONTINUED)
MA Check
5. Set the multimeter to the DC voltage measurement mode (mV).
Place the multimeter so that it can be read from the Operator’s room.
NOTICE
Do not switch ON the ‘Rotate‘ switch at the Gantry rear base.
6. Perform x-ray exposures and read the voltage values:
a. Switch ON the ‘Slip Ring 115V‘ and ‘XG Power‘ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Perform scans described in Table 2-3, following the steps below, and verify that the mA measurements
([measured voltage (mV)]/[5 (ohms)]) are within the specifications.
i. Select Offline Scan; refer to below:
ii. Select Stationary from ‘Technic - [Scan Type]‘.
iii. Set the scan parameters according to Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 mA Check Scans
KV mA mA Specification
120 200 190.0 ≤ ≤ 210.0
140 160 152.0 ≤ ≤ 168.0
Scan Time: 3.0 sec
Thickness: 2mm
Focus: Large
(Others): (defaults)
2-8 XG
REV 20 2326039
SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING OF BOARDS/DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 - OPERATOR CONSOLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS ON NEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2-1 DBPCI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2-2 NPRIF Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2-3 NPRM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2-4 NPRS Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-3 BOARDS ON CONNECTOR BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-3-1 REAR CN1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-3-2 DASIFN2 (2323521) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-4 BOARDS/DEVICES PERIPHERAL BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-4-1 FRONT PNL Assy (2136996-2) (For O2 Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-4-2 FRONT PNL Assy (2396498) (For Linux Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-4-3 CD-ROM Drive (2202991) (For O2 Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-4-4 CD-ROM Drive (2369084 & 5147738) (For Linux Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-4-5 3.5” MOD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-4-6 5.25” MOD Drive (2245963) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-4-7 Hard Disk Drive (2205368) (For O2 Computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-4-8 Hard Disk Drive (2256860/2282749/2329957/2376479) (For O2 Computer) 1-25
1-4-9 Hard Disk Drive (5166701) (For O2 Computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-4-10 Hard Disk Drive (2369083) (For Linux Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1-4-11 Hard Disk Drive (5133747) (For Linux Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1-5 OTHER CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1-5-1 NAA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1-5-2 PCI Host Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
SECTION 2 - GANTRY/TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 SWITCHES AT GANTRY REAR BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 TGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 SUB BD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-4 OGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-5 DTRF2 (2233745-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-6 NAA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-7 TBL BD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
SECTION 3 - DAS / DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 CIF BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 TEMP CONT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
i SWITCH / JUMPER
REV 20 2326039
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 4 - X-RAY GENERATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 KV MEASURE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-1-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-1-2 Switches and Jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-1-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3-4 J2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-4 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PH BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-4-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-4-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-5 GATE COMMAND BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-5-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-5-3 Fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-6 DUAL SNUB BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-6-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-6-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-7 IF BOARD NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-7-2 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-8 KV CONTROL BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-8-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-8-2 4Switches and Jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-8-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-8-4 Non Volatile RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-9 AC/DC THREE PHASE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-9-1 Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-9-3 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
SECTION 5 - PDU (POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 RMT CNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-1-1 RMT CNT of PDU2 (229XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
ii SWITCH / JUMPER
REV 20 2326039
SECTION 1 - OPERATOR CONSOLE
1-1 GENERAL
WARNING
NOTICE
Cut power before removing or inserting any of the boards or plugs.
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge. It is essential to link yourself to ground potential by wearing an anti-
static wrist strap. No board should ever be accessed without this precaution.
Component Locations
The following illustration shows locations of some components within the operator console. The names ‘Peripheral
Box’, ‘Nest’, etc. are used to indicate board locations in the following sections.
Illustration 1-1
CRT CRT
Monitor Monitor
Peripheral
Con Box AC PS
nector Box
Box PCI
Boards
PS
PS
Host
Processor PS
1-1 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
1-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS ON NEST
1-2-1 DBPCI Board
Illustration 1-2 DBPCI
SW1
Connectors SW2
Card Edge
Connector
Switch
• SW2 - Normally set to ‘0H’ as illustrated below.
ON `1'
`0'
1 2 3 4
Switch Description
Bit 1 Order: Determines the way DAS data is packed.
Bit 2 Endian: Determines the data endian for the PCI bus.
Bit 3 AUX: Determines how the AUX register is used.
Bit 4 Not defined.
• SW1 - Reset Switch
1-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
1-2-2 NPRIF Board
Illustration 1-3 NPRIF
(Rev 1 Board)
JP6
JP5
JP1
JP2
JP5 JP4
(Rev 0 Board)
• JP1 - Interrupt to Host Processor - Normally set as illustrated below.
0INTRQ
JP1 (a plug is installed)
• JP2 - Synchronize Clock for NPRIF and NPRM - Normally set as illustrated below.
JP2 (a plug is installed on `4')

10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1-3 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
1-2-2 NPRIF Board (continued)

• JP4 - Reset for CPLD Write - Normally set as illustrated below.
JP4 (a plug is installed on the `1' side)
FULL_RST
1
• JP5 - Clock for Global Memory Access - Normally set as illustrated below.
(Rev 0 Board) (Rev 1 Board)

GND
4F1
VCC
GND
4F0
VCC
4F1
JP5 (a plug is installed as illustrated)

• JP6 - Connection Port - Do not install a plug.
1-4 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
1-2-3 NPRM Board
Illustration 1-4 NPRM
NPRS4 NPRS5
NPRS3 NPRS6
NPRS2 NPRS7
NPRS1 NPRS8
S1
SIMM2
SIMM1
JP1, JP2, JP21
JP8 JP20
JP19
JP8
JP1, JP2, JP21 (All Open)
VCC
JP20
GND
128MB
64MB
S1
JP19
8 Bit0
7
Bit1
6
Bit2
5
Bit3
4 Bit4
3 For JP19, refer
Bit5
N 2 to the Jumper
Bit6 (Example Setting)
O 1 table below.
Bit7
ON
1-5 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
1-2-3 NPRM Board (continued)

Jumper
• JP1, JP2, JP21, JP8, JP19, JP20 - Normally set as illustrated above.
• JP9 - Normally set according to the table blow.
JP19 SIMM Specification

One or two
32MB SIMM 128MB
32MB SIMM
used
64MB
32MB: Chips mounted on both sides (Mitsubishi)

JP19
One or two 64MB SIMM

128MB
64MB SIMM
used
64MB
JP19
64MB: Chips mounted on one side (Transcend)
1-6 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
1-2-3 NPRM Board (continued)
Switch
• S1 - Refer to the following table for a proper setting.
Note
S1 switch settings referred to in this table are set using the markings on the NPRM board, not the
markings on the switch.
Note
For the system of CT/e Dual, ProSpeed AII/EII/FII series, all 8 NPRS boards must be installed in
normal use. S1 switch settings should be the highlighted one in this table. For V/R 2.06 or later, it
allows to use 2 or 4 NPRS boards only for troubleshooting.
Bit 7 & 6 Setting Bit 3 ∼ 0 Setting

Bit7 Bit6 - Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 -
0 1 SIMM1 only is installed (32 MB 0 0 0 0 No NPRS is installed.
SIMM x 1).
1 0 SIMM1 & SIMM2 are installed 0 0 0 1 NPRS1 only is installed.
(32MB SIMM x 2).
1 1 SIMM1 only is installed (64 MB 0 0 1 0 NPRS1 & NPRS2 are installed.
SIMM x 1).
1 1 SIMM1 & SIMM2 are installed 0 0 1 1 NPRS1 -- NPRS3 are installed.
(64MB SIMM x 2).
-- 0 1 0 0 NPRS1 -- NPRS4 are installed.
0 1 0 1 NPRS1 -- NPRS5 are installed.
Bit 7, Bit6, ... , or Bit0 are ‘1’, when switches 1, 2, ... , or 8 of S1 are set to ‘ON’, respectively.
Bit7, Bit6: Set to the number of SIMM’s installed. When installing one SIMM, install it to location ‘SIMM1.’
Bit 5, Bit4: Not used. Set to ‘0’, respectively.
Bit3, Bit2, Bit1, Bit0: Set to the number of NPRS boards installed. The locations of boards should be as
described above.
An example shown in Illustration 1-4 is a setting for the following:

One SIMM is installed to location ‘SIMM1.’
Two NPRS boards are installed to locations ‘NPRS1’ and ‘NPRS2.’
1-7 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
1-2-4 NPRS Board

This board is installed on the NPRM board.
Illustration 1-5 NPRS
JP11 JP12
A Side
B Side
JP12 JP11
U15 U5
+
C22
J1
• JP11, JP12 - Normally set as illustrated above.
1-8 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
1-3 BOARDS ON CONNECTOR BOX
1-3-1 REAR CN1
RearCN1 (2140183-2)
Illustration 1-6 REAR CN1
JP4 JP5
JP3
JP2
JP1
JP7
JP6
JP9
JP8
REAR CN1 ASSY
• JP1 - Safety Loop Control - Normally set as illustrated below (SAFEON).
SAFEON OFF
JP1
Setting Description
SAFEON Enables software to control the safety loop.
OFF Disables software to control the safety loop.
The safety line is always connected on the REAR CN1 board.
1-9 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
1-3-1 REAR CN1 (continued)

• JP2, 4, 5 - Minimum Intercom Volume - Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP2, 4, 5
Jumper Description
J2 for Auto Voice Close:
When the volume dial on the keyboard is set to the minimum end, the OC
speaker volume becomes zero.
Open:
Though the volume dial on the keyboard is set to the minimum end, the OC
speaker volume does not go down beyond a set minimum level.
J4 for To Patient
J5 for From Patient
• JP3 - Talk On SW - Normally set as illustrated below (NRM).
JP3
ON
NRM
OFF
Jumper Position Description

ON ‘Talk On’ switch is set to ON.
NRM The ‘Talk On’ switch on the keyboard is used for the intercom function.
OFF ‘Talk On’ switch is set to OFF.
The ON and OFF jumper positions are used when using the intercom function without the
keyboard.
1-10 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039

• JP6, 7 - TGP Communication - Normally set as illustrated below.
T T
JP6 JP7

(for both JP6 & JP7)
T When the OC alone is used (not connected with the gantry), the
message transmission and receive are jumpered with these
settings.
(Not T side) The OC communicates with the TGP board.
• JP8, 9 - Fan Alarm Enable/Disable - Normally set as illustrated below (FAN).
FAN
JP8 JP9
Jumper Description
J8 for the fan alarm device FAN (jumper opened):

connected to J11 The fan alarm device is used for safety purpose.
Not FAN (jumper shorted):
The function of the fan alarm device is disabled.
J9 for the fan alarm device

connected to J10

REV 20 2326039
RearCN1 (5237815)
Illustration 1-7 REAR CN1
JP4 JP5
JP10
JP3
JP2
JP1
JP7
JP6
JP9
JP8
REAR CN1 ASSY
• JP1~JP9 - Refer to RearCN1 (2140183-2) setup.

• JP10 - TGP reset 18” shutoff enable/disable - Normally set as illustrated below.
1 2 3

1-2 Enable TGP Reset 18” shutoff
2-3 Disable TGP Reset 18” shutoff

REV 20 2326039
1-3-2 DASIFN2 (2323521)
Illustration 1-8 DASIFN
J3
JP6
JP5
JP4
JP8
S2
S1
DASIFN ASSY
JP3
JP2
JP1
JP7
Switch
• S1, S2 - Normally set as illustrated below.
ON
1 2 3 4
Jumper
• JP1~JP6 - Normally set as illustrated below.
• JP7 - Normally set as illustrated below.
• JP8 - The baud rate setting - Normally set as illustrated below.
JP8
95M buad
110M buad

REV 20 2326039
1-4 BOARDS/DEVICES PERIPHERAL BOX
1-4-1 FRONT PNL Assy (2136996-2) (For O2 Computer)
Illustration 1-9 FRONT PNL (2136996-2)
S2
J1
JP1
JP2 S1
Push
SW
• S1 - Push Switch
• S2, JP1, JP2 - Power OFF Delay Time - Normally set as illustrated below.
S2
ON `1' JP1 (Opened)
(1, 2, 3, 4: OFF)
`0'
1 2 3 4 JP2 (Shorted)
The delay time for the OC power off can be varied by the settings of S2 and JP1, or, S2 and JP2,
according to the following illustration and Table 1-2.

REV 20 2326039
1-4-1 FRONT PNL Assy (2136996-2) (For O2 Computer) (continued)
Table 1-1 Power Off Delay Time (2136996-2)
S2 JP1 JP2
(when shorted) (when shorted)
(sec) (sec)
Hexadecimal 1 2 3 4
Number
F ON ON ON ON 24 48
E ON ON ON OFF 26 52
D ON ON OFF ON 28 55
C ON ON OFF OFF 31 62
B ON OFF ON ON 30 60
A ON OFF ON OFF 34 68
9 ON OFF OFF ON 37 73
8 ON OFF OFF OFF 43 87
7 OFF ON ON ON 44 87
6 OFF ON ON OFF 54 109
5 OFF ON OFF ON 62 123
4 OFF ON OFF OFF 88 175
3 OFF OFF ON ON 79 157
2 OFF OFF ON OFF 130 259
1 OFF OFF OFF ON 188 376
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF ∞ ∞
Short either JP1 or JP2; DO NOT short both JP1 and JP2 jumpers at the same time.
If a time of more than 50 sec is to be set, use JP2 (short JP2).

REV 20 2326039
1-4-2 FRONT PNL Assy (2396498) (For Linux Computer)
Illustration 1-10 FRONT PNL (2396498)
• JP1 (Opened / Shorted) - Can not receive “shutdown” command.
JP1 (Opened)
• J1 and Switch are the same as 2136996-2.

• CN1 - Host Computer is communicatted with new front panel, Host Computer can receive and send
RS232 Command.
LED Functions:
• LED - Flashes 3 times when pushing SW.
• LED - “on” when Host Computer is failed to control power on.

REV 20 2326039
1-4-3 CD-ROM Drive (2202991) (For O2 Computer)
Illustration 1-11 CD-ROM Drive (2202991)
Rear View
Analog Audio
Connector
Strap Signal Interface Power Supply

Connector Connector
ID PRSW
TERM Settings
SCSI ID: 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Parity: ON
Terminator: OFF
1 Logical Block Size: 512 bytes
Refer to Table 1-3.
• Jumper Plug on Strap - Normally set as illustrated above.
Table 1-2 Jumper Setting Description
No. Symbol Description

S0 ID0 SCSI ID
ID0 when all of ID0, ID1, ID2 are

open.
S1 ID1
S2 ID2
S3 PRSW Parity ON/OFF
S4 S512 Workstation
S5 TERM Terminator ON/OFF
S6 VNDR (Spare)

REV 20 2326039
1-4-4 CD-ROM Drive (2369084 & 5147738) (For Linux Computer)
Illustration 1-12 CD-ROM Dirve (2369084 & 5147738)
2369084 for 845PC (IDE)
JUMPER IDE INTERFACE DC INPUT
MASTER
SLAVE IDE
CABLE SELECT
5147738 for 865PC (SATA)
JUMPER IDE INTERFACE DC INPUT
Concave
MASTER
SLAVE
CABLE SELECT SATA
USB
Convexity
Note: The convexity of USB-IDE Connector must match the concave of CD-ROM
Drive IDE Interface, and avoids connector to slip off.

REV 20 2326039
1-4-5 3.5” MOD Drive
Illustration 1-13 MOD Drive - Top View
Rear Front
CNH1
2 4 6 CNH2
SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 3 5
Table 1-3 SW1 Switch Setting Description
SW1 Description Setting when OFF

1 SCSI ID Setting 0
2 0
3 0
4 Parity ON/OFF Unavailable
5 SCAM mode Unavailable
6 Write cache mode Unavailable
7 DOWN LOAD mode Unavailable
8 Factory Inspection mode Unavailable
• Jumper Plugs on CNH1 - Normally set as illustrated above (Full Open).

• Jumper Plugs on CNH2 - Normally set as illustrated above (Full Open).

REV 20 2326039
1-4-6 5.25” MOD Drive (2245963)

Check the MOD Drive jumper configuration. Normally set as illustrated below.
The detailed functional switch/jumper description refet to Table 1-4 and 1-5.
4 3 2 1
DC Power Connector
SCSI Connector
B1 B12
A1 A12
Jumper Function Description
Terminator Power
Enable Terminator
Device Type
Enable Fast SCSI
Disable Manual Eject
Force Verify for Write Command
Disable Auto Spin-up
Disable Write Cache
Disable SCSI Parity
SCSI ID0
SCSI ID1
SCSI ID2
Note: Settings
No jumper socket means the function is OFF.
SCSI ID: 6
Disable SCSI Parity: OFF
Disable Write Cache: ON
Disable Auto Spin-up: OFF
Force Verify for Write Command: ON
Disable Manual Eject: OFF
Enable Fast SCSI: ON
Device Type: OFF
SCSI Terminator: OFF
SCSI Terminator Power: OFF

REV 20 2326039
1-4-6 5.25” MOD Drive (Continued)
Table 1-4 Functional Switch/Jumper Assignments
Pins Switch/Jumper Function Description

A1/B1 SCSI ID2
A2/B2 SCSI ID1
A3/B3 SCSI ID0
Open pins, the drive performs SCSI parity checking (factory
A4/B4 Disable SCSI Parity default). Shorting pins with a jumper socket, forces the drive
NOT to perform the SCSI parity checking.
Open pins, the drive performs write back caching. Shorting
A5/B5 Disable Write Cache pins with a jumper socket, forces the drive NOT to perform
the write back caching.
Open pins, the drive automatically spins up the media upon
A6/B6 Disable Auto Spin-up loading (factory default). Shorting pins with a jumper socket
disables the automatic spin up.
Shorting pins, forces the drive to performs write and verify
A7/B7 Force Verify for Write Command
operation whenever the drive executes WRITE command.
A8/B8 Disable Manual Eject Shorting pins, the medium can not be manually unloaded.
A9/B9 Enable Fast SCSI Shorting pins enables Fast SCSI mode.
Open pins, the drive responds as an optical memory device
A10/B10 Device Type (type 7) (Factory default). Shorting pins, the drive responds
as a direct access device (type 0).
This functional switch informs the drive whether to adapt the
A11/B11 Enable Termination internal SCSI active terminator. Shorting pins enables the
SCSI termination.
A12/B12 Terminator Power Shorting pins enables the SCSI TERMPWR signal.
Table 1-5 SCSI ID Setting
Pins
SCSI ID
A1/B1 A2/B2 A3/B3
0 OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF OFF ON
2 OFF ON OFF
3 OFF ON ON
4 ON OFF OFF
5 ON OFF ON
6 ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON

REV 20 2326039
1-4-6 5.25” MOD Drive (Continued)

IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
S501, S502 - Do not change these dip switches setting as were factory-set.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
ON
ON
S502
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
S501 ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 1-6 Optional Dip Switch Assignments
Optional Switch Switch Number Function Description

1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Disable Command Eject Disables Eject by command
4 Reserved
S501
5 Enable Library I/F Mode Library I/F Mode will be valid
6 Reserved
7 Disable Write Cache Disables Write Cache setting upon power on
8 Disable Auto Spin-up Disables Auto Spin-up upon cartridge loading
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
S502 5 Disable SCAM Selection Disable SCAM function
6 Reserved
7 Enable Fast SCSI Fast SCSI Mode will be set
Enable Write Cache for Write Cache for Write and Verify command will
8
Write and Verify Command be valid

REV 20 2326039
1-4-7 Hard Disk Drive (2205368) (For O2 Computer)
Illustration 1-14 Hard Disk Drive (2205368)
2 6
1 5
CN7
CN6 Settings
Terminator Power (1-2): ON
Spin-up Mode (3-4): Immediately CN6
Terminator (5-6): Enable
CN7 Setting
2 16 SCSI ID: 1
1 15
Print Board
• Jumper Plugs on CN6, CN7 - Normally set as illustrated above.

REV 20 2326039
1-4-8 Hard Disk Drive (2256860/2282749/2329957/2376479) (For O2 Computer)

• Jumper Plugs on J13 - Normally set as illustrated below.
Illustration 1-15 Hard Disk Drive (2256860/2282749/2329957/2376479)
J13
27 1
28 2
SCSI ID (3)
SCSI ID (2)
SCSI ID (1)
SCSI ID (0)
(KEY)
DELAY SPIN
FORCE SE
NC
BUSY OUT
WRITE PROTECT
STAGGER SPIN
NO WIDE
RESERVED
TERM POWER
27 1
Setting for 1st HDD (SCSI ID:1)
28 2
27 1
Setting for 2nd HDD (SCSI ID:2)
28 2

REV 20 2326039
1-4-9 Hard Disk Drive (5166701) (For O2 Computer)

• J3 - Option Header, normally set as illustrated below.
J3 Option Header
17 1
18 2
SCSI ID (3)
SCSI ID (2)
SCSI ID (1)
SCSI ID (0)
BUSY LED (-/+)
WRT PROJECT
STAGGER SPIN
DELAY SPIN
SINGLE ENDED
17 1
Setting for 1st HDD (SCSI ID:1)
18 2
17 1
Setting for 2nd HDD (SCSI ID:2)
18 2

REV 20 2326039
1-4-10 Hard Disk Drive (2369083) (For Linux Computer)
Options jumper block
Master or single drive
Drive is slave
Master with non ATA-

compatible slave
Cable select
Limit drive capacity

to 32 Gbytes
7 5 3 1
8 6 4 2 Circuit Board
Master / Slave Jumper Settings
The system with Linux Computer OC has two Hard Disk Drives: System/Imaging HDD and Rawdate HDD.
The options jumper block shown above is used to configure the drive for operation. It is the 8-pin dual header be-
tween the interface connector and the power connector. Use the following settings to configure the drive as a master
or a slave.
Master or single drive. The drive is configured at the factory for a master or single-drive operation with a jumper
set on pins 7 and 8.
Drive as slave. Remove all jumpers.
Drive as master with a non-ATA-compatible slave. Use this jumper setting only if the drive does not work as a
master with no jumpers installed.

REV 20 2326039
1-4-11 Hard Disk Drive (5133747) (For Linux Computer)

SATA Hard Disk Drive (5133747) has three models, Seagate ST3160023AS, Western Digital WD1600SD and
Western Digital WD1601ABYS.
• For Seagate ST3160023AS, no jumper.
• For Western Digital WD1600SD, see illustration 1-18.
Illustration 1-18 SATA Hard Disk Drive Jumper Setting
For Spread Spectrum Clocking
• For Western Digital WD1601ABYS, ignore jumper setting, see illustration 1-19.
Illustration 1-19 WD1601ABYS SATA HDD
IMPORTANT NOTE: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
When connect the SATA Cables, be sure that the upper HDD is connected to the upper con-
nector (SATA 0). Otherwise System Disk and Image Disk may be mixed up during next HDD
replacement and software loading will result in losing image.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

REV 20 2326039
1-5 OTHER CIRCUIT BOARD
1-5-1 NAA1
Illustration 1-20 NAA1
NAA1 ASSY
JP1
JP3
VR1
JP2
JP4
• JP3, 4 - Input Impedance - Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP3, 4
Jumper Description
JP3 for Line1+ Sets an input impedance for the line input,
Line 1+ or Line2+.
Shorted: Sets Low Impedance (680 ohms).

Open: Sets High Impedance (22 kohms).
JP4 for Line2+
• JP2 - OC Speaker Volume - Normally set as illustrated below (Lo).
JP2 Lo
Hi
Position Description
Hi Sets the volume to High.
Lo Sets the volume to Low.

REV 20 2326039
1-5-1 NAA1 (continued)

• JP1 - Ground Connection - Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP1
FG< >GND
Setting Description
Short Connects the NAA1 board analog ground to

the frame ground.
Open Disconnects the NAA1 board analog ground

and the frame ground.
• VR1 - OC Speaker Volume - Normally set as illustrated below (Center).
VR1
Setting Description
Counterclockwise Sets the volume quieter.
Clockwise Sets the volume louder.

REV 20 2326039
1-5-2 PCI Host Card
Illustration 1-21 PCI Host Card
J2 J5 J6
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
J3 J4
1 1
2 2
3 3
BIT 3 COMPUTER CORPORATION MADE IN U.S.A.
Edge Connector
• J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 - Normally set as illustrated above.

REV 20 2326039
SECTION 2 - GANTRY/TABLE
2-1 SWITCHES AT GANTRY REAR BASE
Illustration 2-1 Gantry Rear Base Switches
2-1 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
2-1 SWITCHES AT GANTRY REAR BASE (CONTINUED)
Table 2-1 Gantry Rear Base Switches
NORMAL
SWITCH FUNCTION
SETTING
Powers On/Off the gantry axial motor and servo amplifier with
Rotate ON
AC 200 V.
Powers On/Off the x-ray generator on the gantry rotaries frame
XG Power (Safety Loop) ON with three-phase 380 ∼ 480 V by closing/opening the Safety
Loop.
Powers On/Off components (including TGP board) on the
Table/Tilt ON
gantry stationary frame and the table with AC 115 V.
Powers On/Off components on the rotative frame (DAS,
Slip Ring 115V ON
Temperature Controller, OGP board, etc.) with AC 115 V.
NOTICE
Avoid frequent switching ON/OFF of the XG Power switch (more than on On/Off per minute),
otherwise which will cause overheat in the x-ray generator and the Power Distribution Unit
(PDU), due to repeated charge/discharge of capacitors in them.
NOTICE
While the XG Power switch is switched ON, avoid frequent switching On/Off of the Table/Tilt
switch (more than one On/Off per minute), otherwise which will cause overheat in the x-ray
generator and the PDU, due to repeated charge/discharge of capacitors in them.
2-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
2-2 TGP
Illustration 2-2 TGP
ON
OFF
SW1 SW5
JP3 RESET
LED's
EMRG RESET S2 TEST1
JP2 TEST2
G1 G8
S1 S3
T1 T8 M1 M8
JP1
2-3 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
2-2 TGP (CONTINUED)
Jumper
• JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6 - Normally set as illustrated below.
Jumper Setting Description

Sets a mode where the cradle can be unlatched also by the
IHHC (1-2 pins)
fluoroscopy controller.
JP1
Sets a mode where the cradle can be latched/unlatched only
NORMAL (2-3 pins)
by the table latch switch.
Sets a mode where the emergency signal lines are not
not DETECT (1-2 pins)
monitored.
JP2 Sets a mode where the emergency signal lines are
DETECT (2-3 pins) monitored to decelerate the cradle during the emergency
stop.
GANTSW with lock Sets a mode where the gantry switches are electrically cut off
(1-2 pins) when a mat switch does not foot on.
JP3
Sets a mode where the gantry switches are electrically
normal (2-3 pins)
available unrelated with mat switch condition.
JP4 This Jumper is not supported yet. Always set Normal.
They are the Jumpers for Advantx ACT System (Vascular + CT system). Always be
JP5, JP6
shorted when used as a CT system.
2-4 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
2-2 TGP (CONTINUED)
Dip Switches
• S1, S2, S3 - Normally set as described in Tables 2-2 and 2-3.
Note: Switch OFF position
OFF
WARNING
UNCONTROLLED GANTRY RESPONSE! CONFIRM THAT THE DIP SWITCHES ON THE TGP
BOARD ARE SET AS DESCRIBED ABOVE, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. IF ANY OF
THE SWITCHES ARE SET TO ON, THE GANTRY MIGHT BEHAVE DANGEROUSLY.
Table 2-2 S1 Description
Normal
Switch Description
Setting
When set to ON, disables the temporary halt function of table up or gantry
T1 OFF
tilt operation.
OFF or When set to ON, the lowest table height allowed can be changed. For
T2
ON details, see the Table tab.
When set to ON, disables the interlock function of table up/down and
T3 OFF
S1 gantry tilt.
OFF or When set to ON, the most extended cradle In-position allowed can be
T4
ON changed. For details, see the Table tab.
T5 OFF (Not used)
T6 OFF When set to ON, Table/Tilt off-line test programs can be executed.
T7 ∼ T8 OFF (Not used)
2-5 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
2-2 TGP (CONTINUED)
Table 2-3 S2, S3 Description

Normal
Switch Description
Setting
G1 OFF (Not used)
G2 OFF When set to ON, the gantry rotation initialization is not executed.
G3 OFF (Not used)
Normally set to OFF.
For TGP board of 2156510-5 or later, this switch can select a positioning light
OFF or operation mode as follows:
S2 G4
ON OFF: The positioning lights turn ON with the x-ray tube at the home position.
ON: The positioning lights turn ON with the x-ray tube at the home or 270 deg.
position; for detailed operations, see Illustration 2-3.
G5 OFF (Not used)
G6 OFF When set to ON, Gantry Rotation off-line test programs can be executed.
G7 ∼ G8 OFF (Not used)
M1 ∼ M4 OFF (Not used)
When set to ON, x-ray tube MA is displayed on the gantry position display and
M5 OFF
S3 KV is displayed on the height display.
M6 OFF When set to ON, Communication/Scan off-line test programs can be executed.
M7 ∼ M8 OFF (Not used)
Illustration 2-3 0/270 deg. Positioning Light Operation

Single Push of Pos. Light Switch
Double Push of Pos. Light Switch
Tube: Home Position Tube: 270 deg. Position

Pos. Lights: OFF Pos. Lights: OFF
Tube: Home Position Tube: 270 deg. Position

Pos. Lights: ON Pos. Lights: ON
Tube: other than Home or 270 deg. Positions

Pos. Lights: OFF
2-6 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
2-2 TGP (CONTINUED)
Service Switches (SW1 ∼ SW5)

The following five switches on the TGP board provide off-line control of gantry rotation.
Illustration 2-4 TGP Service Switches
TGP BOARD
SYS ABT SPD2 FAST CNT
HOME
SPD1
SVE
OFF
MID
MNL FIX SPD0 SLOW 90
NOTICE
Except in emergency, do not set the SYS/OFF/MNL switch to OFF while the gantry is
rotating, or the static brake will be damaged.
NOTICE
Repeated acceleration and deceleration operations of the gantry over a limited period of
time with these service switches may cause an Overload Alarm state or overheating of the
energy dissipation resistor in the servo amplifier.
When doing the operations, take a pause of approximately 20 seconds before changing the
speed.
Note
If the gantry is continuously rotated by the ABT position of the ABT/SVE/FIX switch, this may cause
an overflow of the azimuth counter on the TGP board, resulting an abnormal operation of the gantry.
If this occurs, press the reset button on the TGP board.
2-7 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
2-2 TGP (CONTINUED)
Table 2-4 Service Switch - SW1
SWITCH SWITCH POSITION FUNCTION
SYS
SYS
OFF The gantry and table are controlled by system.
(Normal Position)
MNL
OFF The gantry rotation is disabled.

The gantry rotation is controlled by the other service switches
MNL
described below.
SWITCH SWITCH POSITION FUNCTION

ABT
This is a spring loaded switch. Rotates the gantry until the gantry
ABT rotates to a position determined by the CNT/HOME/90× switch.
SVE Rotation Speed: 15.0 sec/Rev
SVE The servo amplifier is in ready-to-operate state; however, since

(Normal Position) the speed command is zero volts, the gantry will not rotate.
Same as ABT except that the speed is determined by the SPD2/
FIX
SPD1/SPD0 and FAST/MID/SLOW switches
2-8 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
2-2 TGP (CONTINUED)
Table 2-6 Service Switch - SW3 & SW4
SWITCH ROTATION SPEED

SPD1
SWITCH
SPD0 (Normal SPD2
POSITION
Position)
SPD2
SPD1
SPD0
SLOW 15 sec/Rev 3 sec/Rev 1.0 sec/Rev
FAST
MID
SLOW
MID
10 sec/Rev 2 sec/Rev 1.0 sec/Rev
(Normal Position)
FAST 5 sec/Rev 1.5 sec/Rev 1.0 sec/Rev
The rotation speed is determined by a combination of the two switch settings as
described above.
SWITCH
SWITCH FUNCTION
POSITION
CNT
CNT Continuous rotation
HOME
905
HOME
Home (zero degrees) position
(Normal Position)
90 − 90 degrees position
2-9 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 20 2326039
2-2 TGP (CONTINUED)
Push Switches
• SW6 - RESET - Resets the gantry.
• SW7 - TEST1 - Increments the program No. of the TGP off-line test.
• SW8 - TEST2 - Used in the TGP off-line test.
• SW9 - EMRG RESET - When power supply for the gantry and table is cut off by an emergency switch,
the switch SW9 restores the power supply.
NOTICE
While the XG Power switch is switched ON at the gantry rear base, avoid performing
frequent alternate operations of Emergency OFF - Reset - Emergency OFF - Reset - ... (more
than one operation / minute), otherwise which will cause overheat in the x-ray generator and
the Power Distribution Unit (PDU), due to repeated charge/discharge of capacitors in them.
2-3 SUB BD
Illustration 2-5 SUB BD
SUB BD ASSY
SW1
SW2
• SW1 - SERVICE - Normally set to OFF.

When set to ON, the gantry static brake is released, and the gantry can be rotated by hand. With this
setting (ON), the servo amplifier is disabled to operate.
• SW2 - SV AMP RESET - An alarm state of the servo amplifier can be cleared by pushing this button.
(When the servo amplifier displays numbers other than ’0’ or ’-’ on its LED, it is in an alarm state.)

REV 20 2326039
2-4 OGP
Illustration 2-6 OGP
CN7
CN2
S3 S5
S4
• S3, S4, S5 - Normally set as illustrated below.
ON ON ON
S3 1 8 S4 1 8 S5 1 8
ON: For the Gantry with none 1mm slice collimator

OFF : For the Gantry with 1mm slice collimator

REV 20 2326039
2-5 DTRF2 (2326041)
Illustration 2-7 DTRF2
DTRF ASSY
JP12
JP13
JP3
JP15
JP14
JP4
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP8
JP9
Jumper
• JP3~JP5 - Normally set as illustrated below.
• JP6 ∼ JP9 - Normally set as illustrated below.

JP6 JP7 JP8 JP9
• JP12 - Normally set as illstrated below.

REV 20 2326039
2-5 DTRF2 (2326041) (CONTINUED)

JP13
95M buad
110M buad
• JP14, JP15 - Normally set as illustrated below.
CLK SS%
SRC - 3.75%
JP14 JP15
SS - 1.25%

REV 20 2326039
2-6 NAA2
Illustration 2-8 NAA2
NAA2 ASSY
JP2
JP1
VR1
• JP1 - Input Impedance - Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP1
Jumper Description
Sets an input impedance for the line input
Line 1+.
JP1 for Line1+
Shorted: Sets Low Impedance (680 ohms).
Open: Sets High Impedance (22 kohms).

REV 20 2326039
2-6 NAA2 (CONTINUED)

• JP2 - Ground Connection - Normally set as illustrated below (Open).
JP2
FG< >GND
Setting Description
Connects the NAA2 board analog ground to
Short
the frame ground.
Disconnects the NAA2 board analog ground
Open
and the frame ground.
• VR1 - From Patient Intercom Volume - Normally set as illustrated below (Center).
VR1
Setting Description
Counterclockwise Sets the volume quieter.
Clockwise Sets the volume louder.

REV 20 2326039
2-7 TBL BD
Illustration 2-9 TBL BD
JP1
TBL BD ASSY
1 2 3
JP1
no IMS
with IMS

REV 0 2326039
SECTION 3 - DAS / DETECTOR
3-1 CIF BOARD
SW2
• Set all the switches to OFF.
Illustration 3-1 SW2 Setting
Switch Description
1 Action enable:
When manual selection or special function 0 is selected, operation by toggle switch is enabled or
disabled.
OFF: operation disable
ON: operation enable
2 Zch Ratio:
Set Zch ratio used during tracking.
OFF: Uses value downloaded from OC via System Config communication.
ON: Uses specified value of ROM table
3 SPCFM0 Mode Selection. See below.
4 SPCFM1
5 Stand Alone mode:
OFF: Normal mode
ON: Stand alone mode (system config communication is skipped.)
6 Operation Selection. See below.
7
8
3-1 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
3-1 CIF BOARD(CONTINUED)

Mode Selection, selected by combination of SW3 and SW4
Mode Selection
SW3 SW4 Mode
OFF OFF Normal/Manual mode
OFF ON Special Function 0
ON OFF Special Function 1
ON ON Not used
Operation Selection, selected by combination of SW6, SW7, and SW8
Normal / Manual Mode (selected by SW3–OFF and SW4–OFF)

SW6 SW7 SW8 Operation
OFF OFF OFF No motion
OFF OFF ON FWD, 10 pulses of travel
OFF ON OFF FWD, 100 pulses of travel
ON OFF ON BWD, 10 pulses of travel
ON ON OFF BWD, 100 pulses of travel
– ON ON Home position
Note: Set the dip switch above, then press the toggle switch on the CIF board to execute the selected mode..
Special Function 0 Mode (selected by SW3–OFF and SW4–ON)
OFF OFF OFF Vibration: The collimator vibrates, using for belt tension adjustment.
OFF OFF ON Test motion 0: The collimator moves 20 pulses of a reciprocating
motion for test.
OFF ON OFF Test motion 1: The collimator moves 140 pulses of a reciprocating
motion for test.
OFF ON ON Not used
– ON ON Not used
Note: Set the dip switch above, then press the toggle switch on the CIF board to execute the selected mode. To
return from this mode, reset is required.
(Continued)
3-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
Special Function 1 Mode (selected by SW3–ON and SW4–OFF)

OFF OFF OFF ZIGZAG: The collimator moves zigzag. This mode can be used in
combination with a tracking mode.
OFF OFF Step A: The collimator moves in 20 pulse steps.
OFF ON OFF Step B: The collimator moves in 5 pulse steps.
OFF ON ON Step C: The collimator moves + 10 pulse every one scan.
ON OFF OFF Step D: The collimator moves + 1 pulse every one scan.
SW3
• Normally set as illustrated below.
If switch ‘8’ is set to ON as illustrated, data is transferred at the time of ‘Zero Detect.’
(Do not forget to set this switch to OFF later.)
Illustration 3-2 SW3 Setting

ON
O
N
for 2320229
8
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
SW3
RESET
3-3 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
Switch Description
1 Not used
2
3
4
5
6 For multi–gain set–up. See below.
7
8 For investigation of Zero Detect data.
ON: Investigation mode
OFF: Normal mode (No investigation)
Multi–gain set–up
Dip switch –> 6 7
Gain, Automatic OFF OFF
Gain 1 ON OFF
Gain 2 OFF ON
Gain 3 ON ON
3-4 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
3-2 TEMP CONT BOARD
Illustration 3-3 TEMP CONT
TEMP CONT ASSY
SW3
SW1
SW2
SW4
DIP Switch
• SW4 - Normally set as illustrated below.
SW4
ON
1 2 3 4 OFF
• SW3 - No effect.
Rotational Switch
• SW1, SW2 - No effect.
3-5 SWITCH / JUMPER

3-6 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
SECTION 4 - X-RAY GENERATOR
4-1 KV MEASURE BOARD
4-1-1 Illustration
CAUTION This board forms part of the oil seal of the High Voltage Tank. It can only be
removed at the factory. The Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) is the complete HV Tank.
LF
C
SF
4-1 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
4-1-2 Switches and Jumpers

None.
4-1-3 Fuses
None.
4-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
4-2 FILAMENT BOARD 1 INV
4-2-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS3 GOES

DANGER
OUT.
DC
160v LF Common
SF
DS3 - Green - +160v

DC present
160v DS4 - Yellow - Inverter

DC Output Running
0
SF_LF - Yellow - Small ON - Yellow - Invert

Focus / Large Focus er Command ON
Relay Feedback
RST - Red - Board being
reset or powered up
DS2 - Yellow - Status

LED
DS1 - Yellow - Status

LED
4-3 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039

None.
4-2-3 Fuses
None.
4-4 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
4-3 ROTATION BOARD HIGH SPEED
4-3-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS6 AND

DANGER
DS7 (NEON-ORANGE) GO OUT.
Auxiliary
DC bus Common
Main
DS6
DC bus
4-5 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039

None.
4-3-3 Fuses
None.
4-3-4 J2 Wiring
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16
115V
sense
Fan, 115v AC
Line input
Fan, 115V AC
Line output X-ray tube
Thermal safety
4-6 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
4-4 LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PH BOARD
4-4-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE AND HOT SURFACE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL INDICATOR
DANGER
NE1 (NEON - ORANGE) GOES OUT.
4-7 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039

None.
4-4-3 Fuses
None.
NE1 - Orange - indicates presence of DC Bus

+ 400
DC bus
- 400
160V
DC
0
DS2 - Green - 160 VDC
DS1 - Red - Mains Drop
4-8 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
4-5 GATE COMMAND BOARD
4-5-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT TOUCH BOARD UNTIL DS300 ON THIS BOARD and DS1
DANGER
on Dual Snub board are out.
CAUTION
Hot surface on transformer T300 and heat sink.
DS300
DC bus DS300 - Neon (Orange) -
Presence of voltage on DC
bus for Flyback Converter to
create power supplies for
both Gate Commands
DS200 - Yellow - High

IGBT* (Q200) Gate Com
DS200
mand running
DS201 - Green - Presence

DS201
DS202
of +20 V Supply on high

IGBT* Gate Command DS202 - Green - Pres
ence of -10 V Supply on
high IGBT* Gate Com
mand
Inverter
current ILP
feedback
ILR
DS100 -Yellow-Low IGBT*

(Q100) Gate Command run
DS100
ning
DS102
DS101
DS101 - Green - Presence of DS102 - Green - Pres

+20 V Supply on low IGBT* ence of -10 V Supply on
Gate Command low IGBT* Gate Command
* Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistor
4-9 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039

None.
4-5-3 Fuse
None.

REV 0 2326039
4-6 DUAL SNUB BOARD
4-6-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL INDICATOR DS1 (NEON -

DANGER
ORANGE) GOES OUT.
DS1 - Neon (Orange) - Indicates presence of voltage on DC Bus

None.
4-6-3 Fuses
None.

REV 0 2326039
4-7 IF BOARD NP
Service
Laptop
System I/F
System I/F

None.
4-7-2 Fuses
None.

REV 0 2326039
4-8 KV CONTROL BOARD
4-8-1 Illustration

REV 0 2326039
4-8-2 4Switches and Jumpers
SWITCH OR FUNCTION
JUMPER
RST RESET PUSH BUTTON
4-8-3 Fuses
None.
4-8-4 Non Volatile RAM
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
U32 NON VOLATILE PARAMETERS RAM (BATTERY INCLUDED)

REV 0 2326039
4-9 AC/DC THREE PHASE BOARD
4-9-1 Illustration
HIGH VOLTAGE: DO NOT GO INTO GENERATOR UNTIL DS1 (NEON - ORANGE)
DANGER
GOES OUT.
CAUTION
Some components on this board can become very hot.
DC Bus to inverter DC Bus out
F1 - Fuse -
DS1 - Neon Protects (on DC Bus):
(Orange) - Indi LV Power Supply 3 Phase Board
cates presence Rotor Board High Speed
of voltage on the Gate Command Board
DC Bus. Type: 15 A, 600 VDC

REV 0 2326039

None.
4-9-3 Fuses
FUSE PROTECTS: TYPE

F1 ON DC BUS FOR: 15A, 600 V DC
LV POWER SUPPLY 3 PHASE BOARD
ROTOR BOARD HIGH SPEED
GATE COMMAND BOARD

REV 0 2326039
SECTION 5 - PDU (POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT)
5-1 RMT CNT
5-1-1 RMT CNT of PDU2 (229XXXX)
Illustration 5-1 RMT CNT
JP1 K5 K7
K19 K6
JP2 K9 K24
• JP1, JP2 - Set a jumper plug according to the following table. This table describes that the JP2 jumper
on the TGP board equipped on the gantry may also be changed.
Refer to Section 2-2, TGP.
Jumper Setting
Part No. of RMT CNT Part No. of TGP: Part No. of TGP: Part No. of TGP:
2234978 or later 2285983 or later, 2299713 or later
JP2 on TGP: JP2 on TGP: JP2 on TGP:
Set a plug across pins 2-3 Set a plug across pins 2-3 Set a plug across pins 2-3
2301670 (DETECT) (DETECT) (DETECT)
JP1, JP2 on RMT CNT: JP1, JP2 on RMT CNT: JP1, JP2 on RMT CNT:
Set a plug across pins 1-2. Set a plug across pins 1-2. Set a plug across pins 1-2.
5-1 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
5-2 SWITCH / JUMPER

REV 0 2326039
APPENDIX A - SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
Symbol Publication Description

417-5032 Alternating Current
335-1 Three-phase Alternating Current

3
335-1 Three-phase Alternating Current with neutral

conductor
3N
Direct Current
417-5019 Protective Earth (Ground)
348 Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS
417-5008 OFF (Power: disconnection from the mains)
417-5007 ON (Power: connection to the mains)
Warning, HIGH VOLTAGE
Emergency Stop
A-1
REV 0 2326039
Symbol Publication Description
Type B
417-5339 X-ray Source Assembly Emitting
417-5009 Standby
Start
Table Set
Abort
Intercom
(on Operator Console)

Power On: light on
Standby: light off
Warning sign :
Radiation of Laser Apparatus
A-2
REV 0 2326039
Symbol Description
Microphone (Mic)
Contrast
Brightness
50°C System storage prior to installation:

Maintain storage temperature between -10° C and +50° C
-10°C
System storage prior to installation:

Maintain non-condensing storage
humidity below 90%
DO NOT store system longer than 90 days
Humidity 5-95%
Excluding Condensation
Air Pressure System storage and shipment:

Maintain Air Pressure between 700 and 1060hPa
700-1060hPa
A-3
REV 0 2326039
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
Any permanently installed equipment containing operator or patient accessible surfaces must provide backup
protection against electric shock,in case the BASIC INSULATION fails. In addition to BASIC INSULATION,Class1
equipment contains a direct connection to a PROTECTIVE(EARTH) CONDUCTOR which prevents shocks when a
person touches a broken piece of equipment or touches two different equipment surfaces simultaneously.
TYPE B EQUIPMENT
CLASS I, II, or III EQUIPMENT or EQUIPMENT with INTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES provide an
adequate degree of protection against electric shock arising from (allowable) LEAKAGE CURRENTS or a
breakdown in the reliability of the protective earth connection.
ORDINARY EQUIPMENT
Enclosed EQUIPMENT without protection against the ingress of water.
OPERATION 0f EQUIPMENT
CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH INTERMITTENT LOADING.
Operation in which EQUIPMENT is connected continuously to the SUPPLY MAINS.The stated permissible loading
time is so short that the long term on-load operating temperature is not attained.The ensuing interval in loading is,
however, not sufficiently long for cooling down to the long term no-load operating temperature.
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH
OXYGEN or NITROUS OXIDE
CLEANING
The system is NOT WATERPROOF. It is NOT designed to protect internal components against the ingress of
liquids.Clean external system surfaces(Gantry,table,consoles and accessories)with a soft cloth dipped in hot water
and wrung DAMP/DRY. (NOT dripping!) IF NECESSARY, use only mild (dish washing liquid) soap to remove dirt.
NOTICE
Avoid damage to equipment! Some îspray and wipeîcleaners etch and permanently cloud
clear plastic surfaces!! Use only warm water and mild liquid soap to clean surfaces.
A-4
www.gehealthcare.com
Imagination at work

GE CTe Dual - Prospeed.Fuctional Check Adjusment

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE CTe Dual - Prospeed.Fuctional Check Adjusment

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

CT/e Dual, ProSpeed AII/FII Series

Copyright © 2001-2010 by General Electric Company

VÝSTRAHA • Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

ADVARSEL • Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

WAARSCHUWING • Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

WARNING • This Service Manual is available in English only.

HOIATUS • Käesolev teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

VAROITUS • Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.

ATTENTION • Ce manuel de service n'est disponible qu'en anglais.

WARNUNG • Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in Englischer Sprache.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ • Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

FIGYELMEZTETÉS • Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

AÐVÖRUN • Þessi þjónustuhandbók er eingöngu fáanleg á ensku.

AVVERTENZA • Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in inglese.

경고 • 본 서비스 지침서는 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 .

BRDINJUMS • Šī apkalpes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

ĮSPĖJIMAS • Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra prieinamas tik anglų kalba.

ADVARSEL • Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

OSTRZEŻENIE • Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

ATENÇÃO • Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

ATENŢIE • Acest manual de service este disponibil numai în limba engleză.

ОСТОРОЖНО! • Данное руководство по обслуживанию предлагается только на английском

UPOZORENJE • Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

UPOZORNENIE • Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

ATENCION • Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

VARNING • Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.

DIKKAT • Bu servis kilavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕН • Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

UPOZORENJE • Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

OPOZORILO • Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Tab - Section Page REV 5 (Table) i 0

Title page 21 Elevation Functions 1-1 to 1-7 19

OC Components (For O2 Compu-

DC Power Suplies 1-1 to 1-3 20

Gantry Updated Gantry Tilt Angle Adjustment. (Sec. 5)

System Deleted rear lead plate for Collimator. (Sec. 4)

Gantry Updated NPDAS Power Supply modules. (Sec. 1)

DAS/Detector Updated NPDAS Power Supply modules. (Sec. 2)

Switch/Jumper Updated DASIFN switches and jumpers setting. (Sec. 1)

System Updated GEMS-Asia Support Center. (Sec. 2 and Sec. 3)

14 07/11/07 Switch/Jumper Added new RearCN1 (5237815) jumper setup. (Sec. 1)

Gantry Updated Slip Ring Cleaning information. (Sec. 4)

12 04/18/06 System Updated LFC Procedure contents. (Sec. 3)

Switch/Jumper Updated Linux OC CD-ROM Drive. (Sec. 1)

10 03/16/05 System Added contents of port type. (Sec. 3)

Switch/Jumper Added detailed position of S1 on DASIFN2 Board (Sec. 1)

Gantry Updated: Step 3 for 3-4 ROTATION SPEED (Sec. 3)

6 11/10/03 System Updated: Info of Setting Gamma Value (Sec. 3)

5 08/28/03 System Updated: LFC Procedure (Part 1 and 2) (Sec. 3)

X-ray Generator Changed: “System Func. Check” to “Diagnostics” (Sec. 1, Sec. 2)

Switch/Jumper Updated: Information of Linux Computer OC (Sec. 1)

Switch/Jumper Updated: NPRM Board (Sec. 1)

Switch/Jumper Added some information of NPRS (Sec. 1)

SECTION 1 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

SECTION 2 - TORQUE VALUE FOR SCREW TIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

SECTION 3 - COMMON PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1